TRADEMARKS
IMPORTANT:
READ BEFORE DOWNLOADING, COPYING, INSTALLING OR USING.
By downloading, copying, installing or using the software you agree to this license. If you do not agree
to this license, do not download, install, copy or use the software.
Intel License Agreement For Open Source Computer Vision Library
Copyright © 2000, Intel Corporation, all rights reserved. Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
• Redistribution’s of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
• Redistribution’s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• The name of Intel Corporation may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties,
including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are
disclaimed. In no event shall Intel or contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary,
or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use,
data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict
liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of this software, even if
advised of the possibility of such damage.
All information provided related to future Intel products and plans is preliminary and subject to change at any time, without notice.
SD is a registered trademark or a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
CompactFlash is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sandisk Corporation.
Memory Stick is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sony Corporation.
SmartMedia is a registered trademark or a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
MultiMediaCard (MMC) is a registered trademark or a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.
xD-Picture Card is a registered trademark or a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
IBM is a registered trademark or a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.
All other brands and product names mentioned in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective companies. However, the
explanations for markings such as ® and ™ are not clearly described within the text.
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing this machine. Before using this machine, carefully read the “IMPORTANT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS”, and then study this manual for the correct operation of the various functions.
In addition, after you have finished reading this manual, store it where it can quickly be accessed for
future reference.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Please read these safety instructions before attempting to use the machine.
DANGER
- To reduce the risk of electrical shock
1 Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet immediately after using, when cleaning, making any user
servicing adjustments mentioned in this manual, or if you are leaving the machine unattended.
WARNING
- To reduce the risk of burns, fire, electrical shock, or injury to
persons.
2 Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet when making any adjustments mentioned in the instruction
manual.
• To unplug the machine, switch the machine to the symbol “O” position to turn it off, then grasp the plug and pull
it out of the electrical outlet. Do not pull on the cord.
• Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet. Do not use an extension cord.
• Always unplug your machine if the power is cut.
3 Electrical Hazards:
• This machine should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the rating label. Do not
connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure what kind of power source you have, contact a
qualified electrician.
• This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only.
4 Never operate this machine if it has a damaged cord or plug, if it is not working properly, has been dropped or
damaged, or water is spilled on the unit. Return the machine to the nearest authorized retailer for examination,
repair, electrical or mechanical adjustment.
• While the machine is stored or in use if you notice anything unusual, such as an odor, heat, discoloration or
deformation, stop using the machine immediately and unplug the power cord.
• When transporting the sewing machine, be sure to carry it by its handle. Lifting the sewing machine by any other
part may damage the machine or result in the machine falling, which could cause injuries.
• When lifting the sewing machine, be careful not to make any sudden or careless movements, otherwise you may
injure your back or knees.
B-1
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
5 Always keep your work area clear:
• Never operate the machine with any air openings blocked. Keep ventilation openings of the sewing machine and
foot control free from the build up of lint, dust, and loose cloth.
• Do not store objects on the foot controller.
• Do not use extension cords. Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet.
• Never drop or insert foreign objects in any opening.
• Do not operate where aerosol (spray) products are being used or where oxygen is being administered.
• Do not use the machine near a heat source, such as a stove or iron; otherwise, the machine, power cord or
garment being sewn may ignite, resulting in fire or an electric shock.
• Do not place this sewing machine on an unstable surface, such as an unsteady or slanted table, otherwise the
sewing machine may fall, resulting in injuries.
6 Special care is required when sewing:
• Always pay close attention to the needle. Do not use bent or damaged needles.
• Keep fingers away from all moving parts. Special care is required around the machine needle.
• Switch the sewing machine to the symbol “O” position to turn it off when making any adjustments in the needle
area.
• Do not use a damaged or incorrect needle plate, as it could cause the needle to break.
• Do not push or pull the fabric when sewing, and follow careful instruction when free motion stitching so that
you do not deflect the needle and cause it to break.
7 This machine is not a toy:
• Your close attention is necessary when the machine is used by or near children.
• The plastic bag that this sewing machine was supplied in should be kept out of the reach of children or disposed
of. Never allow children to play with the bag due to the danger of suffocation.
• Do not use outdoors.
8 For a longer service life:
• When storing this machine, avoid direct sunlight and high humidity locations. Do not use or store the machine
near a space heater, iron, halogen lamp, or other hot objects.
• Use only neutral soaps or detergents to clean the case. Benzene, thinner, and scouring powders can damage the
case and machine, and should never be used.
• Always consult the operation manual when replacing or installing any assemblies, the presser feet, needle, or
other parts to assure correct installation.
9 For repair or adjustment:
• If the light unit is damaged, it must be replaced by an authorized retailer.
• In the event a malfunction occurs or adjustment is required, first follow the troubleshooting table in the back of
the operation manual to inspect and adjust the machine yourself. If the problem persists, please consult your
local authorized Baby Lock retailer.
Use this machine only for its intended use as described in the manual.
Use accessories recommended by the manufacturer as contained in this manual.
Use only the interface cable (USB cable) included with this machine.
Use only a mouse designed specifically for this machine.
Use only the sensor pen included with this machine.
The contents of this manual and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
For additional product information and updates, visit our website at www.babylock.com
B-2
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
This machine is intended for household use.
This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced
physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge,
unless they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the
appliance by a person responsible for their safety. Children should be supervised
to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
FOR USERS IN THE UK, EIRE, MALTA
AND CYPRUS ONLY
IMPORTANT
• In the event of replacing the plug fuse, use a fuse approved by ASTA to BS 1362, i.e. carrying the
mark,
rating as marked on plug.
• Always replace the fuse cover. Never use plugs with the fuse cover omitted.
• If the available electrical outlet is not suitable for the plug supplied with this equipment, you should contact your
authorized retailer to obtain the correct lead.
B-3
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Declaration of Conformity (For USA Only)
Responsible Party:
Tacony Corporation
1760 Gilsinn Lane,
Fenton, Missouri 63026 USA
declares that the product
Product Name:
Model Number:
Baby Lock Sewing Machine
BLTY
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the retailer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• The included interface cable should be used in order to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B digital
device.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Tacony Corporation could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
B-4
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Laser Notices (For U.S.A. only)
Laser Safety
This sewing machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS)
Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the
sewing machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
IEC 60825-1 Specification
This sewing machine is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC 60825-1:2007 specifications.
The laser beam emitted by the laser unit installed in this machine is restricted to an output at a safe level. However, the machine
contains 7-milliwat, 650-660nanometer wavelength, 6-12 degree at parallel divergence angle, 24-34 degree at perpendicular
divergence angle, InGaAlP laser diodes. Therefore, eye damage may result from disassembling or altering this machine.
Safety precautions have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
FDA Regulations
U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured on and after August 2,
1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The label shown on the back of the sewing machine
indicates compliance with the FDA regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
Tacony Corporation
1760 Gilsinn Lane Fenton, Missouri 63026, U.S.A.
This product complies with FDA performance standards for laser
products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50,
dated June 24, 2007.
CAUTION
• Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
B-5
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Laser Notices (For countries except U.S.A.)
IEC 60825-1 Specification
This sewing machine is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC 60825-1:2007 specifications.
The laser beam emitted by the laser unit installed in this machine is restricted to an output at a safe level. However, the machine
contains 7-milliwat, 650-660nanometer wavelength, 6-12 degree at parallel divergence angle, 24-34 degree at perpendicular
divergence angle, InGaAlP laser diodes. Therefore, eye damage may result from disassembling or altering this machine.
Safety precautions have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
CAUTION
• This sewing machine has a Class 3B Laser Diode in the Laser Unit. The Laser Unit should not be opened
under any circumstances.
• Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
B-6
OUTSTANDING FEATURES
OUTSTANDING FEATURES
Useful Sensor Function - Variety
of Functions
Sensor Function - Automatic
Pattern Placement
When sewing, you can easily specify the guideline
marker position, the needle drop position, the
width/LR shift of the stitch and sewing end point,
using the sensor pen.
See “USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH
SEWING STITCH” on page B-78.
Setting Laser Guideline Marker
as a Sewing Position Guide
The guideline marker shows the sewing position.
You can adjust the sewing position by moving the
guideline marker while checking the guideline
marker on the fabric. You don’t need to look for
the needle drop point to check the sewing
position.
Other various adjustments are available using the
guideline marker.
When embroidering, you can set the pattern
position quickly with the automatic positioning
function using the sensor pen.
See “USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN
“EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE”
on page B-85.
LED Pointer Shows You the
Needle Drop Position
See “USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH
SEWING STITCH” on page B-78.
Expanding Your Creativity with
Dual Feed Foot
Included Embroidery foot with LED pointer
indicates the needle position with a red LED point.
The LED pointer shows you the location of the
needle penetration so that it is easier to adjust the
embroidery position.
See “Using the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED
Pointer” on page B-62.
Do you feel like trying a new material, like thin
fabric or nylon fabric?
Included dual feed foot works very effectively
when sewing those difficult materials. This foot
also works effectively when you sew different
types of materials together, like thin fabric with
thick fabric. You can adjust the feed length for the
various fabric types.
See “Using the Dual Feed Foot” on page B-68.
B-7
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE
B Basic operations
After purchasing your machine, be sure to read this section first. This section provides details on the
initial setup procedures as well as descriptions of this machine’s more useful functions.
Chapter 1 Getting Ready
Chapter 2 Sensor Functions
To learn the operation of the principal parts and the
screens
Try the new function using the supplied sensor pen
Page B-20
Page B-72
S Sewing
This section describes procedures for using the various utility stitches as well as other functions. It
provides details on basic machine sewing in addition to the more expressive features of the machine,
from sewing tubular pieces and buttonholes to sewing the character and decorative stitch patterns and
decorative bobbin work.
Chapter 1 Sewing Basics
Chapter 2 Utility Stitches
To learn how to prepare for sewing and basic sewing
operations
Pre-programmed with more than 100 frequently used
stitches
Page S-2
Page S-20
Chapter 3 Character/Decorative
Chapter 4 How to Create Bobbin
Stitches
Work (Sewing)
The variety of stitches widen your creativity
Wind medium to heavy weight thread on a bobbin for
three-dimensional appearance.
Page S-76
Page S-104
E Embroidering
This section gives instruction to embroider designs with this machine.
Chapter 1, “Embroidery”, provides details on sewing embroidery patterns stored on the machine as well
as patterns that have been imported. Chapter 2, “Embroidery Edit”, provides details on editing
embroidery patterns to create custom embroidery. Chapter 3, “How to Create Bobbin Work
(Embroidery)” gives instruction on creating dimensional embroidery.
Chapter 1 Embroidery
Chapter 2 Embroidery Edit
Maximum 30 cm × 18 cm (approx. 12 inches × 7 inches)
for large embroidery designs
Designs can be combined, rotated or enlarged
Page E-2
Page E-56
Chapter 3 How to Create Bobbin
Work (Embroidery)
Medium to heavy weight thread wound on a bobbin can
be embroidered into a three-dimensional design.
Page E-86
A Appendix
This section provides important information for operating this machine.
Chapter 1 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Find troubleshooting tips and pointers as well as how to keep your machine in the best working condition.
Page A-2
B-8
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
TRADEMARKS
INTRODUCTION................................................. 1
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................ 1
OUTSTANDING FEATURES ................................. 7
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE ..... 8
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR
FUNCTIONS........................................................ 12
Machine ..............................................................................
Needle and Presser Foot Section ..........................................
Embroidery Unit ..................................................................
Operation Buttons................................................................
Using the Flat Bed Attachment .............................................
Included Accessories ...........................................................
Options................................................................................
12
13
14
14
15
16
18
B Basic operations
Calibrating the Sensor Pen.................................................... 76
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING
STITCH .............................................................. 78
Sensor Function Area ........................................................... 78
Specifying the Guideline Marker Position
With the Sensor Pen ............................................................. 78
Specifying the Needle Drop Position With the Sensor Pen.... 80
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Stitching Width and Stitch
Position ................................................................................ 81
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Sewing End Point.......... 83
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN
“EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE ...... 85
Specifying the Embroidering Position With the Sensor Pen ... 85
S Sewing
Chapter1 Sewing Basics
Chapter1 Getting Ready
20
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF .................. 21
Setting Your Machine for the First Time ............................... 22
LCD SCREEN ...................................................... 24
Using the Machine Setting Mode Key .................................
Using the Sewing Machine Help Key ..................................
Using the Operation Guide Function ...................................
Using the Sewing Guide Function ........................................
Using the Pattern Explanation Function................................
28
36
37
38
39
LOWER THREADING......................................... 40
Winding the Bobbin............................................................. 40
Setting the Bobbin................................................................ 45
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread.............................................. 47
UPPER THREADING .......................................... 48
Upper Threading.................................................................. 48
Using the Twin Needle Mode .............................................. 52
Using Threads that Unwind Quickly .................................... 54
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT ...................... 55
Removing the Presser Foot ................................................... 55
Attaching the Presser Foot .................................................... 55
Attaching the Presser Foot with the Included Adapter .......... 55
CHANGING THE NEEDLE.................................. 57
ABOUT THE NEEDLE AND FABRIC ................... 59
About the Needle................................................................. 59
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations .................................... 60
BEFORE EMBROIDERING .................................. 61
2
SEWING .............................................................. 3
Sewing a Stitch .......................................................................
Sewing Reinforcement Stitches ...............................................
Automatic Reinforcement Stitching ........................................
Sewing Curves........................................................................
Changing Sewing Direction ....................................................
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics ..................................................
Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener ............................................
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics ....................................................
Sewing Stretch Fabrics............................................................
3
5
5
7
7
7
8
9
9
STITCH SETTINGS ............................................. 10
Setting the Stitch Width ........................................................
Setting the Stitch Length .......................................................
Setting the “L/R SHIFT”.........................................................
Setting the Thread Tension ...................................................
10
10
11
12
USEFUL FUNCTIONS ........................................ 13
Automatic Thread Cutting .................................................... 13
Adjusting the Needle Drop Position with the Guideline Marker
(For models equipped with the guideline marker) ................. 14
Using the Knee Lifter ............................................................ 15
Pivoting ................................................................................ 15
Automatic Fabric Sensor System (Automatic Presser Foot
Pressure)............................................................................... 17
Needle Position – Stitch Placement ...................................... 18
Locking the Screen ............................................................... 18
Chapter2 Utility Stitches
20
Embroidery Step by Step ...................................................... 61
Using the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer.............. 62
Attaching the Embroidery Unit ............................................. 65
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES ......................... 21
USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE
ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE ........................ 67
SEWING THE STITCHES .................................... 24
Using USB Media or Embroidery Card Reader/USB Card Writer
Module* .............................................................................. 67
Connecting the Machine to the Computer............................ 67
Using a USB Mouse ............................................................. 68
Using the Dual Feed Foot .................................................... 68
Chapter2 Sensor Functions
72
CONVENIENT SEWING FEATURES BY USING THE
SENSOR PEN ...................................................... 73
CONNECTING THE SENSOR PEN ..................... 73
Using the Sensor Pen Holder ............................................... 74
USING THE SENSOR PEN .................................. 75
Using the Sensor Pen ........................................................... 75
Important Information about Sensor Pen .............................. 75
Selecting a Stitch .................................................................. 21
Saving Your Stitch Settings ................................................... 22
Straight Stitches ....................................................................
Dart Seam ............................................................................
Gathering .............................................................................
Flat Fell Seam .......................................................................
Pintuck .................................................................................
Zigzag Stitches .....................................................................
Elastic Zigzag Stitches ..........................................................
Overcasting ..........................................................................
Quilting................................................................................
Blind Hem Stitches ...............................................................
Appliqué ..............................................................................
Shelltuck Stitches .................................................................
Scallop Stitches ....................................................................
Crazy Quilting......................................................................
Smocking Stitches ................................................................
Fagoting ...............................................................................
Tape or Elastic Attaching ......................................................
24
28
29
29
30
31
33
33
35
45
48
49
50
50
51
52
52
B-9
CONTENTS
Heirloom..............................................................................
One-step Buttonholes...........................................................
Darning ................................................................................
Bar Tacks .............................................................................
Button Sewing ......................................................................
Eyelet ...................................................................................
Multi-directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch) .....
Zipper Insertion....................................................................
53
55
58
59
61
62
63
64
STITCH SETTING CHART................................... 68
Chapter3 Character/Decorative Stitches 76
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS.......................... 77
Selecting Decorative Stitch Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch
Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch
Patterns/Cross Stitch/Utility Decorative Stitch Patterns .......... 78
Characters ............................................................................ 78
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS .............................. 81
Sewing Attractive Finishes .................................................... 81
Basic Sewing ........................................................................ 81
Making Adjustments............................................................. 82
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS ............................. 84
Changing the Size ................................................................
Changing the Length (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ....
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image ..........................................
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ......................................
Sewing a Pattern Continuously .............................................
Changing Thread Density (for Satin Stitch Patterns Only)......
Returning to the Beginning of the Pattern .............................
Checking the Image..............................................................
86
87
87
87
87
88
88
89
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS ...................... 90
Before Combining ................................................................
Combining Various Stitch Patterns........................................
Combining Large and Small Stitch Patterns...........................
Combining Horizontal Mirror Image Stitch Patterns..............
Combining Stitch Patterns of Different Length ......................
Making Step Stitch Patterns
(for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) .....................................
90
90
91
92
92
93
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION.................... 95
Stitch Data Precautions ........................................................ 95
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory................... 96
Saving Stitch Patterns to USB Media ..................................... 97
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Computer ................................. 98
Retrieving Stitch Patterns from the Machine’s Memory ......... 99
Recalling from USB Media ................................................. 100
Recalling from the Computer.............................................. 101
Chapter4 How to Create Bobbin Work
(Sewing)
104
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK .................................. 105
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK ................... 105
Required Materials ............................................................. 105
Upper Threading ................................................................ 106
Preparing the Bobbin Thread .............................................. 107
CREATING BOBBIN WORK ............................. 111
Positioning the Fabric and Sewing ...................................... 111
Bobbin Work Free Motion Sewing...................................... 113
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION .............. 114
TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 115
E Embroidering
Chapter1 Embroidery
B-10
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (Backing) to the Fabric ............ 11
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame....................... 13
Embroidering Small Fabrics or Fabric Edges......................... 16
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME .......... 17
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION ......... 19
Checking the Pattern Position .............................................. 19
Previewing the Completed Pattern ....................................... 20
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN............... 21
Embroidering Attractive Finishes.......................................... 21
Sewing Embroidery Patterns................................................. 22
Sewing Embroidery Patterns Which Use Appliqué ............... 23
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY
PROCESS ............................................................. 26
If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread ........................................
If the Thread Breaks During Sewing .....................................
Restarting from the Beginning ..............................................
Resuming Embroidery After Turning Off the Power ..............
26
27
28
28
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS........... 30
Adjusting Thread Tension ....................................................
Adjusting the Bobbin Case (with No Color on the Screw) ....
Using the Automatic Thread Cutting Function
(END COLOR TRIM)............................................................
Using the Thread Trimming Function (JUMP STITCH TRIM).......
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed ..........................................
Changing the Thread Color Display .....................................
Changing the “Embroidery Frame Display” ..........................
30
31
32
32
33
34
35
REVISING THE PATTERN................................... 36
Moving the Pattern ..............................................................
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle ....................................
Changing the Size of the Pattern ..........................................
Rotating the Pattern .............................................................
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image .....................................
Enlarging the Editing Screen.................................................
Changing the Density (Alphabet Character and Frame
Patterns Only) ......................................................................
Changing the Colors of Alphabet Character Patterns ............
Embroidering Linked Characters ..........................................
Uninterrupted Embroidering (Monochrome - Using a Single
Color) ..................................................................................
36
36
37
38
39
39
40
40
41
43
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ................... 44
Embroidery Data Precautions...............................................
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Machine’s Memory .........
Saving Embroidery Patterns to USB Media ...........................
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Computer .......................
Retrieving Patterns from the Machine’s Memory ..................
Recalling from USB Media...................................................
Recalling from the Computer ...............................................
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS .......................... 52
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (1) ................... 52
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (2) ................... 53
Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns......................................... 54
Chapter2 Embroidery Edit
56
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS....................... 57
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT ....................... 58
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Baby Lock “Exclusives”/Floral
Alphabet Patterns/Frame/Bobbin Work Patterns ................... 59
Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns.................................. 59
EDITING PATTERNS .......................................... 61
2
SELECTING PATTERNS......................................... 3
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Baby Lock “Exclusives”/Floral
Alphabet/Bobbin Work Patterns .............................................
Selecting Character Patterns ...................................................
Selecting Frame Patterns.........................................................
Selecting Patterns from Embroidery Cards ..............................
Selecting Patterns from USB Media/Computer ....................... 8
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERING SCREEN ........... 9
PREPARING THE FABRIC .................................. 11
4
5
7
7
Moving the Pattern ..............................................................
Rotating the Pattern .............................................................
Changing the Size of the Pattern ..........................................
Deleting the Pattern .............................................................
Displaying Patterns in the Screen Magnified by 200% .........
Changing the Configuration of Character Patterns................
Changing Character Spacing................................................
Reducing Character Spacing ................................................
Separating Combined Character Patterns .............................
63
63
63
63
63
64
64
65
65
CONTENTS
Changing the Color of Each Alphabet Character in a Pattern .......
Embroidering Linked Characters ..........................................
Changing the Thread Color ..................................................
Creating a Custom Thread Table ..........................................
Choosing a Color from the Custom Thread Table .................
Designing Repeated Patterns ................................................
Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly ...................................
Duplicating a Pattern ...........................................................
After Editing .........................................................................
66
67
67
68
72
73
77
79
79
COMBINING PATTERNS ................................... 80
Editing Combined Patterns ................................................... 80
Sewing Combined Patterns .................................................. 83
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS ......... 84
Uninterrupted Embroidering (Monochrome - Using a Single
Color) .................................................................................. 84
Basting Embroidery .............................................................. 84
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION.................... 85
Chapter3 How to Create Bobbin Work
(Embroidery)
86
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK .................................... 87
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK ..................... 87
Required Materials ............................................................... 87
Upper Threading.................................................................. 88
Preparing the Bobbin Thread ............................................... 88
CREATING BOBBIN WORK............................... 92
Selecting the Pattern ............................................................ 92
Start Embroidering ............................................................... 93
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION ................ 96
TROUBLESHOOTING........................................ 97
A Appendix
Chapter1 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 2
CARE AND MAINTENANCE................................. 3
Restrictions on oiling .............................................................
Precautions on storing the machine .......................................
Cleaning the LCD Screen .......................................................
Cleaning the Machine Casing ................................................
Cleaning the Race ..................................................................
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin Case Area .........................
About the Maintenance Message ...........................................
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN.................................... 6
Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen Display ....................... 6
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning............................................... 6
TROUBLESHOOTING.......................................... 7
Frequent troubleshooting topics ............................................. 7
Upper thread is too tight ........................................................ 7
Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric .................................. 8
Incorrect thread tension ....................................................... 10
Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be removed...... 11
List of Symptoms .................................................................. 14
ERROR MESSAGES ............................................. 18
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................... 21
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE ..... 22
Upgrade Procedure Using USB Media ................................. 22
Upgrade Procedure Using Computer ................................... 23
INDEX ................................................................ 24
B-11
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
The names of the various parts of the sewing machine and their functions are described below. Before
using the sewing machine, carefully read these descriptions to learn the names of the machine parts.
Machine
■ Front View
■ Right-side/Rear View
a Connector for the presser foot
Connect the dual feed foot or embroidery foot with LED
pointer. (page B-62, B-68)
a Top cover
Open the top cover to thread the machine and wind the
bobbin.
b Pre-tension disk
Pass the thread around the pre-tension disk when winding the
bobbin thread. (page B-40)
c Thread guide for bobbin winding
Pass the thread through this thread guide when winding the
bobbin thread. (page B-40)
d Spool pin
Place a spool of thread on the spool pin. (page B-48)
e Spool cap
Use the spool cap to hold the spool of thread in place.
(page B-48)
f Supplemental spool pin
Use this spool pin to wind the bobbin thread, or to sew with the
twin needle. (page B-40, B-52)
g Bobbin winder
Use the bobbin winder when winding the bobbin. (page B-40)
h LCD (liquid crystal display)
Settings for the selected stitch and error messages appear in
the LCD. (page B-24)
i Speaker
j Knee lifter
Use the knee lifter to raise and lower the presser foot.
(page S-15)
k Knee lifter slot
Insert the knee lifter into the slot. (page S-15)
l Operation buttons (7 buttons) and sewing speed
controller
Use these buttons and the slide to operate the sewing
machine. (page B-14)
m Flat bed attachment with accessory compartment
Store presser feet and bobbins in the accessory compartment
of the flat bed attachment. When sewing cylindrical pieces,
remove the flat bed attachment. (page B-15)
n Thread cutter
Pass the threads through the thread cutter to cut them.
(page B-50)
o Thread guide plate
Pass the thread around the thread guide plate when threading
upper thread. (page B-48)
B-12
b Handle
Carry the sewing machine by its handle when transporting the
machine.
c Presser foot lever
Raise and lower the presser foot lever to raise and lower the
presser foot. (page B-55)
d Air vent
The air vent allows the air surrounding the motor to circulate.
Do not cover the air vent while the sewing machine is being
used.
e Main power switch
Use the main power switch to turn the sewing machine ON and
OFF. (page B-21)
f Foot controller
Depress the foot controller to control the speed of the machine.
(page S-4)
g Power cord receptacle
Insert the power cord into the machine receptacle. (page B-21)
h Sensor pen holder connector
Connect the included sensor pen holder. (page B-74)
i Sensor pen jack
Connect the sensor pen. (page B-73)
j Foot controller jack
Insert the foot controller plug into its jack on the machine.
(page S-4)
k USB port for computer
In order to import/export patterns between a computer and the
machine, plug the USB cable into the USB port. (page B-67,
S-98, E-48)
l USB port for mouse / media
In order to send patterns from/to USB media, plug the USB
media directly into the USB port. (page B-67, S-97, E-47)
Connect the USB mouse to operate with mouse. (page B-68)
m Handwheel
Rotate the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to raise
and lower the needle. The wheel should be turned toward the
front of the machine.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
Needle and Presser Foot Section
Measurements on the needle plate, bobbin cover
(with mark) and needle plate cover
The measurements on the needle plate and bobbin
cover are references for patterns with a middle
(center) needle position. The measurements on the
needle plate cover are references for stitches with
a left needle position.
a
c
d
a Buttonhole lever
The buttonhole lever is used with the one-step buttonhole foot
to create buttonholes. (page S-55)
e
b Presser foot holder screw
Use the presser foot holder screw to hold the presser foot in
place. (page B-55, B-62)
f
c Presser foot holder
The presser foot is attached to the presser foot holder.
(page B-55)
d Presser foot
The presser foot consistently applies pressure to the fabric as
sewing takes place. Attach the appropriate presser foot for the
selected stitch. (page B-55)
e Feed dogs
The feed dogs feed the fabric in the sewing direction.
f Bobbin cover
Open the bobbin cover to set the bobbin. (page B-45, S-32)
g Needle plate cover
Remove the needle plate cover to clean the race. (page S-26,
E-22)
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
For stitches with a middle (center) needle position
For stitches with a left needle position
Middle (center) needle position <inch>
Middle (center) needle position <cm>
Middle (center) needle position <inch>
Left needle position <inch>
h Needle plate
The needle plate is marked with guides to help sew straight
seams. (page S-26)
i Needle bar thread guide
Pass the upper thread through the needle bar thread guide.
(page B-48)
j Needle clamp screw
Use the needle clamp screw to hold the needle in place.
(page B-57)
B-13
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
Embroidery Unit
Operation Buttons
a Carriage
The carriage moves the embroidery frame automatically when
embroidering. (page B-65)
b Release button (located under the embroidery unit)
Press the release button to remove the embroidery unit.
(page B-65)
c Embroidery frame holder
Insert the embroidery frame into the embroidery frame holder
to hold the frame in place. (page E-17)
d Frame-securing lever
Press the frame-securing lever down to secure the embroidery
frame. (page E-17)
e Embroidery unit connection
Insert the embroidery unit connection into the connection port
when attaching the embroidery unit. (page B-65)
a “Start/Stop” button
Press this button and the machine will sew a few stitches at a
slow speed and then begin sewing at the speed set by the
sewing speed controller. Press the button again to stop the
machine. Hold the button in to sew at the machine’s slowest
speed. The button changes color according to the machine’s
operation mode.
Green:
The machine is ready to sew or is sewing.
Red:
The machine cannot sew.
b “Reverse Stitch” button
CAUTION
• Before inserting or removing the embroidery
unit, turn the main power to OFF.
• After the embroidery frame is set in the frame
holder, be sure the frame-securing lever is
correctly lowered.
For straight, zigzag, and elastic zigzag stitch patterns that take
reverse stitches, the machine will sew reverse stitches at low
speed only while holding down the “Reverse Stitch” button.
The stitches are sewn in the opposite direction. For other
stitches, use this button to sew reinforcement stitches at the
beginning and end of sewing. Press and hold this button, and
the machine sews 3 stitches in the same spot and stops
automatically. (see page S-5)
c “Reinforcement Stitch” button
Use this button to sew a single stitch repeatedly and tie-off. For
character/decorative stitches, press this button to end with a
full pattern instead of mid-point. The LED light beside this
button lights up while the machine is stitching the last full motif,
and automatically turns off when the sewing is stopped. (see
page S-5)
d “Needle Position” button
Use this button when changing sewing direction or for detailed
sewing in small areas. Press this button to raise or lower the
needle position. With this button, you can lower and raise the
needle to sew a single stitch.
e “Thread Cutter” button
Press this button after sewing to automatically trim the excess
thread.
f “Presser Foot Lifter” button
Press this button to lower the presser foot and apply pressure
to the fabric. Press this button again to raise the presser foot.
g Sewing Speed controller
Use this controller to adjust the sewing speed. Move the slide
to the left to sew at slower speeds. Move the slide to the right
to sew at higher speeds. Beginners should sew at a slow
speed.
h “Automatic Threading” button
Use this button to automatically thread the needle.
B-14
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
CAUTION
• Do not press the thread cutter button after the
threads have been cut. The needle may break
and threads may become tangled, or damage
to the machine may occur.
Using the Flat Bed Attachment
Pull the top of the flat bed attachment to open the
accessory compartment.
A presser foot storage tray is stored in the accessory
compartment of the flat bed attachment.
a Storage space of the flat bed attachment
b Presser foot storage space of the flat bed
attachment
c Presser foot storage tray
There are also storage spaces for optional presser
feet.
B-15
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
Included Accessories
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
15
75/11 2 needles
90/14 2 needles
90/14 2 needles:
Ball point needle (gold colored)
2.0/11 needle
6
7
75/11
2 needles
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
B-16
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
No.
Part Name
Part Code
No.
Part Name
Part Code
1
Zigzag foot “J” (on machine)
XF3022-001
51 Sensor pen holder
XF4702-001
2
Monogramming foot “N”
X53840-351
52 Pen holder
XF2973-001
XF4694-001
3
Overcasting foot “G”
XC3098-051
53 Dust cover
4
Zipper foot “I”
X59370-051
54 Accessory bag
XC4487-021
55 Instruction and Reference
Guide
XF3648-001
56 Quick Reference Guide
XF3649-001
5
Buttonhole foot “A”
X57789-251
6
Blind stitch foot “R”
X56409-051
7
Button fitting foot “M”
130489-001
8
Straight stitch foot
XD0826-051
9
Embroidery foot “W+” with
LED pointer
XF3124-001
10 1/4” quilting foot with guide
XC6800-251
11 Free motion open toe quilting
foot “O”
XF4873-001
12 Dual feed foot
XF4068-001
13 Adapter
XF3613-001
14 Screw (small)
XA4813-051
15 Needle set
X58358-051
16 Twin needle
X59296-151
17 Ball point needle set
XD0705-051
18 Bobbin × 10
(One is on machine.)
X52800-150
19 Seam ripper
XF4967-001
20 Scissors
XC1807-121
21 Cleaning brush
X59476-051
22 Eyelet punch
XZ5051-001
23 Screwdriver (small)
X55468-051
24 Screwdriver (large)
XC4237-021
25 Disc-shaped screwdriver
XC1074-051
26 Vertical spool pin
XC8619-052
27 Spool cap (small)
130013-154
28 Spool cap (medium) × 2
(One is on machine.)
X55260-153
29 Spool cap (large)
130012-054
30 Spool cap (mini insert)
XA5752-121
31 Spool felt (on machine)
X57045-051
32 Spool net × 2
XA5523-050
33 Embroidery needle plate
cover
XE5131-001
34 Touch pen (stylus)
XA9940-051
35 Knee lifter
XA6941-052
36 USB cable
XD0745-051
37 Alternate bobbin case
(no color on the screw)
XC8167-551
38 Bobbin center pin and
instruction sheet
XC8661-251
39 Bobbin case (gray, for bobbin
work)
XE8298-001
40 Straight stitch needle plate
XF3076-001
41 Cord guide bobbin cover
(with single hole)
XE8991-101
42 Bobbin cover (with mark) (on
machine)
XF0750-101
43 Bobbin cover
XE8992-101
44 Foot controller
XC8816-051
45 Embroidery frame set (large)
H 180 mm × W 130 mm
(H 7 inches × W 5 inches)
EF75: Frame
EF79: Embroidery sheet
46 Embroidery frame set
(extra large)
H 300 mm × W 180 mm
(H 12 inches × W 7 inches)
EF76: Frame
EF80: Embroidery sheet
47 Embroidery bobbin thread
Memo
• Foot controller: Model T
This foot controller can be used on the
machine model: BLTY.
• Always use accessories recommended for
this machine.
BBT-W
48 Stabilizer material
X81176-001
49 Power cord
XC6052-051
50 Chalk pencil
XE8568-001
B-17
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
Options
The following are available as optional accessories to be purchased separately from your authorized Baby
Lock retailer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
16
17
18
19
20
7
14
15
No.
Part Name
Part Code
1
Multi function foot controller
BLMA-MFC
Memo
2
Square embroidery frame
H 150 mm × W 150 mm (H 6
inches × W 6 inches)
BLMA-150
• All specifications are correct at the time of
printing. Please be aware that some
specifications may change without notice.
3
Embroidery foot “W”
XF4012-001
4
Border embroidery frame
H 300 mm × W 100 mm (H
12 inches × W 4 inches)
BLMA-CBH
5
10 spool stand
Note
BLMA-TS
6
2-spool thread stand
7
Extension table
8
Embroidery frame set (small)
H 20 mm × W 60 mm (H 1
inch × W 2-1/2 inches)
EF73: Frame
EF77: Embroidery sheet
9
Embroidery frame set
(medium)
H 100 mm × W 100 mm (H 4
inches × W 4 inches)
EF74: Frame
EF78: Embroidery sheet
10 Border embroidery frame set
H 180 mm × W 100 mm (H 7
inches × W 4 inches)
BLMA-STS
BLMA-ET
BLSO-BF
11 Embroidery card Reader
BLECR
12 Seam guide
BLG-SG
13 Walking foot
XA8320-103
14 Side cutter foot
BLG-SCF
15 Free motion quilting foot “C”
XF4737-001
16 Free motion echo quilting
foot “E”
XE0766-001
17 Free-motion quilting foot
18 Circular attachment
19 Edge joining foot
20 USB mouse
B-18
FA2
BL-CSA
ESG-EJF
XE4904-101
• Embroidery cards purchased in foreign
countries may not work with your machine.
• Visit your nearest authorized Baby Lock
retailer for a complete listing of optional
accessories and embroidery cards available
for your machine.
Basic
operations
This section provides details on the initial setup procedures as well as descriptions of this machine’s more
useful functions.
Page number starts with “B” in this section.
Chapter1 Getting Ready .......................................................B-20
Chapter2 Sensor Functions ...................................................B-72
BBasic operations
Chapter
1
Getting Ready
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF ........................ 21
Setting Your Machine for the First Time ...................................22
LCD SCREEN............................................................ 24
■ Home Page Screen ................................................................... 24
■ Utility Stitch Screen ................................................................. 25
■ Key Functions........................................................................... 26
Using the Machine Setting Mode Key ......................................28
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Selecting the “Eco Mode” or “Shutoff Support Mode”............. 32
Changing the Pointer Shape When a USB Mouse Is Used ........ 32
Selecting the Initial Screen Display .......................................... 32
Choosing the Display Language................................................ 33
Changing the Background Colors of the Embroidery Patterns....... 33
Specifying the Size of Pattern Thumbnails ............................... 34
Saving a Settings Screen Image to USB Media.......................... 35
Using the Sewing Machine Help Key .......................................36
Using the Operation Guide Function ........................................37
Using the Sewing Guide Function .............................................38
Using the Pattern Explanation Function ....................................39
LOWER THREADING .............................................. 40
Winding the Bobbin..................................................................40
■ Using the Supplemental Spool Pin............................................ 40
■ Using the Spool Pin .................................................................. 43
■ Untangling Thread from Beneath the Bobbin Winder Seat ...... 44
Setting the Bobbin ....................................................................45
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread...................................................47
UPPER THREADING ................................................ 48
Upper Threading.......................................................................48
Using the Twin Needle Mode ..................................................52
Using Threads that Unwind Quickly .........................................54
■ Using the Spool Net ................................................................. 54
■ Using the Vertical Spool Pin .................................................... 54
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT............................ 55
Removing the Presser Foot........................................................55
Attaching the Presser Foot ........................................................55
Attaching the Presser Foot with the Included Adapter..............55
■ Attaching the Walking foot ...................................................... 56
CHANGING THE NEEDLE ....................................... 57
ABOUT THE NEEDLE AND FABRIC......................... 59
About the Needle......................................................................59
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations ........................................60
BEFORE EMBROIDERING........................................ 61
Embroidery Step by Step ..........................................................61
Using the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer .................62
■ Attaching the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer .......... 62
■ Checking the Needle Drop Point With the
Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer ................................ 63
■ Adjusting the LED Pointer ........................................................ 64
■ Adjusting the Brightness of the LED Pointer............................. 64
Attaching the Embroidery Unit .................................................65
■ About the Embroidery Unit ...................................................... 65
■ Removing the Embroidery Unit ............................................... 66
USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE
ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE ............................. 67
Using USB Media or Embroidery Card Reader/USB Card Writer
Module* ................................................................................... 67
Connecting the Machine to the Computer ............................... 67
Using a USB Mouse.................................................................. 68
■ Clicking a Key ...........................................................................68
■ Changing Pages.........................................................................68
Using the Dual Feed Foot......................................................... 68
■
■
■
■
Attaching the Dual Feed Foot ...................................................69
Replacing the Sole Part of the Dual Feed Foot..........................69
Using the Dual Feed Position Lever ..........................................69
Adjusting the Amount of Fabric Feeding of the Dual Feed Foot.......70
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
B
WARNING
CAUTION
• Use only the power cord included with this machine.
• Do not use extension cords or multi-plug adapters with many other appliances plugged in to them. Fire or
electric shock may result.
• Do not touch the plug with wet hands. Electric shock may result.
• When unplugging the machine, always turn the main power to OFF first. Always grasp the plug to remove
it from the outlet. Pulling on the cord may damage the cord, or lead to fire or electric shock.
• Do not allow the power cord to be cut, damaged, modified, forcefully bent, pulled, twisted, or bundled.
Do not place heavy objects on the cord. Do not subject the cord to heat. These things may damage the
cord, or cause fire or electric shock. If the cord or plug is damaged, take the machine to your authorized
retailer for repairs before continuing use.
• Unplug the power cord if the machine is not to be used for a long period of time. Otherwise, a fire may
result.
• When leaving the machine unattended, either the main switch of the machine should be turned to OFF or
the plug must be removed from the socket-outlet.
• When servicing the machine or when removing covers, the machine must be unplugged.
• For U.S.A. only
This appliance has a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). To reduce the risk of electrical
shock, this plug is intended to fit in a polarized outlet only one way.
If the plug does not fit fully in the outlet, reverse the plug. If it still does not fit, contact a qualified
electrician to install the proper outlet. Do not modify the plug in any way.
Basic operations B-21
1
Getting Ready
• Use only regular household electricity for the power source. Using other power sources may result in fire,
electric shock, or damage to the machine.
• Make sure that the plugs on the power cord are firmly inserted into the electrical outlet and the power
cord receptacle on the machine.
• Do not insert the plug on the power cord into an electrical outlet that is in poor condition.
• Turn the main power to OFF and remove the plug in the following circumstances:
When you are away from the machine
After using the machine
When the power fails during use
When the machine does not operate correctly due to a bad connection or a disconnection
During electrical storms
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
a
Insert the power supply cord into the power
cord receptacle, then insert the plug into a
wall outlet.
d
Turn the main power switch to “O” to turn
off the machine.
Memo
• If the machine is turned off in the middle of
sewing in the “Sewing” function, the
operation will not continued after turning the
power on again.
Setting Your Machine for the First
Time
a Main power switch
b Power supply cord
b
Turn the main power switch to “I” to turn
on the machine.
When you first turn on the machine, set the
language and time/date to your language and local
time/date. Follow the procedure below when the
settings screen appears automatically.
a
Press
and
b
Press
.
c
The message screen, confirming if you want
to set your local language.
a OFF
b ON
Note
• When the straight stitch needle plate is on
the machine, the needle will automatically
move to the middle position.
to set time/date, appears. To set the
c
Memo
time/date, press
• When the machine is turned on, the needle
and the feed dogs will make sound when
they move; this is not a malfunction.
setting, press
When the machine is turned on, the
opening movie is played. Touch anywhere
on the screen to display the Home page
screen.
CAUTION
• Only touch the screen with your finger or the
included touch pen. Do not use a sharp pencil,
screwdriver, or other hard or sharp object. It is
not necessary to press hard on the screen.
Pressing too hard or using a sharp object may
damage the screen.
B-22
; to cancel the
.
→ The screen to set time/date appears.
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
d
Press
or
to set time/date.
B
1
a
b
a
b
c
d
e
Getting Ready
c
d
Press to display the time on the screen.
Set the year (YYYY), month (MM) and date (DD).
Select whether 24h or 12h setting to display.
Set the current time.
Press
to start using your machine.
→ The clock starts from 0 second of the time you set.
Note
• The time/date you set may be cleared, if
you don’t turn on the machine for a certain
period.
Basic operations B-23
LCD SCREEN
LCD SCREEN
CAUTION
• Only touch the screen with your finger or the included touch pen. Do not use a sharp pencil, screwdriver,
or other hard or sharp object. It is not necessary to press hard on the screen. Pressing too hard or using a
sharp object may damage the screen.
■ Home Page Screen
a
b
c
No.
Display
Key Name
Explanation
Page
a
“Utility and Decorative
Stitches” key
Press this key to sew utility stitches or character or decorative stitch
patterns.
See the “Key
Functions” table.
B-26
b
“Embroidery” key
Attach the embroidery unit and press this key to embroider patterns.
E-3
c
“Embroidery Edit” key
Press this key to combine embroidery patterns. With the “Embroidery
Edit” functions, you can also create original embroidery patterns or
frame patterns.
E-58
B-24
LCD SCREEN
■ Utility Stitch Screen
Press a key with your finger to select the stitch pattern, to select a machine function, or to select an
operation indicated on the key. When the key display is light gray, the function is not currently available.
1
a
b
g
c
Display
a
h
e
f
Key Name
Needle position
setting display
Getting Ready
No.
d
Explanation
Page
Shows single or twin needle mode setting, and the needle stop
position.
Single needle/down
–
Single needle/up position
position
Twin needle/down
Twin needle/up position
position
b
Selected stitch
display
Shows the name and code number of the selected stitch.
c
Presser foot display
Shows the presser foot code. Attach the presser foot indicated in this
display before sewing.
B-55
d
Stitch preview
Shows a preview of the selected stitch. When shown at 100%, the
stitch appears in the screen at nearly its actual size.
S-21
e
Pattern display size
Shows the approximate size of the pattern selected.
S-21
S-3
: Nearly the same size as the sewn pattern
: 1/2 the size of the sewn pattern
: 1/4 the size of the sewn pattern
* The actual size of the sewn pattern may differ depending on the type
of fabric and thread that is used.
f
Stitch selection
screen
S-21
Press the key for the pattern you want to sew. Use
to change to different stitch groups.
g
Page display
h
Scroll key
*
B
Shows additional pages that can be displayed. (Illustration shows page
1 of 3.)
Press
or
, to move one page at a time, or touch anywhere on
the bar to jump ahead for additional pages of stitches.
–
–
All key functions of the LCD are explained in the “Key Functions” table on the following page.
Basic operations B-25
LCD SCREEN
■ Key Functions
a
b
c
d
u
t
s
r
q
p
e
f
g
h
i
o
j
k
n
No.
Display
Key Name
m
l
Explanation
Page
a
“Utility Stitch” key
b
“Character/
Press this key to select character or decorative stitch patterns.
Decorative Stitch” key
S-77
c
Screen lock key
Press this key to lock the screen. When the screen is locked, the various
settings, such as the stitch width and stitch length, are locked and cannot be
changed. Press this key again to unlock the settings.
S-18
d
Home page screen
key
Press this key anytime it is displayed to return to the home page screen and
select a different category - “Utility and Decorative Stitches”, “Embroidery” or
“Embroidery Edit”.
B-24
e
Needle mode
selection key
(Single/Double)
Press this key to select twin needle sewing mode. The sewing mode changes
between single needle mode and twin needle mode each time you press the
key. If the key display is light gray, the selected stitch pattern cannot be sewn
in the twin needle mode.
B-52
f
Sensor function key
Press this key to use the sensor function.
B-78
g
Image key
Press this key to display an enlarged image of the selected stitch pattern.
S-22
h
Machine’s memory
key
Press this key to select from 3 memory functions; retrieving, storing or reset.
S-22,
S-96,
S-98
i
“L/R SHIFT” key
Shows the tendency of Left/Right of the center line of the original zigzag stitch
currently selected stitch pattern.
S-11
j
Thread tension key
Shows the automatic thread tension setting of the currently selected stitch
pattern. You can use the plus and minus keys to change the thread tension
settings.
S-12
k
Clock key
Press this key to set the clock to your local time.
B-22
l
Presser foot/Needle
exchange key
Press this key before changing the needle, the presser foot, etc. This key locks
all key and button functions to prevent operation of the machine.
m
Sewing machine help Press this key to see explanations on how to use the machine.
key
B-36
n
Machine setting
mode key
B-28
B-26
Press this key to select a straight stitch, zigzag stitch, buttonhole, blind hem
stitch, or other stitches commonly used in garment construction.
Press this key to change the needle stop position, change the volume of
operation sound, adjust the pattern or screen, and change other machine
settings.
S-21
B-55 to
B-58
LCD SCREEN
No.
Explanation
Page
Shows the zigzag width and stitch length settings of the currently selected
stitch pattern. You can use the plus and minus keys to adjust the zigzag width
and stitch length settings.
S-10
p
Guideline marker key Press this key to display the guideline marker along the sewing line. The
guideline marker makes it easier to sew stitches that align with the fabric edge
or other marker on the fabric.
S-14
q
Mirror image key
Press this key to create a mirror image of the selected stitch pattern. If the key
display is light gray, a mirror image of the selected stitch pattern cannot be
sewn.
S-21
r
Automatic thread
cutting key
Press this key to set the automatic thread cutting function. Set the automatic
thread cutting function before sewing to have the machine automatically sew
reinforcement stitches at the beginning and end of sewing (depending on the
pattern, the machine may sew reverse stitches) and trim the threads after
sewing.
S-13
s
Automatic
Press this key to use the automatic reverse/reinforcement stitching setting.
reverse/reinforcement If you select this setting before sewing, the machine will automatically sew
stitch key
reverse stitches or reinforcement stitches depending on the pattern, at the
beginning and end of sewing.
S-5
t
Free motion mode
key
Press this key to enter free motion sewing mode.
The presser foot is raised to an appropriate height and the feed dog is lowered
for free motion quilting.
S-40
u
Pivot key
Press this key to select the pivot setting. When the pivot setting is selected,
stopping the machine lowers the needle and slightly raises the presser foot
automatically. In addition, when sewing is restarted, the presser foot is
automatically lowered.
S-15
o
Display
Key Name
Stitch width and
stitch length key
, the pivot function cannot be used.
• Be sure the needle position on page B-29 of Machine Settings is set to the
down position.
For additional operational information, refer to page reference number listed above.
Basic operations B-27
1
Getting Ready
• If this key appears as
B
LCD SCREEN
Using the Machine Setting Mode Key
Press
to change the default machine settings (needle stop position, embroidery speed, opening
display, etc.). To display the different settings screens, press
“General settings” or
for “Sewing settings”,
for
for “Embroidery settings”.
Memo
• Press
or
next to the page numbers, to display a different settings screen.
Sewing settings
a
f
g
b
i
j
k
l
c
d
h
e
m
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
B-28
m
m
Select whether to use the sewing speed controller to determine the zigzag width (see page S-39).
Make adjustments to character or decorative stitch patterns (see page S-82).
Adjust the presser foot height. (Select the height of the presser foot when the presser foot is raised.)
Adjust the presser foot pressure. (The higher the number, the greater the pressure will be. Set the pressure at “3”
for normal sewing.) (see page S-17)
If the dual feed foot is installed and its roller is lowered, the pressure setting is fixed at “2” and cannot be changed.
Fine tune the feed of the dual feed foot (see page B-68).
Select whether “1-01 Straight stitch (Left)” or “1-03 Straight stitch (Middle)” is the utility stitch that is automatically
selected when the machine is turned on. (see page S-21)
Select whether “Utility Stitch” or “Quilt Stitch” displayed first on the stitch selection screen when the “Utility and
Decorative Stitches” is selected.
You can activate this setting after connecting the optional multi-function foot controller. (These settings are not
operable unless the optional multi-function foot controller is attached to the machine.)
Change the height of the presser foot when sewing is stopped when the pivot setting is selected (see page S-15).
Adjust the presser foot to one of the three heights (3.2 mm, 5.0 mm and 7.5 mm). (see page S-15)
Change the height of the presser foot when the machine is set to free motion sewing mode (see page S-40).
When set to “ON”, the thickness of the fabric is automatically detected by an internal sensor while sewing. This
enables the fabric to be fed smoothly (see pages S-8 and S-17).
Adjust the guideline marker position and brightness (see page S-14).
Press to save the current settings screen image to USB media (see page B-35)
LCD SCREEN
General settings
B
a
f
b
g
d
e
h
a Select the needle stop position (the needle position when the machine is not operating) to be up or down. Select
the down position when using the pivot key. (see page S-15)
b Select the operation of the “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” button from the following two sequences (see
page S-18).
Each press of the “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” button:
“ON” – raises the needle, stops it at a nearly lowered position, then lowers it
“OFF” – raises the needle, then lowers it
c Change the shape of the pointer when a USB mouse is used (see page B-32).
d Turn the “Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor” “ON” or “OFF”. If it is turned “OFF”, the machine can be used without
thread. (see page S-4, E-26)
CAUTION
• If “Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor” is set to “OFF”, remove the upper thread. If the machine is used
with the upper thread threaded, the machine will not be able to detect if the thread has become tangled.
Continuing to use the machine with tangled thread may cause damage.
e
f
g
h
Change the speaker volume. Increase the number for louder volume, decrease for softer volume.
Select to save the machine power by setting the “Eco Mode” or the “Shutoff Support Mode” (see page B-32).
Select the initial screen that is displayed when the machine is turned on (see page B-32).
Change the display language (see page B-33).
Basic operations B-29
Getting Ready
c
1
LCD SCREEN
a
b
c
d
e
f
a
b
c
d
Change the brightness of the needle area and work area lights.
Change the screen display brightness (see page A-6).
Calibrate the sensor function (see page B-76).
Display the total number of stitches sewn on this machine, which is a reminder to take your machine in for regular
servicing. (Contact your authorized retailer for details.)
e The “No.” is the internal machine number for the embroidery and sewing machine.
f Display the program version. “Version 1” shows the program version of the LCD panel, “Version 2” shows the
program version of the machine.
Memo
• The latest version of software is installed in your machine. Check with your local authorized Baby Lock
retailer or at “ www.babylock.com ” for available updates (see page A-22).
B-30
LCD SCREEN
Embroidery settings
B
k
g
l
h
b
i
c
d
e
j
f
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
Select from among 16 embroidery frame displays (see page E-35).
Change the thread color display on the “Embroidery” screen; thread number, color name (see page E-34).
When the thread number “#123” is selected, select from six thread brands (see page E-34).
Adjust the maximum embroidery speed setting (see page E-33).
Adjust the upper thread tension for embroidering (see page E-30).
Select the height of the embroidery foot “W+” during embroidering (see page E-11).
Change the initial mode of the display (Embroidery/Embroidery Edit) (see page E-3).
Change the color of the background for the embroidery display area (see page B-33).
Change the color of the background for the thumbnail area (see page B-33).
Press to specify the size of pattern thumbnails (see page B-34).
Change the display units from metric to standard measurements (mm/inch).
Adjust the distance between the pattern and the basting stitching (see page E-84).
Adjusting the position and brightness of the embroidery foot with LED pointer (see page B-64).
Basic operations B-31
Getting Ready
m
a
1
LCD SCREEN
■ Selecting the “Eco Mode” or
“Shutoff Support Mode”
You can save the machine power by setting the eco
mode or the shutoff support mode.
If you leave the machine without using for a
specified period of time, the machine enters in one
of these modes.
■ Changing the Pointer Shape When a
USB Mouse Is Used
In the settings screen, the shape can be selected for
the pointer that appears when a USB mouse is
connected. Depending upon the background color,
select the desired shape from the three that are
available.
“Eco Mode”;
Machine will enter a sleep mode. Touch the screen
or any operational button to continue sewing.
“Shutoff Support Mode”;
Machine will turn off after set period of time. Turn
machine off and then back on to restart sewing.
Condition
Eco Mode
Shutoff Support
Mode
Available time
0 - 120 (minute)
1 - 12 (hour)
“Start/Stop” button
Green flashing
Green slow flashing
Suspended function Machine light,
All functions
Screen display, LED
pointer, Guideline
marker
After recovering
The machine starts
from the previous
operation.
You need to turn off
the machine.
Memo
• For details on changing the background
color, refer to “Changing the Background
Colors of the Embroidery Patterns” on
page B-33.
a
Press
b
Press
c
Display page 4 of the General settings
screen.
d
Use
or
to choose the pointer shape
from the three settings available (
,
and
).
e
Press
→ The settings screen appears.
Press
b
Press
c
Display page 5 of the General settings
screen.
d
Use
or
to select the time until
entering the mode.
.
→ The General settings screen appears.
Press the “Start/Stop” button or touch the screen
display to recover from these modes.
a
.
.
→ The settings screen appears.
.
→ The General settings screen appears.
to return to the original screen.
Memo
• The setting remains selected even if the
machine is turned off.
■ Selecting the Initial Screen Display
The Initial screen that appears on the machine can
be changed.
a
Press
b
Press
c
Display page 5 of the General settings
screen.
.
→ The settings screen appears.
Note
• If you turn off the machine while the
machine is in the “Eco Mode” or the
“Shutoff Support Mode”, wait for about 5
seconds before turning on the machine
again.
B-32
.
→ The General settings screen appears.
LCD SCREEN
d
Use
or
to select the setting for the
initial screen display.
■ Changing the Background Colors of
the Embroidery Patterns
*
*
*
e
Opening Screen: When the machine is turned on,
the home page screen appears after the opening
movie screen is touched.
Home Page: When the machine is turned on, the
home page screen appears.
Sewing/Embroidery Screen: When the machine is
turned on, the “Embroidery” screen appears if the
embroidery unit is attached to the machine, or the
sewing screen appears if the embroidery unit is not
attached to the machine.
Press
a
Press
b
Press
→ The settings screen appears.
.
→ The Embroidery settings screen appears.
Memo
• When using the “Embroidery” or
“Embroidery Edit”, touch
to
directly access the Embroidery settings
screen.
to return to the original screen.
■ Choosing the Display Language
.
c
Display page 9 of the Embroidery settings
screen.
d
Press
a
Press
b
Press
c
Display page 5 of the General settings
screen.
a
d
Use
and
language.
b
.
.
→ The settings screen appears.
.
→ The General settings screen appears.
*
to choose the display
Select from “English”, “Deutsch (German)”,
“Français (French)”, “Italiano (Italian)”, “Nederlands
(Dutch), “Español (Spanish)”, “Dansk (Danish)”,
“Norsk (Norwegian)”, “Suomi (Finnish)”, “Svenska
(Swedish)”, “Português (Portuguese)”, and “Русский
(Russian)”.
a Embroidery pattern background
b Pattern thumbnails background
a
a Display language
e
Press
to return to the original screen.
Basic operations B-33
B
1
Getting Ready
In the settings screen, the background colors can be
changed for the embroidery pattern and pattern
thumbnails. Depending on the pattern color, select
the desired background color from the 66 settings
available. Different background colors can be
selected for the embroidery pattern and pattern
thumbnails.
LCD SCREEN
e
Select the background color from the 66
settings available.
■ Specifying the Size of Pattern
Thumbnails
The thumbnails for selecting an embroidery pattern
can be set to be displayed at the smaller size or a
larger size. The larger size is 1.5 times the smaller
size.
a
b
a Embroidery pattern background
b Selected color
a
a
Press
b
Press
c
Display page 9 of the Embroidery settings
screen.
.
→ The settings screen appears.
b
.
→ The Embroidery settings screen appears.
a Pattern thumbnails background
b Selected color
f
Press
to return to the original screen.
Memo
• The setting remains selected even if the
machine is turned off.
B-34
LCD SCREEN
d
Press
or
to select the desired
thumbnail size.
■ Saving a Settings Screen Image to
USB Media
An image of the settings screen can be saved as a
BMP file.
A maximum of 100 images can be saved on a single
USB media at one time.
Insert the USB media into the USB port on
the right side of the machine.
Note
• When thumbnail size setting has been
changed the pattern selection screen will
not immediately reflect the chosen size. To
view the patterns with the new thumbnail
size, return to the category selection
screen, and then select the pattern category
again.
a USB port
b USB media
b
Press
c
Press
d
Remove the USB media, and then for future
reference, check the saved image using a
computer.
.
→ The settings screen appears. Select the settings
screen page, make the changes that you want, and
then save the screen image.
.
→ The image file will be saved to the USB media.
The files for Settings screen images are saved with the
name “S##.BMP”.
* “##” in the name “S##.BMP” will automatically be
replaced with a number between S00 and S99.
Note
• If 100 image files have already been saved
on the USB media, the following message
appears. In this case, delete a file from the
USB media or use different USB media.
Basic operations B-35
1
Getting Ready
a
B
LCD SCREEN
Using the Sewing Machine Help Key
Press
to open the sewing machine help screen. Three functions are available from the screen
shown below.
a
b
c
a Press this key to see explanation for upper threading, winding the bobbin, changing the presser foot, preparing to
embroider a pattern, and how to use the machine (see page B-37).
b Press this key to select utility stitches when you are not sure which stitch to use or how to sew the stitch (see page
B-38).
c Press this key to see an explanation of the stitch selected (see page B-39).
B-36
LCD SCREEN
Using the Operation Guide Function
B
Press
to open the screen shown below. Six categories are displayed at the top of the screen.
Press a key to see more information about that category.
1
Getting Ready
displays information about
the main parts of the machine and their
functions. This is the first screen displayed
when you press
displays information about
the operation buttons.
.
displays information about
attaching the embroidery unit, preparing
fabric for embroidering, etc.
displays troubleshooting
information.
displays information about
threading the machine, changing presser
feet, etc. Some of the functions are described
in the movies. Watch these movies for a
better understanding of the functions. Certain
individual threading screens are animated.
displays information about
cleaning the machine, etc.
Basic operations B-37
LCD SCREEN
Example: Displaying information about
upper threading
a
Press
b
Press
.
c
Press
.
Using the Sewing Guide Function
.
The sewing guide function can be used to select
patterns from the Utility Stitch screen.
Use this function when you are not sure which
stitch to use for your application, or to get advice
about sewing particular stitches. For example, if
you want to sew overcasting, but you do not know
which stitch to use or how to sew the stitch, you
can use this screen to get advice. We recommend
that beginners use this method to select stitches.
a
Enter Utility Stitch category from the home
page.
b
Press
c
Press
d
Press the key of the category whose sewing
instructions you wish to view.
→ The lower half of the screen will change.
d
Press
(upper threading).
.
.
→ The advice screen is displayed.
*
→ The screen shows instructions for threading the
machine.
e
*
Read the instructions.
Press
to see a video of the displayed
instructions.
Press
under movie to go back to the
beginning. Press
to pause. Press
restart after pause. Press
to
to close out the
movie.
*
Press
to view the next page.
*
Press
to view the previous page.
f
B-38
Press
to return to the original screen.
Press
to return to the original screen.
LCD SCREEN
e
Read the explanations and select the
appropriate stitch.
b
Press
.
B
→ The screen displays directions for sewing the
selected stitch. Follow the directions to sew the
stitch.
Press
to view the next page.
*
Press
to view the previous page.
1
Getting Ready
*
Using the Pattern Explanation
Function
If you want to know more about the uses of a stitch
pattern, select the pattern and press
and
then
to see an explanation of the
stitch selection.
Note
• With the pattern explanation function,
descriptions can be displayed for the
patterns available on the Utility Stitch and
Character/Decorative Stitch screens.
• Descriptions are displayed for each pattern
in the Utility Stitch screen. Description for
the Character/Decorative Stitch category is
also displayed.
c
Press
.
• If the
key is not applicable for
the selected stitch, the warning “This key
cannot be used at this time” will appear.
Press
twice and then enter the Utility
and Decorative Stitch category.
Example: Displaying information about
a
Press
.
→ The screen shows information.
d
Press
to return to the original screen.
Memo
• The settings remain displayed to allow you
to fine tune the stitch.
Basic operations B-39
LOWER THREADING
LOWER THREADING
■ Using the Supplemental Spool Pin
Winding the Bobbin
→
Press
→
→
→
With this machine, you can wind the bobbin
without unthreading the machine. While using the
main spool pin to sew, you can conveniently wind
the bobbin using the supplemental spool pin.
in this order to display a video
example of bobbin winding on the LCD (see page
B-39). Follow the steps explained below to
complete the operation.
CAUTION
• The included bobbin was designed specifically
for this sewing machine. If bobbins from other
models are used, the machine will not operate
correctly. Use only the included bobbin or
bobbins of the same type (part code:
X52800-150).
a Supplemental spool pin
*
a
b
c
Actual size
This model
Other models
11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)
a
Turn the main power to ON and open the
top cover.
b
Align the groove in the bobbin with the
spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and set
the bobbin on the shaft.
a Groove in the bobbin
b Spring on the shaft
B-40
LOWER THREADING
c
Set the supplemental spool pin in the “up”
position.
Memo
• When sewing with fine, cross-wound
thread, use the small spool cap, and leave a
small space between the cap and the
thread spool.
d
Place the spool of thread on the
supplemental spool pin, so that thread
unrolls from the front. Push the spool cap
onto the spool pin as far as possible to
secure the thread spool.
• If a spool of thread whose core is 12 mm
(1/2 inch) in diameter and 75 mm (3 inches)
high is inserted onto the spool pin, use the
mini spool insert.
a Spool cap (mini insert)
b 12 mm (1/2 inch)
c 75 mm (3 inches)
a Spool pin
b Spool cap
c Thread spool
e
With your right hand, hold the thread near
the thread spool. With your left hand, hold
the end of the thread, and use both hands to
pass the thread through the thread guide.
CAUTION
• If the thread spool and/or spool cap are set
incorrectly, the thread may tangle on the spool
pin and cause the needle to break.
• Use the spool cap (large, medium, or small)
that is closest in size to the thread spool. If a
spool cap smaller than the thread spool is
used, the thread may become caught in the slit
on the end of the spool and cause the needle
to break.
a Thread guide
Basic operations B-41
1
Getting Ready
a Spool cap (small)
b Thread spool (cross-wound thread)
c Space
a Supplemental spool pin
B
LOWER THREADING
f
Pass the thread around the pre-tension disk
making sure that the thread is under the
pre-tension disk.
a Pre-tension disk
→ Make sure that the thread passes under the
pre-tension disk.
h
Pass the end of the thread through the guide
slit in the bobbin winder seat, and pull the
thread to the right to cut the thread with
the cutter.
a Guide slit (with built-in cutter)
b Bobbin winder seat
CAUTION
b Pre-tension disk
c Pull it in as far as possible.
→ Check to make sure thread is securely set between
pre-tension disks.
g
Wind the thread clockwise around the
bobbin 5-6 Times.
• Be sure to follow the process described. If the
thread is not cut with the cutter, and the
bobbin is wound, when the thread runs low it
may tangle around the bobbin and cause the
needle to break.
i
Set the bobbin winding switch to the left,
until it clicks into place.
a Bobbin winding switch
Memo
• Sliding the bobbin winding switch to the left
switches the machine into bobbin winding
mode.
→ The bobbin winding window appears.
B-42
LOWER THREADING
j
Press
.
→ Bobbin winding starts automatically. The bobbin
stops rotating when bobbin winding is completed.
The bobbin winding switch will automatically return
to its original position.
k
Cut the thread with scissors and remove the
bobbin.
B
1
Getting Ready
Note
•
changes to
while the bobbin
is winding.
• Stay near the machine while winding the
bobbin to make sure the bobbin thread is
being wound correctly. If the bobbin thread
is wound incorrectly, press
immediately to stop the bobbin winding.
• The sound of winding the bobbin with stiff
thread, such as nylon thread for quilting,
may be different from the one produced
when winding normal thread; however, this
is not a sign of a malfunction.
Memo
• When removing the bobbin, do not pull on
the bobbin winder seat. Doing so could
loosen or remove the bobbin winder seat,
and could result in damage to the machine.
CAUTION
• Setting the bobbin improperly may cause the
thread tension to loosen, breaking the needle
and possibly resulting in injury.
Memo
• You can change the winding speed by
pressing
(to decrease) or
(to
increase) in the bobbin winding window.
■ Using the Spool Pin
You can use the main spool pin to wind the bobbin
before sewing. You cannot use this spool pin to
wind the bobbin while sewing.
• Press
to minimize the bobbin
winding window. Then, you can perform
other operations, such as selecting a stitch
or adjusting the thread tension, while the
bobbin is being wound.
• Press
(in top right of the LCD screen)
to display the bobbin winding window
again.
Basic operations B-43
LOWER THREADING
a
Turn the main power to ON and open the
top cover.
b
Align the groove in the bobbin with the
spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and set
the bobbin on the shaft.
f
Pass the thread through the thread guide.
a Thread guide
g
Pass the thread around the pre-tension disk
making sure that the thread is under the
pre-tension disk.
a Groove in the bobbin
b Spring on the shaft
c
Pivot the spool pin so that it angles upward.
Set the thread spool on the spool pin so that
the thread unwinds from the front of the
spool.
a Thread guide
b Pre-tension disk
h
Follow steps g through k on page B-42
through B-43.
■ Untangling Thread from Beneath the
Bobbin Winder Seat
a
b
c
d
Spool pin
Spool cap
Thread spool
Spool felt
d
Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as far
as possible, then return the spool pin to its
original position.
e
While holding the thread with both hands,
pull the thread up from under the thread
guide plate.
If the bobbin winding starts when the thread is not
passed through the pre-tension disk correctly, the
thread may become tangled beneath the bobbin
winder seat.
Wind off the thread according to the following
procedure.
a Thread
b Bobbin winder seat
CAUTION
• Do not remove the bobbin winder seat even if
the thread becomes tangled under the bobbin
winder seat. It may result in injuries.
a Thread guide plate
B-44
LOWER THREADING
a
If the thread becomes tangled under the
bobbin winder seat, press
once to
Setting the Bobbin
stop the bobbin winding.
→
Press
→
→
→
in this order to display a video
b
Cut the thread with scissors near the
pre-tension disk.
CAUTION
• Use a bobbin thread that has been correctly
wound. Otherwise, the needle may break or
the thread tension will be incorrect.
a Pre-tension disk
c
Push the bobbin winder switch to the right,
and then raise the bobbin at least 10 cm
(4 inches) from the shaft.
d
Cut the thread near the bobbin and hold the
thread end with your left hand. Unwind the
thread clockwise near the bobbin winder
seat with your right hand as shown below.
• The included bobbin was designed specifically
for this sewing machine. If bobbins from other
models are used, the machine will not operate
correctly. Use only the included bobbin or
bobbins of the same type (part code:
X52800-150).
*
a
b
c
Actual size
This model
Other models
11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)
• Before inserting or changing the bobbin, be
sure to press
in the LCD, otherwise
injuries may occur if the “Start/Stop” button
or any other button is pressed and the machine
starts sewing.
a
e
Press
.
Wind the bobbin again.
Note
• Make sure that the thread passes through
the pre-tension disk correctly (page B-42).
Basic operations B-45
1
Getting Ready
example of the operation on the LCD (see page
B-39). Follow the steps explained below to
complete the operation.
B
LOWER THREADING
b
Slide the bobbin cover latch to the right.
e
*
While lightly holding down bobbin with
your right hand as shown, guide the thread
through the slit (a and b).
At this time, check that the bobbin easily rotates
counterclockwise.
Then, pull the thread toward you to cut it
with the cutter (c).
a Bobbin cover
b Latch
→ The bobbin cover opens.
c
Remove the bobbin cover.
d
Insert the bobbin with your right hand so
that the end of the thread is on the left, and
then, after pulling the thread firmly around
the tab with your left hand as shown, lightly
pull the thread to guide it through the slit.
a Slit
b Cutter (Cut the thread with the cutter.)
→ The cutter cuts the thread.
Make sure that the thread is correctly
passed through the flat spring of the bobbin
case. If it is not inserted correctly, reinstall
the thread.
a Tab
* Be sure to insert the bobbin correctly.
CAUTION
• Be sure to install the bobbin so that the thread
unwinds in the correct direction, otherwise
the thread may break or the thread tension will
be incorrect.
Memo
• The order that the bobbin thread should be
passed through the bobbin case is
indicated by marks around the bobbin case.
Be sure to thread the machine as indicated.
B-46
1
a Flat spring
CAUTION
• Be sure to hold down the bobbin with your
finger and unwind the bobbin thread
correctly. Otherwise, the thread may break or
the thread tension will be incorrect.
LOWER THREADING
f
Insert the tab in the lower-left corner of the
bobbin cover (1), and then lightly press
down on the right side to close the cover
(2).
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
d
Gently pull the upper thread. A loop of the
bobbin thread will come out of the hole in
the needle plate.
e
Pull up the bobbin thread, pass it under the
presser foot and pull it about
100 mm (approx. 4 inches) toward the back
of the machine, making it even with the
upper thread.
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread
There may be some sewing applications where
you want to pull up the bobbin thread; for
example, when making gathers, darts, or doing
free motion quilting or embroidery.
Memo
• You can pull up the bobbin thread after
threading the upper thread (“UPPER
THREADING” on page B-48).
a
*
*
Guide the bobbin thread through the
groove, following the arrow in the
illustration.
Do not cut the thread with the cutter.
Do not replace the bobbin cover.
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
f
b
B
1
Getting Ready
c
Replace the bobbin cover.
While holding the upper thread, press the
“Needle Position” button to lower the
needle.
a “Needle Position” button
Basic operations B-47
UPPER THREADING
UPPER THREADING
Upper Threading
→
Press
→
→
→
a
Turn the main power to ON.
b
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
raise the presser foot.
in this order to display a video
example of the operation on the LCD (see page
B-39). Follow the steps explained below to
complete the operation.
CAUTION
• Be sure to thread the machine properly.
Improper threading can cause the thread to
tangle and break the needle, leading to injury.
• When using the walking foot, the side cutter or
accessories not included with this machine,
attach the accessory to the machine after
threading the machine.
→ The upper thread shutter opens so the machine can
be threaded.
Memo
• The automatic threading function can be
used with sewing machine needle sizes
75/11 through 100/16.
• Thread such as transparent nylon
monofilament thread and thread with a
thickness of 130/20 or thicker cannot be
used with the automatic threading function.
• The automatic threading function cannot be
used with the wing needle or the twin
needle.
a Upper thread shutter
Memo
• This machine is equipped with an upper
thread shutter, allowing you to check that
the upper threading is performed correctly.
c
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
Note
• If you try to thread the needle automatically
without raising the needle, the thread may
not thread correctly.
B-48
UPPER THREADING
d
Pivot the spool pin so that it angles upward.
Set the thread spool on the spool pin so that
the thread unwinds from the front of the
spool.
e
• When sewing with fine, cross-wound
thread, use the small spool cap, and leave a
small space between the cap and the
thread spool.
a Spool cap (small)
b Thread spool (cross-wound thread)
c Space
Spool pin
Spool cap
Thread spool
Spool felt
• If a spool of thread whose core is 12 mm
(1/2 inch) in diameter and 75 mm (3 inches)
high is inserted onto the spool pin, use the
mini spool insert.
Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as far
as possible, then return the spool pin to its
original position.
CAUTION
• If the thread spool and/or spool cap are set
incorrectly, the thread may tangle on the spool
pin and cause the needle to break.
• Use the spool cap (large, medium, or small)
that is closest in size to the thread spool. If a
spool cap smaller than the thread spool is
used, the thread may become caught in the slit
on the end of the spool and cause the needle
to break.
a Spool cap (mini insert)
b 12 mm (1/2 inch)
c 75 mm (3 inches)
f
While holding the thread with both hands,
pull the thread up from under the thread
guide plate.
a Thread guide plate
g
While holding the thread in your right
hand, pass the thread through the thread
guide in the direction indicated.
Basic operations B-49
B
1
Getting Ready
a
b
c
d
Memo
UPPER THREADING
h
Guide the thread down, up, then down
through the groove, as shown in the
illustration.
Memo
• Look in the upper groove area to check if
the thread catches on the take-up lever
visible inside the upper groove area.
a Look in the upper groove area
Pass the thread through the needle bar
i
thread guide (marked “6”) by holding the
thread with both hands and guiding it as
shown in the illustration.
k
Pass the thread through the thread guide
disks (marked “7”). Make sure that the
thread passes through the groove in the
thread guide.
a Groove in thread guide
l
Pull the thread up through the thread cutter
to cut the thread, as shown in the
illustration.
a Thread cutter
Note
• When using thread that quickly winds off
the spool, such as metallic thread, it may be
difficult to thread the needle if the thread is
cut.
Therefore, instead of using the thread
cutter, pull out about 80 mm (approx. 3
inches) of thread after passing it through the
thread guide disks (marked “7”).
a Needle bar thread guide
j
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower presser foot.
a 80 mm (approx. 3 inches) or more
B-50
UPPER THREADING
m
Press the “Automatic Threading” button to
have the machine automatically thread the
needle.
Memo
• When the “Automatic Threading” button is
pressed, the presser foot will be
automatically lowered. After threading is
finished, the presser foot moves back to the
position before the “Automatic Threading”
button was pressed.
n
*
• If the needle could not be threaded or the
thread was not passed through the needle
bar thread guides, perform the procedure
again starting from step c.
Then, pass the thread through the eye of
the needle after step i.
Note
• Some needles cannot be threaded with the
needle threader. In this case, instead of
using the needle threader after passing the
thread through the needle bar thread guide
(marked “6”), manually pass the thread
through the eye of the needle from the front
to the back.
Carefully pull the end of the thread that was
passed through the eye of the needle.
If a loop was formed in the thread passed through
the eye of the needle, carefully pull on the loop of
thread through to the back of the needle.
Note
• Pulling the loop of thread gently will avoid
needle breakage.
o
Pull out about 10-15 cm (approx. 4-6
inches) of the thread, and then pass it under
the presser foot toward the rear of the
machine.
→ Raise the presser foot lever if the presser foot is
lowered.
a About 10-15 cm (approx. 4-6 inches)
Basic operations B-51
B
1
Getting Ready
→ The thread passes through the eye of the needle.
Memo
UPPER THREADING
Using the Twin Needle Mode
b
Thread the machine for the first needle
according to the procedure for threading a
single needle (“Upper Threading” on
page B-48).
c
Pass the thread through the needle bar
thread guides on the needle bar, then
thread the needle on the left side manually.
The twin needle can only be used for patterns that
show
after being selected. Before you select a
stitch pattern, make sure the stitch can be sewn in
the twin needle mode (refer to the “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page S-68).
CAUTION
• Twin needle (part code X59296-151) is
recommended for this machine. Contact your
authorized retailer for replacement needles
(size 2.0/11 is recommended).
• Be sure to set the twin needle mode when
using the twin needle. Using the twin needle
while the machine is in single needle mode
could cause the needle to break, resulting in
damage.
• Do not sew with bent needles. The needle
could break and cause injury.
• When using the twin needle, it is
recommended to use presser foot “J”.
• When the twin needle is used, bunched
stitches may occur depending on the types of
fabric and thread that are used.
Use monogramming foot “N” for decorative
stitches.
• Before changing the needle or threading the
on the LCD
machine, be sure to press
Screen, otherwise injuries may occur if the
“Start/Stop” button or any other button is
pressed and the machine starts sewing.
a
a Needle bar thread guide
Note
• The “Automatic Threading” button cannot
be used. Manually thread the twin needle
from front to back. Using the “Automatic
Threading” button may result in damage to
the machine.
d
Pull up the supplemental spool pin and set it
in the up position.
Press
and install the twin needle
(“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page B-57).
a Supplemental spool pin
B-52
UPPER THREADING
e
Place the additional spool of thread on the
supplemental spool pin, so that the thread
unwinds from the front. Push the spool cap
onto the spool pin as far as possible to
secure the thread spool.
h
Continue threading however do not pass
the thread in the needle bar thread guide
“6” on the needle bar. Thread the needle on
the right side.
a Spool pin
b Spool cap
c Thread spool
f
*
Hold the thread from the spool with both
hands, and place the thread in the thread
guide.
Press
j
Select a stitch pattern. (Example:
*
.
)
Refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” on
page S-68 for the proper stitch to use with presser
foot “J”.
→ The selected stitch is displayed.
Note
Do not place the thread in the pre-tension disks.
• If the
key is light gray after selecting
the stitch, the selected stitch cannot be
sewn in the twin needle mode.
k
Press
to select the twin needle mode.
a
a Thread guide
g
While holding the thread from the spool,
pull the thread through the lower notch in
the thread guide plate, then through the
upper notch. Hold the end of the thread
with your left hand, and then guide the
thread through the groove, following the
arrows in the illustration.
a Single needle/twin needle setting
→
1
Getting Ready
a Needle bar thread guide
i
B
appears.
CAUTION
• Be sure to set the twin needle mode when
using the twin needle. Using the twin needle
while the machine is in single needle mode
could cause the needle to break, resulting in
damage.
Basic operations B-53
UPPER THREADING
l
a
Start sewing.
Sample of Twin Needle Sewing
Insert the vertical spool pin onto the bobbin
winder shaft.
a
b
c
d
d
c
Bobbin winder shaft
Vertical spool pin
Spool felt
Thread spool
b
a
Memo
• To change direction when sewing with the
twin needle, raise the needle from the
fabric, raise the presser foot lever, and then
turn the fabric.
b
Install the spool felt and the thread spool in
that order, and then thread the upper
thread.
Memo
Using Threads that Unwind
Quickly
■ Using the Spool Net
If using transparent nylon monofilament thread,
metallic thread, or other strong thread, place the
included spool net over the spool before using it.
When using specialty threads, threading must be
done manually.
If the spool net is too long, fold it once to match it to
the spool size before placing it over the spool.
a
b
c
d
Spool net
Thread spool
Spool pin
Spool cap
Memo
• When threading the spool with the spool net
on, make sure that 5 cm - 6 cm (approx.
2 inches - 2-1/2 inches) of thread are pulled
out.
• It may be necessary to adjust the thread
tension when using the spool net.
■ Using the Vertical Spool Pin
Use the vertical spool pin when using an irregularly
shaped thread spool, and when sewing or
embroidering with metallic thread.
B-54
• When setting the thread spool, set it so that
the thread winds off from the front of the
spool.
• If using metallic thread, we recommend that
you use a 90/14 home sewing machine
needle.
• Using the vertical spool pin with certain
types of threads will keep the thread from
twisting as it comes off the spool pin.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
B
CAUTION
Removing the Presser Foot
a
Attaching the Presser Foot
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
CAUTION
• Make sure that the presser foot is installed in
the correct direction, otherwise the needle
may strike the presser foot, breaking the
needle and causing injuries.
a
b
Press
.
*
If the message “OK to automatically lower the
presser foot? ” appears on the LCD screen, press OK
to continue.
→ The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and
operation buttons are locked.
c
Place the new presser foot under the
holder, aligning the foot pin with the notch
in the holder. Lower the presser foot lever
so that the presser foot pin snaps into the
notch in the holder.
Raise the presser foot lever.
a Notch
b Pin
d
Press the black button on the presser foot
holder and remove the presser foot.
b
Press
buttons.
c
Raise the presser foot lever.
to unlock all keys and
Attaching the Presser Foot with
the Included Adapter
You can attach optional presser feet using the
included adapter and small screw. For example,
the walking foot, the free motion echo quilting foot
“E”, the free motion quilting foot and so on.
a
b
Following procedure shows how to attach the
walking foot as an example.
a Black button
b Presser foot holder
Basic operations B-55
1
Getting Ready
• Always press
on the screen before changing the presser foot. If
is not pressed and the
“Start/Stop” button or another button is pressed, the machine will start and may cause injury.
• Always use the correct presser foot for the selected stitch pattern. If the wrong presser foot is used, the
needle may strike the presser foot and bend or break, and may cause injury.
• Only use presser feet made for this machine. Using other presser feet may lead to accident or injury.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
■ Attaching the Walking foot
e
Insert the included small screw into the
threaded hole in the adapter and turn it 2 or
3 times with your hand.
f
Set the operation lever of the walking foot
so that the needle clamp screw is set
between the forks. Position the shank of the
walking foot on the adapter attached to the
presser foot bar.
The walking foot holds the fabric between the
presser foot and the feed dogs to feed the fabric. This
enables you to have better fabric control when
sewing difficult fabrics (such as quilted fabrics or
velvet) or fabrics that slip easily (such as vinyl,
leather, or synthetic leather).
a
Follow the steps in “Removing the Presser
Foot” in the previous page.
b
Loosen the screw of the presser foot holder
to remove the presser foot holder.
a Disc-shaped screwdriver
b Presser foot holder
c Presser foot holder screw
c
Remove the screw of the presser foot
completely from the presser foot shaft.
a
b
c
d
e
g
d
B-56
Set the adapter on the presser foot bar,
aligning the flat side of the adapter opening
with the flat side of the presser bar. Push it
up as far as possible, and then tighten the
screw securely with the screwdriver.
Operation lever
Needle clamp screw
Fork
Walking foot shank
Adapter
Lower the presser foot lever. Tighten the
small screw securely with a large
screwdriver.
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
B
1
CAUTION
c
Memo
• To check the needle correctly, place the flat
side of the needle on a flat surface. Check
the needle from the top and the sides.
Throw away any bent needles.
Use the screwdriver to turn the screw
toward the front of the machine and loosen
the screw. Remove the needle.
a Parallel space
b Level surface (bobbin cover, glass, etc.)
Note
a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
b
Press
*
• Do not apply pressure to the needle clamp
screw. Doing so may damage the needle or
machine.
.
If the message “OK to automatically lower the
presser foot? ” appears on the LCD screen, press OK
to continue.
→ The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and
operation buttons are locked.
Note
• Before replacing the needle, cover the hole
in the needle plate with fabric or paper to
prevent the needle from falling into the
machine.
Basic operations B-57
Getting Ready
• Always press
on the screen before changing the needle. If
is not pressed and the
Start/Stop button or another operation button is pressed accidentally, the machine will start and injury
may result.
• Use only sewing machine needles made for home use. Other needles may bend or break and may cause
injury.
• Never sew with a bent needle. A bent needle will easily break and may cause injury.
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
d
With the flat side of the needle facing the
back, insert the new needle all the way to
the top of the needle stopper (viewing
window) in the needle clamp. Use a
screwdriver to securely tighten the needle
clamp screw.
a Needle stopper
b Hole for setting the needle
c Flat side of needle
CAUTION
• Be sure to push in the needle until it touches
the stopper, and securely tighten the needle
clamp screw with a screwdriver. If the needle
is not completely inserted or the needle clamp
screw is loose, the needle may break or the
machine may be damaged.
e
B-58
Press
buttons.
to unlock all keys and
ABOUT THE NEEDLE AND FABRIC
ABOUT THE NEEDLE AND FABRIC
B
About the Needle
•
•
•
•
The smaller the needle number, the finer the needle. As the numbers increase, the needles get thicker.
Use fine needles with lightweight fabrics, and thicker needles with heavyweight fabrics.
To avoid skipped stitches, use ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 with stretch fabrics.
To avoid skipped stitches, use ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 when sewing character or decorative
stitches.
• Use needle 75/11 for embroidery. Use ball point needle 75/11 for embroidering patterns with short jump
stitches such as alphabet characters when the thread trimming function is turned on.
• Ball point needles (golden colored) 90/14 are only recommended for embroidery conditions stated above, as
they otherwise may bend or break.
• It is recommended that a 90/14 needle should be used when embroidering on heavyweight fabrics or
stabilizing products (for example, denim, puffy foam, etc.). A 75/11 needle may bend or break, which could
result in injury.
Note
• Never use a thread of weight 20 or lower. It may cause malfunctions.
Basic operations B-59
Getting Ready
The sewing machine needle is probably the most important part of the sewing machine. Choosing the
proper needle for your sewing project will result in a beautiful finish and fewer problems. Below are some
things to keep in mind about needles.
1
ABOUT THE NEEDLE AND FABRIC
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations
The following table provides information concerning the appropriate thread and needle for various
fabrics. Please refer to this table when selecting a thread and needle for the fabric you wish to use.
Fabric type/Application
Thread
Type
Medium weight fabrics
Broadcloth
Cotton thread
Taffeta
Synthetic thread
Flannel, Gabardine Silk thread
Thin fabrics
Thick fabrics
Lawn
Cotton thread
Georgette
Synthetic thread
Size of needle
Size
60 - 90
75/11 - 90/14
50
60 - 90
65/9 - 75/11
Challis, Satin
Silk thread
50
Denim
Cotton thread
30
Corduroy
Synthetic thread
Tweed
Silk thread
Jersey
Thread for knits
50 - 60
Ball point needle
(gold colored)
75/11 - 90/14
Cotton thread
50 - 90
65/9 - 90/14
90/14 - 100/16
50
Stretch fabrics
50 - 60
Tricot
Easily frayed fabrics
Synthetic thread
For top-stitching
Silk thread
50
Synthetic thread
Silk thread
30
100/16
50 - 60
90/14 - 100/16
Memo
• For transparent monofilament nylon thread, always use needle sizes 90/14 or 100/16.
The same thread is usually used for the bobbin thread and upper thread.
CAUTION
• Be sure to follow the needle, thread, and fabric combinations listed in the table. Using an improper
combination, especially a heavyweight fabric (i.e., denim) with a small needle (i.e., 65/9 - 75/11), may
cause the needle to bend or break, and lead to injury. Also, the seam may be uneven, the fabric may
pucker, or the machine may skip stitches.
B-60
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
B
1
Embroidery Step by Step
Follow the steps below to prepare the machine for embroidery.
Getting Ready
Step 9
Step 6, 8
Step 3
Step 4
Step 1, 2
Step 7
Step #
1
*
Step 5
Aim
Presser foot attachment
Action
Page
Attach embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer.
B-62
2
Checking the needle
Use needle 75/11 for embroidery. *
B-59
3
Embroidery unit attachment
Attach the embroidery unit.
B-65
4
Bobbin thread setup
For the bobbin thread, wind embroidery bobbin thread and set it in place.
5
Fabric preparation
Attach a stabilizer material to the fabric, and hoop it in the embroidery frame.
B-40
6
Pattern selection
Turn the main power to ON, and select an embroidery pattern.
E-3
7
Embroidery frame attachment
Attach the embroidery frame to the embroidery unit.
E-17
E-11 to
E-17
8
Checking the layout
Check and adjust the size and position of the embroidery.
E-19
9
Embroidery thread setup
Set up embroidery thread according to the pattern.
E-21
It is recommended that a 90/14 needle should be used when embroidering on heavy weight fabrics or stabilizing products (for example;
denim, puffy foam, etc.). Ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 is not recommended for embroidery.
Basic operations B-61
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
Using the Embroidery Foot “W+”
with LED Pointer
d
Push the black button on the presser foot
holder and remove the presser foot.
By plugging in the connector on the back of your
machine, the embroidering needle drop point will
be indicated on the fabric, allowing you to
accurately position the pattern.
■ Attaching the Embroidery Foot
“W+” with LED Pointer
CAUTION
• When attaching a presser foot, always press
on the screen. You may accidentally
press the “Start/Stop” button and possibly
cause injury.
• Be sure to use embroidery foot when doing
embroidery. Using another presser foot may
cause the needle to strike the presser foot,
causing the needle to bend or break and
possibly cause injury.
a
a Black button
b Presser foot holder
→ Remove the presser foot from the presser foot
holder.
e
Use the included screwdriver to loosen the
screw of the presser foot holder, then
remove the presser foot holder.
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
a
b
c
→
f
b
Press
.
→ The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and
operation buttons are locked.
CAUTION
• When attaching a presser foot, always press
on the screen. You may accidentally
press the “Start/Stop” button and possibly
cause injury.
c
B-62
Raise the presser foot lever.
Screwdriver
Presser foot holder
Presser foot holder screw
Remove the presser foot holder.
Position the embroidery foot “W+” with
LED pointer on the presser foot bar by
aligning the notch of the presser foot to the
large screw.
Side view
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
g
Hold the embroidery foot in place with
your right hand, and then use the included
screwdriver to securely tighten the presser
foot holder screw.
■ Checking the Needle Drop Point
With the Embroidery Foot “W+”
with LED Pointer
Before beginning to embroider when using the
embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer, carefully
read the procedures described in the “Embroidery”
and “Embroidery Edit” chapters.
Press
in the embroidery screen.
→ The LED pointer indicates the needle drop point.
CAUTION
• Use the included screwdriver to firmly tighten
the screw of the embroidery foot. If the screw
is loose, the needle may strike the presser foot
and possibly cause injury.
h
Plug the connector of the embroidery foot
“W+” with LED pointer into the jack on the
back of your machine.
Memo
• When the LED pointer is turned on, the
presser foot height is automatically adjusted
according to the fabric thickness.
• If
is pressed again, the fabric thickness
is remeasured and the presser foot is set to
the optimum height.
i
Press
to unlock all keys and
buttons.
→ All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and
the previous screen is displayed.
*
The LED pointer turns off automatically by lowering
the presser foot or returning to the previous page.
Note
• With bulky fabrics, the position may not be
accurate due to the various depths of the
fabric. In this case, manually adjust the
position according to the thickness of the
fabric.
• With fabric that has a very uneven surface
such as quilting, the fabric thickness may
not be correctly measured. In this case, the
pointer indication should be used only as a
reference.
Basic operations B-63
1
Getting Ready
a
B
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
■ Adjusting the LED Pointer
Adjust the LED pointer if it indicates a point different
than the actual needle drop point.
Before adjusting the LED pointer, mark the actual
needle drop point on the fabric to be embroidered,
and then hoop the fabric and attach the embroidery
frame.
d
Press
.
→ The Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer
Adjustment screen appears.
a
Note
• As a default, some keys mentioned in the
following procedures appear in light gray
and are not available. To enable the keys for
specifying the settings, attach embroidery
foot “W+” with LED pointer to the machine.
The keys are enabled after the embroidery
foot is detected.
a
Press
b
Press
a LED pointer adjustment
Note
• The specified setting is saved. This is useful
for positioning during continuous
embroidering.
• For normal use, return the setting to “00”.
.
→ The settings screen appears.
.
e
Use
or
to adjust the LED pointer so
that it indicates the actual needle drop
point.
f
Press
screen.
→ The Embroidery settings screen appears.
Memo
• When using the “Embroidery” or
“Embroidery Edit”, touch
to
directly access the Embroidery settings
screen.
c
B-64
Display page 10 of the Embroidery settings
screen.
twice to return to the original
■ Adjusting the Brightness of the LED
Pointer
a
Follow the steps from a to d to display
the embroidery foot with LED pointer
adjust screen.
b
Use
or
to adjust the brightness of
the LED pointer.
c
Press
screen.
twice to return to the original
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
Attaching the Embroidery Unit
b
■ About the Embroidery Unit
a Embroidery unit connection
b Machine connection port
Note
Note
• You can also sew utility/decorative stitches
with the embroidery unit attached. Touch
and
•
•
•
•
a
• Be sure there is no gap between the
embroidery unit and the sewing machine. If
there is a gap, the embroidery patterns will
not embroider with the correct registration.
• Do not push on the carriage when installing
the embroidery unit onto the machine.
Moving the carriage may damage the
embroidery unit.
. The feed dog will
automatically raise for utility and decorative
stitching.
Be sure to turn off the power before
attaching the embroidery unit. Otherwise,
the machine may be damaged.
Do not touch the inner connector of the
embroidery unit. The pins on the
embroidery unit connection may be
damaged.
Do not apply strong force to the embroidery
unit carriage or pick up the unit by the
carriage. Otherwise, the embroidery unit
may be damaged.
Store the embroidery unit in the proper
storage case.
B
1
Getting Ready
CAUTION
• Do not move the machine with the embroidery
unit attached. The embroidery unit could fall
off and cause injury.
• Keep your hands and foreign objects away
from the embroidery carriage and frame when
the machine is embroidering. Otherwise,
injury may result.
• To avoid distorting your embroidery design, do
not touch the embroidery carriage and frame
when the machine is embroidering.
Insert the embroidery unit connection into
the machine connection port. The spring
hinge on the connection port cover will
allow easy access to the port. Push lightly
on the connection port cover until the unit
clicks into place.
c
Turn the main power to ON.
d
Press
→ The following message will appear.
.
Turn the main power to OFF, and remove
the flat bed attachment.
→ The carriage will move to the initialization position.
Note
• Either “Embroidery” screen or “Embroidery
Edit” screen appears, depending on the
setting selected in the settings screen.
Basic operations B-65
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
■ Removing the Embroidery Unit
a
Press either
or
c
Hold down the release button, and pull the
embroidery unit away from the machine.
, then press
.
→ The carriage will move to the removal position.
CAUTION
• Always remove the embroidery frame before
pressing
. Otherwise, the frame may
strike the embroidery foot, and possibly cause
injury.
• The embroidery unit will not fit in the storage
case if this step is not done.
b
Turn the main power to OFF.
Note
• Be sure to turn off the machine before
removing the embroidery unit, otherwise
damage to the machine may result.
a Release button
CAUTION
• Do not carry the embroidery unit by holding
the release button compartment.
B-66
USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE
USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE
ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE
*
If you have purchased the Palette Ver5 or later,
Palette Petite or Palette PTS, you can plug the
included USB card writer module into the machine
as an embroidery card reader, and recall patterns.
Memo
• USB media is widely used, however some
USB media may not be usable with this
machine. Please visit our website for more
details.
• Depending on the type of USB media being
used, either directly plug the USB device
into the machine’s USB port or plug the
USB media Reader/Writer into the
machine’s USB port.
Connecting the Machine to the
Computer
Using the included USB cable, the sewing machine
can be connected to your computer.
a USB port for mouse / media
b USB media
a USB port for computer
b USB cable connector
Note
a USB port for mouse / media
b Embroidery card Reader/USB card writer module*
Note
• Use only an embroidery card reader
designed for this machine. Using an
unauthorized embroidery card reader may
cause your machine to operate incorrectly.
• Embroidery patterns cannot be saved from
the machine to an embroidery card inserted
into a connected USB card writer module.
• The connectors on the USB cable can only
be inserted into a port in one direction. If it
is difficult to insert the connector, do not
insert it with force. Check the orientation of
the connector.
• For details on the position of the USB port
on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the
instruction manual for the corresponding
equipment.
Basic operations B-67
1
Getting Ready
Using USB Media or Embroidery
Card Reader/USB Card Writer
Module*
B
USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE
■ Changing Pages
Using a USB Mouse
The USB mouse, connected to the sewing
machine, can be used to perform a variety of
operations in the screens.
If page numbers and a vertical scroll bar for
additional pages are displayed, click the left mouse
button with the pointer on
/
or
display the previous or next page.
/
to
If a mouse other than the optional USB mouse is
used, it may not perform as described in this
Instruction and Reference Guide.
Using the Dual Feed Foot
Dual feed foot enables you to have best fabric
control when sewing difficult fabrics that slip
easily, such as quilted fabrics, or fabrics that tend
to stick to the bottom of a presser foot, such as
vinyl, leather or synthetic leather.
a USB port for mouse / media
b USB mouse
Note
• Do not perform operations with the mouse
at the same time that you are touching the
screen with your finger or the included
touch pen.
• A USB mouse can be connected or
disconnected at any time.
• Only the left mouse button and its wheel
can be used to perform operations. No
other buttons can be used.
• The mouse pointer does not appear in the
opening screen.
■ Clicking a Key
When the mouse is connected, the pointer appears
on the screen. Move the mouse to position the
pointer over the desired key, and then click the left
mouse button.
Memo
• Double-clicking has no effect.
a
a Pointer
B-68
Note
• When sewing with the dual feed foot, sew at
medium to low speeds.
Memo
• The dual feed foot can only be used with
straight or zigzag stitch patterns.
• When selecting stitches to be used with the
dual feed foot, only the stitches that can be
used will be activated on the display.
• When sewing fabric that easily sticks
together, a more attractive finish can be
achieved by basting the beginning of
sewing.
USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE
■ Attaching the Dual Feed Foot
Follow the steps from a to e of “Using
the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED
Pointer” on page B-62.
b
Position the dual feed foot to the presser
foot bar by aligning the notch of the dual
feed foot to the large screw.
Side view
c
Hold the dual feed foot in place with your
right hand, then using the included
screwdriver securely tighten the large
screw.
Press
to unlock all keys and
buttons.
→ All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and
the previous screen is displayed.
■ Replacing the Sole Part of the Dual
Feed Foot
If you push down on the front part of the dual feed
foot, the sole part of the dual feed foot will snap off.
Attach the sole by aligning the pins with the notches
and snap it into place.
CAUTION
• Use the included screwdriver to firmly tighten
the screw. If the screw is loose, the needle may
strike the presser foot and possibly cause
injury.
Plug the connector of the dual feed foot
d
into the jack on the back of your machine.
a Pins
b Notches
■ Using the Dual Feed Position Lever
When the feed position lever is up, the black roller
belt on the dual feed is not engaged.
Basic operations B-69
B
1
Getting Ready
a
e
USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE
When the feed position lever is down, the black
roller belt on the dual feed is engaged.
d
*
*
*
Use
or
to increase or decrease the
feeding of the top fabric.
Select “00” for sewing in most cases.
If the feed amount for the top fabric is too little,
causing the fabric to be longer than the bottom
fabric, press
to increase the feed amount for the
top fabric.
If the feed amount for the top fabric is too much,
causing the fabric to be shorter than the bottom
fabric, press
top fabric.
to decrease the feed amount for the
Note
• Do not operate the lever while sewing.
■ Adjusting the Amount of Fabric
Feeding of the Dual Feed Foot
The dual feed mechanism pulls the top fabric
according to the set stitch length. With troublesome
fabrics, fine tune the set length, by changing the
dual feed foot adjustment in the settings screen.
Note
• As a default, some keys mentioned in the
following procedures appear in light gray
and are not available. To enable the keys for
specifying the settings, attach the dual feed
foot and connector to the machine. The
keys are enabled after the dual feed foot is
detected.
a
Press
b
Press
c
Display page 1 of the Sewing settings
screen.
.
→ The settings screen appears.
.
→ The Sewing settings screen appears.
B-70
e
Press
to return to the original screen.
USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE
B
1
Getting Ready
Basic operations B-71
BBasic operations
Chapter
2
Sensor Functions
CONVENIENT SEWING FEATURES BY USING THE
SENSOR PEN............................................................ 73
CONNECTING THE SENSOR PEN ........................... 73
Using the Sensor Pen Holder ....................................................74
USING THE SENSOR PEN........................................ 75
Using the Sensor Pen ................................................................75
Important Information about Sensor Pen..................................75
Calibrating the Sensor Pen........................................................76
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH..... 78
Sensor Function Area................................................................78
Specifying the Guideline Marker Position With the Sensor Pen .....78
Specifying the Needle Drop Position With the Sensor Pen .......80
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Stitching Width and Stitch
Position .....................................................................................81
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Sewing End Point..............83
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN
“EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE ...... 85
Specifying the Embroidering Position With the Sensor Pen.......85
■ Selecting the Embroidering Position by the Pattern Edge ......... 86
■ Selecting the Embroidering Position by the Pattern Center ...... 87
CONVENIENT SEWING FEATURES BY USING THE SENSOR PEN
CONVENIENT SEWING FEATURES BY USING THE
SENSOR PEN
By using the sensor pen, you have the option of
four separate functions
• Set the needle position of straight stitch.
• Adjust the width and “L/R SHIFT” position of a
zigzag stitch.
• Set the ending point of a stitch pattern sequence.
CAUTION
a When specifying the end point of your sewing, this
function adjusts your pattern or stitch so that you
end up with a complete design.
b It is easy to set the pattern width and position.
Note
• When the guideline or LED pointer does not
appear clearly, set the brightness of the
machine light dimmer to see them clearly.
Refer to “Using the Machine Setting Mode
Key” on page B-28.
CONNECTING THE SENSOR PEN
When connecting the sensor pen to the machine, make sure that the arrow on the sensor pen connector
faces up, aligns with the arrow on the machine, and that the connector is firmly inserted into the jack.
CAUTION
a Sensor pen jack
b Sensor pen connector
2
Sensor Functions
• Setting the guideline as a reference for your
sewing position.
• The guideline marker is a laser; therefore, do
not stare at the laser light directly. Otherwise
it may cause blindness.
B
• When connecting the sensor pen, make sure
that the arrow on the sensor pen connector
faces up and lines up with the arrow above the
sensor pen jack, otherwise the connector pins
will not align correctly and the connector will
be damaged.
• When connecting or disconnecting the sensor
pen, grab the connector, and then slowly push
it straight in or pull it straight out.
• When disconnecting the sensor pen from the
machine, do not pull on the cord, otherwise
the sensor pen may be damaged.
Basic operations B-73
CONNECTING THE SENSOR PEN
Using the Sensor Pen Holder
When connecting the sensor pen to the machine,
attach the sensor pen holder to keep the sensor
pen with the machine.
The right side of the holder can be used to hold the
touch pen.
Sensor pen holder
a
Using the point end of the cleaning brush or
the seam ripper point, remove the
protective cap covering the hole on the
right side of the machine.
→ Insert the point of the seam ripper or cleaning brush
into the hole in the protective cap, and then lightly
pull out the protective cap to remove it.
b
B-74
Firmly insert the sensor pen holder into the
hole where the protective cap was
removed.
c
Set the sensor pen in the sensor pen holder
with the pen tip pointing downward, and
then connect the sensor pen to the
machine.
USING THE SENSOR PEN
USING THE SENSOR PEN
Using the Sensor Pen
When using the sensor pen, touch slowly and
gently for the definite operation.
Important Information about
Sensor Pen
The sensor pen emits the signal to the machine,
and then the sensor pen receiver receives the
signal to specify the position.
a Sensor pen receiver inside the machine
b Signal is waved out from the sensor pen
1) Touch: Touch a point with the sensor pen, then
immediately lift up the pen.
2) Long touch: Touch a point with the sensor pen
and hold it down for at least one second to
activate the functions that you just selected.
CAUTION
• Do not insert any object into the sensor pen
and the receiver, otherwise the machine may
be damaged.
Note
• Once a point is touched with the sensor pen
and the entered information is applied in the
screen, perform the next operation.
Repeatedly touching a point with the sensor
pen may prevent the information from being
correctly read.
• Do not drag the sensor pen tip on the
machine, otherwise the sensor pen tip may
be chipped off.
• If there is any problem with the guideline
marker, the sensor function may not
operate correctly.
IMPORTANT
• Do not put your hand, the fabric or any object
between the machine and the sensor pen,
otherwise the sensor pen receiver may not
receive the ultrasonic wave.
• Do not use the machine close to any other unit
which produces ultrasonic wave or a vibration
sound, otherwise interference may occur.
Memo
• The sensor pen can be used to touch on the
screen as a touch pen.
Basic operations B-75
2
Sensor Functions
Hold the sensor pen, and then touch the point to
be specified. When the tip of the sensor pen is
pushed in, the position information is sent to the
machine.
B
USING THE SENSOR PEN
Calibrating the Sensor Pen
e
First, touch the green dot marking on the
needle plate cover using the sensor pen.
Before using the sensor pen for the first time be
sure to calibrate it to the screen. Doing so allows
the machine to learn the position you usually hold
a pen.
Hold the sensor pen at a comfortable angle and
then calibrate the machine according to the
procedure below.
Be sure to keep the sensor pen at the same angle
while calibrating the first and second points.
*
a
Press
b
Press
c
Display page 6 of the General settings
screen.
Touch on the needle plate cover.
.
→ The settings screen appears.
.
→ The General settings screen appears.
a Needle plate cover
* A beep will sound and the a will change to red. (If
you cannot hear the beep, check that the volume
setting on page 4/10 of your settings is 1 or higher.)
*
Press
from step d.
d
Press
after connecting the sensor
pen to the machine.
→ The Sensor Function Calibration screen appears.
B-76
to redo the first point by starting over
USING THE SENSOR PEN
f
Second, touch the green dot on the
embroidery unit or flat bed attachment
using the sensor pen.
g
Press
to finish the calibration. To
repeat the calibration touch the first point
again using the sensor pen, and continue
with step f.
B
2
Sensor Functions
*
Touch on the point in the illustrations.
*
Press
to return to the original screen without
finishing the calibration.
*
Press
to reset the calibration.
a Flat bed attachment
b Embroidery unit
Basic operations B-77
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
Before using the sensor functions, carefully read “Utility Stitches” chapter to familiarize yourself with the
machine operations.
The sensor functions are performed using the sensor pen.
Sensor Function Area
Memo
• There are borderline areas between setting
area and adjustment areas, which allow you
to set quickly to the most
decreased/increased value.
• The borderline areas are respectively 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch) wide when
positioning the guideline marker, and 10
mm (approx. 3/8 inch) wide in other cases.
When using the sensor pen with utility stitches, the
operations may differ depending on the area to be
touched.
Specifying the Guideline Marker
Position With the Sensor Pen
The sewing position will be indicated by a red
guideline marker.
The position of the guideline marker can be
adjusted to your desired location.
a Center needle
position
Sewing position for stitch patterns sewn
with the center needle position
b Setting area
Area 3.5 mm to the left and right of a.
Touch this area with the sensor pen to
specify a position.
Area 7 mm, when positioning the
guideline marker.
c Adjustment area
(right)
Touch: With each touch, the setting
increases by 0.5 mm. This allows fine
adjustments to be made after touching
within b to specify a position.
Long touch: After touching b to specify
a position or adjusting the position by
touching within c or d, long touch to
apply the setting.
d Adjustment area
(left)
Touch: With each touch, the setting
decreases by 0.5 mm. This allows fine
adjustments to be made after touching
within b to specify a position.
Long touch: Apply the setting in the
same way as a long touch within c.
e The sensor pen touch range extends approximately 200 mm
(7-7/8 inches) toward you from the needle drop point and 130
mm (approx. 5 inches) to either side of the middle (center)
needle position.
B-78
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Press
c
Press
.
.
→ The sensor functions screen appears.
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
d
Press
.
Memo
→ The guideline marker position setting screen appears
and the guideline marker flashes.
e
With the sensor pen, touch the location to
be specified as the guideline marker
position.
→ The machine’s guideline marker moves to the
touched position and flashes.
→ The distance from the left reference line to the
touched position appears in the guideline marker
position setting screen.
f
*
Press
to apply the guideline marker
position setting.
The setting can also be applied by a long touch of
the sensor pen within the adjustment area.
→ The stitch preview on the upper left side of the
screen is updated according to the specified setting.
a
a Press to stop specifying a setting with the sensor
pen.
Note
• The following error message appears if the
area outside of the sensor pen touch range
is touched. Press
, and then touch
within the sensor pen touch range.
→ The stitch selection screen appears again, and the
setting in the guideline marker scale changes to the
setting specified with the sensor pen.
→ The guideline marker stops flashing.
Note
• If you set the needle drop position, the
stitch width or stitch position after
specifying the guideline marker position, the
guideline marker may move while setting.
The guideline marker moves back to the
specified position after the needle drop
position, stitch width or stitch position is set
and the original screen appears.
Basic operations B-79
B
2
Sensor Functions
• The position can be precisely adjusted by
touching the adjustment areas with the
sensor pen.
• When using the sensor pen to specify the
guideline marker position, it may not be
possible to exactly specify the desired
location. In this case, use either of the
following operations to make fine
adjustments.
- Touch an adjustment area with the sensor
pen to adjust the position in 0.5 mm
increments.
- Adjust the position with the guideline
marker scale shown in step f.
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
Specifying the Needle Drop
Position With the Sensor Pen
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Press
c
Select a stitch pattern.
d
Press
.
f
With the sensor pen, touch the location to
be specified as the needle drop position.
→ The guideline marker moves to the touched position
and flashes.
→ The distance from the left reference line to the
touched position appears in the reference position
setting screen.
→ The stitch preview on the upper left side of the
screen is updated according to the specified setting.
.
a
b
a Press to return the needle drop position to its
default setting.
b Press to stop specifying a setting with the sensor
pen.
Note
• The following error message appears if the
area outside of the sensor pen touch range
is touched. Press
, and then touch
within the sensor pen touch range.
→ The sensor functions screen appears.
e
Press
.
Memo
→ The reference position setting screen appears, and
the red guideline marker flashes at the machine’s
sewing position.
Note
• If
is not available, the sewing
reference position cannot be specified with
the selected stitch pattern. Select a different
stitch pattern.
B-80
• The position can be precisely adjusted by
touching the adjustment areas with the
sensor pen.
• To change the setting, use the sensor pen
to touch the desired location for the
reference position.
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
g
*
Press
setting.
to apply the reference position
d
Press
.
B
The setting can also be applied by long touching an
adjustment area with the sensor pen.
2
→ The needle moves to the specified position to start
sewing.
Sensor Functions
→ The stitch selection screen appears again, and the
stitch width changes to the setting specified with the
sensor pen.
→ The guideline marker stops flashing.
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify
the Stitching Width and Stitch
Position
The zigzag width and “L/R SHIFT” value can be
specified.
a Original stitching width/position
b Adjusted stitching width/position
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Press
c
Select a stitch pattern.
→ The sensor functions screen appears.
e
Press
.
→ The stitching width setting screen appears, and the
guideline marker flashes at the present left side of
the stitch width.
Note
• If
is not available, the stitching width
cannot be specified with the selected stitch
pattern. Select a different stitch pattern.
.
f
With the sensor pen, touch the first point
for the stitching width.
→ The distance from the left reference line to the
touched position appears in the stitching width
setting screen.
→ The guideline marker moves to the touched position
and flashes.
Basic operations B-81
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
Note
• The following error message appears if the
area outside of the sensor pen touch range
is touched. Press
, and then touch
within the sensor pen touch range.
i
*
Press
to apply the second point of the
stitching width.
The setting can also be applied by long touching an
adjustment area with the sensor pen.
→ The needle moves to the specified position to start
sewing.
→ The stitch selection screen appears again, and the
stitch width and “L/R SHIFT” change according to
the settings specified with the sensor pen.
Memo
• The position can be precisely adjusted by
touching the adjustment areas with the
sensor pen.
g
*
h
Press
to apply the first point of the
stitching width.
The setting can also be applied by long touching an
adjustment area with the sensor pen.
With the sensor pen, touch the second
point for the stitching width.
→ The distance from the left reference line to the
touched position appears in the stitching width
setting screen.
→ The stitch preview on the upper left side of the
screen is updated according to the specified setting.
→ The guideline marker moves to the touched position
and flashes.
Note
• If the distance between the specified first
and second points is wider than the
maximum stitch width for the selected stitch
pattern, the second point cannot be
specified. Specify a location closer to the
first point.
• If the distance between the specified first
and second points is narrower than the
minimum stitch width for the selected stitch
pattern, the second point cannot be
specified. Specify a location further away
from the first point.
B-82
Note
• With multiple patterns that have been
combined, the specified stitching width is
applied to the pattern with the largest stitch
width. With patterns other than combined
patterns, the stitch width is adjusted to the
stitching width specified for the pattern with
the largest stitch width.
• With multiple patterns that have been
combined, the settings specified for the
stitch width and “L/R SHIFT” in the stitch
selection screen are for the first pattern to
be sewn. The value may differ from the
stitch width setting.
• With twin needle sewing, the stitching width
is specified with the left needle as the
reference.
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify
the Sewing End Point
g
With the sensor pen, touch the location to
be specified as the sewing end point.
→ The distance from the current needle position to the
touched location appears.
Before start sewing, test the pattern first from steps
a to f to see if the stitch can be used with this
function.
a
b
Press
c
Select a stitch pattern.
d
Start sewing, and then stop the machine
when the desired sewing end point enters
the sensor pen touch range.
e
Press
.
a
b
c
.
a Press to erase the specified sewing end point.
b Press to stop specifying a setting with the sensor
pen.
c Press to select whether or not sewing is ended
with a complete pattern when a decorative stitch
is selected.
d The distance from the current needle position to
the touched location appears.
→ See “Decorative Stitch End Setting Key” on
page B-84.
→ The sensor functions screen appears.
f
Press
.
→ The sewing end point setting screen appears.
Note
• If
is not available, the sewing end
point cannot be specified with the selected
stitch pattern. Select a different stitch
pattern.
Basic operations B-83
2
Sensor Functions
d
Turn on the machine.
B
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
Decorative Stitch End Setting Key
Note
The end of stitching is not adjusted.
When the end point is reached, sewing
stops immediately, even if the stitch
pattern is not complete.
• The displayed distance is not the length of a
straight line connecting the current needle
position and the location touched with the
sensor pen. It is the length of a
perpendicular intersection for the location
touched with the sensor pen and the sewing
line.
The length of the stitch pattern is
adjusted so that sewing will stop at the
specified end point with a complete
pattern.
Note
• The decorative stitch end setting key is not
available with the following situations.
- When selecting the Utility Stitch patterns.
- When the decorative stitch end setting
key is grayed out.
- When specifying the sewing end point at
the point that needs adjustment more
than 10% of the length of a pattern, to
finish a pattern completely.
a Displayed distance
• The following error message appears if the
area outside of the sensor pen touch range
is touched. Press
, and then touch
within the sensor pen touch range.
h
*
Press
setting.
to apply the sewing end point
The setting can also be applied by long touching an
adjustment area with the sensor pen.
→ When a sewing end point setting is specified,
appears in the upper-left corner of the screen.
• When sewing with this setting, be sure to
feed the fabric straight, otherwise the actual
end point may be different from the point
you set.
• When using the sensor pen to specify the
sewing end point, the sewing end point may
be slightly different than the specified
location, depending on where the sewing
machine is stopped in order to specify the
setting.
Note
• If a different pattern is selected after the
sewing end point has been specified, the
end point setting is erased.
i
*
B-84
Start sewing again.
The machine stops at the specified end point
automatically.
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN “EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN
“EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE
Before using the sensor functions, carefully read the procedure in “Embroidery” and “Embroidery Edit” to
familiarize yourself with the machine operations.
Press
.
By using the sensor pen, the embroidering position
can be adjusted to the desired location. This
function can be performed in either “Embroidery”
or “Embroidery Edit” mode, but the procedure
described below is performed in “Embroidery”
mode.
If the message “The carriage of the embroidery
unit will move. Keep your hands etc. away from
the carriage.” appears during the operation, ensure
safety, and then press
.
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Press
c
Select the category for the pattern to be
embroidered.
d
In the pattern selection screen, press the
key for the pattern to be embroidered.
e
Press
f
Hoop the fabric and attach the embroidery
frame to the machine.
.
→ When the extra large embroidery frame H 300 mm
× W 180 mm (H 12 inches × W 7 inches) is used,
the following message appears. Select the desired
area and press
2
Sensor Functions
Specifying the Embroidering
Position With the Sensor Pen
g
B
.
.
→ Refer to “Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery
Frame” on page E-13 and “ATTACHING THE
EMBROIDERY FRAME” on page E-17.
Basic operations B-85
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN “EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE
h
Press
c
.
With the sensor pen, touch the point on the
fabric corresponding to corner a in the
screen.
→ The embroidering position selection screen appears.
i
*
Select the method for positioning the
embroidery pattern.
To align the edge of the embroidery with a pattern
or mark on the fabric, select the edge. If the center of
the pattern to be embroidered is determined, select
the center position.
a Square of pattern edge
b Pattern position
d
With the sensor pen, touch the point on the
fabric corresponding to corner b in the
screen.
■ Selecting the Embroidering Position
by the Pattern Edge
a
From
on the screen, press the edge
to be the reference for positioning.
b
Press
.
a Square of pattern edge
b Pattern position
e
Press
to adjust the positions.
→ If you don’t need to adjust the positions, continue to
step i.
B-86
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN “EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE
f
Press
to move the LED pointer
■ Selecting the Embroidering Position
by the Pattern Center
on the fabric for adjusting the first position.
a
Press
g
Press
b
With the sensor pen, touch 2 points on the
fabric corresponding to the numbers in the
center of the embroidery pattern.
h
Press
in the following screen.
B
2
Sensor Functions
to apply the setting.
to move the LED pointer
on the fabric for adjusting the second
position.
i
Press
to apply the setting.
The preview in the sewing screen is updated
j
according to the specified embroidering
position.
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
k
embroidering.
a Center line of the pattern
b Pattern position
→ Specified point number turns into red.
c
Press
to adjust the positions.
→ If you don’t need to adjust the positions, continue to
step g.
Basic operations B-87
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN “EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE
d
Press
to move the LED pointer
on the fabric for adjusting the first position.
e
Press
f
Press
to apply the setting.
to move the LED pointer
on the fabric for adjusting the second
position.
g
Press
h
The preview in the sewing screen is updated
according to the specified embroidering
position.
i
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
embroidering.
to apply the setting.
Note
• When using the sensor pen to specify the
embroidering position, it may not be
possible to exactly specify the desired
location. In this case, move the embroidery
frame to align the center of the pattern with
the location indicated by the LED pointer.
B-88
Sewing
This section describes procedures for using the various utility stitches as well as other functions. It
provides details on basic sewing in addition to the more expressive features of the machine, from sewing
tubular pieces and buttonholes to sewing the character and decorative stitch patterns.
Page number starts with “S” in this section.
The screen display and machine illustration may vary slightly, depending on the countries or regions.
Chapter1 Sewing Basics.......................................................... S-2
Chapter2 Utility Stitches ...................................................... S-20
Chapter3 Character/Decorative Stitches .............................. S-76
Chapter4 How to Create Bobbin Work (Sewing)................ S-104
S Sewing
Chapter
1
Sewing Basics
SEWING..................................................................... 3
Sewing a Stitch ...........................................................................3
■ Using the Foot Controller .......................................................... 4
Sewing Reinforcement Stitches ...................................................5
Automatic Reinforcement Stitching ...........................................5
Sewing Curves ............................................................................7
Changing Sewing Direction .......................................................7
■ Sewing a Seam Allowance of 0.5 cm or Less .............................. 7
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics ......................................................7
■ If the Fabric does not Fit under the Presser Foot........................ 8
■ If the Fabric does not Feed......................................................... 8
Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener ................................................8
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics ........................................................9
Sewing Stretch Fabrics................................................................9
STITCH SETTINGS ................................................... 10
Setting the Stitch Width............................................................10
Setting the Stitch Length ..........................................................10
Setting the “L/R SHIFT” ............................................................11
Setting the Thread Tension ......................................................12
■ Proper Thread Tension ........................................................... 12
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight ....................................................... 12
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose ...................................................... 12
USEFUL FUNCTIONS .............................................. 13
Automatic Thread Cutting ........................................................13
Adjusting the Needle Drop Position with the Guideline Marker
(For models equipped with the guideline marker) ....................14
■ Adjusting the Guideline Marker Position.................................. 14
■ Adjusting the Brightness of the Guideline Marker.................... 14
Using the Knee Lifter ................................................................15
Pivoting.....................................................................................15
Automatic Fabric Sensor System
(Automatic Presser Foot Pressure) ............................................17
Needle Position – Stitch Placement ..........................................18
Locking the Screen ...................................................................18
SEWING
SEWING
S
CAUTION
Sewing a Stitch
a
d
Turn the main power to ON and display the
Set the fabric under the presser foot. Hold
the fabric and thread in your left hand, and
rotate the handwheel to set the needle in
the sewing start position.
utility stitches, and push the “Needle
Position” button to raise the needle.
b
Press the key of the stitch you want to sew.
Memo
• The black button on the left side of presser
foot “J” should be pressed only if the fabric
does not feed or when sewing thick seams
(see page S-8). Normally, you can sew
without pressing the black button.
→ The symbol of the correct presser foot will be
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD screen.
c
Install the presser foot (“CHANGING THE
PRESSER FOOT” of “Basic operations”).
e
*
f
*
CAUTION
• Always use the correct presser foot. If the
wrong presser foot is used, the needle may
strike the presser foot and bend or break,
possibly resulting in injury.
Refer to page S-68 for presser foot
recommendations.
Lower the presser foot.
You do not have to pull up the bobbin thread.
Adjust the sewing speed with the speed
control slide.
You can use this slide to adjust sewing speed during
sewing.
a Slow
b Fast
Sewing S-3
Sewing Basics
• To avoid injury, pay special attention to the needle while the machine is in operation. Keep your hands
away from moving parts while the machine is in operation.
• Do not stretch or pull the fabric during sewing. Doing so may lead to injury.
• Do not use bent or broken needles. Doing so may lead to injury.
• Do not attempt to sew over basting pins or other objects during sewing. Otherwise, the needle may break
and cause injury.
• If stitches become bunched, lengthen the stitch length setting before continuing sewing. Otherwise, the
needle may break and cause injury.
1
SEWING
g
*
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
sewing.
Guide the fabric lightly by hand.
j
Memo
• When the foot controller is being used, you
cannot start sewing by pressing the
“Start/Stop” button.
h
Note
• When cutting thread thicker than #30, nylon
monofilament thread, or other decorative
threads, use the thread cutter on the side of
the machine.
Press the “Start/Stop” button again to stop
sewing.
When the needle has stopped moving, raise
the presser foot and remove the fabric.
Memo
• This machine is equipped with a bobbin
thread sensor that warns you when the
bobbin thread is almost empty. When the
bobbin thread is nearly empty, the machine
automatically stops. However, if the
“Start/Stop” button is pressed, a few
stitches can be sewn. When the warning
displays, re-thread the machine
immediately.
■ Using the Foot Controller
You can also use the foot controller to start and stop
sewing.
i
Press the “Thread Cutter” button to trim
the upper and lower threads.
CAUTION
• Do not allow fabric pieces and dust to collect
in the foot controller. Doing so could cause a
fire or an electric shock.
Memo
→ The needle will return to the up position
automatically.
CAUTION
• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button after
the threads have been cut. Doing so could
tangle the thread or break the needle and
damage the machine.
• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button when
there is no fabric set in the machine or during
machine operation. The thread may tangle,
possibly resulting in damage.
S-4
• When the foot controller is being used, you
cannot start sewing by pressing the
“Start/Stop” button.
(For embroidery and sewing machine only)
• The foot controller cannot be used when
embroidering.
• The foot controller can be used for sewing
utility and decorative stitches when the
embroidery unit is attached.
SEWING
a
Insert the foot controller plug into its jack
on the machine.
If the automatic reinforcement stitch is selected on
the screen, reverse stitches (or reinforcement
stitches) will be sewn automatically at the
beginning of sewing when the “Start/Stop” button
is pressed. Press the “Reverse Stitch” button or
“Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew reverse
stitches or reinforcement stitches automatically at
the end of sewing.
Slowly depress the foot controller to start
sewing.
a Reverse stitch
b Reinforcement stitch
Memo
The operation performed when the button is
pressed differs depending on the selected pattern.
(Refer to the table in “Automatic Reinforcement
Stitching” on page S-5.)
• The speed that is set using the sewing
speed controller is the foot controller’s
maximum sewing speed.
c
Memo
• When you press the “Reinforcement Stitch”
button while sewing character/decorative
stitch pattern, you can end sewing with a
full stitch instead of at a mid-point.
• The green light on the right of the
“Reinforcement Stitch” button lights up
while the machine is sewing a full motif, and
it automatically turns off when the sewing is
stopped.
Release the foot controller to stop the
machine.
Sewing Reinforcement Stitches
Reverse/reinforcement stitches are generally
necessary at the beginning and end of sewing. You
can use the “Reverse Stitch” button to sew
reverse/reinforcement stitches.
When you keep pressing the “Reinforcement
Stitch” button, the machine will sew reinforcement
stitch at that point 3 to 5 stitches, and then stop.
a “Reverse Stitch” button
b “Reinforcement Stitch” button
1
Sewing Basics
a Foot controller
b Foot controller jack
b
S
Automatic Reinforcement
Stitching
After selecting a stitch pattern, turn on the
automatic reinforcement stitching function before
sewing, and the machine will automatically sew
reinforcement stitches (or reverse stitches,
depending on the stitch pattern) at the beginning
and end of sewing.
a
Select a stitch pattern.
Sewing S-5
SEWING
b
Press
to set the automatic
reinforcement stitching function.
d
Press the “Reverse Stitch” button or
“Reinforcement Stitch” button.
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
→ The machine will sew reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) and stop.
Memo
• To turn off the automatic reinforcement
stitching function, press
appears as
→ The key will display as
• Some stitches, such as buttonholes and bar
tacks, require reinforcement stitches at the
beginning of sewing. If you select one of
these stitches, the machine will
automatically turn on this function (the key
c
The operation performed when the button is
pressed differs depending on the selected pattern.
Refer to the following table for details on the
operation that is performed when the button is
pressed.
“Reverse Stitch”
when the stitch is
Set the fabric in the start position and start
sewing.
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
→ The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue
sewing.
Memo
• If you press the “Start/Stop” button to
pause sewing, press it again to continue.
The machine will not sew
reverse/reinforcement stitches again.
S-6
.
.
Memo
appears as
selected).
again, so it
button
“Reinforcement
Stitch” button
+
Machine starts
sewing the stitches
and only sews reverse
stitches while holding
the “Reverse Stitch”
button.
Machine starts
sewing the stitches
and sews 3 - 5
reinforcement
stitches while holding
the “Reinforcement
Stitch” button.
+
Machine starts
sewing the stitches
and only sews reverse
stitches while holding
the “Reverse Stitch”
button.
Machine starts
sewing the stitches
and sews 3 - 5
reinforcement
stitches while holding
the “Reinforcement
Stitch” button.
+
Machine sews
reverse stitches at the
beginning and end of
sewing.
Machine sews
reverse stitches at the
beginning and
reinforcement
stitches at the end of
sewing.
+
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches at the
beginning and reverse
stitches at the end of
sewing.
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches at the
beginning and end of
sewing.
SEWING
“Reverse Stitch”
button
“Reinforcement
Stitch” button
Machine starts
sewing at the
beginning, then
completes the pattern
and sews
reinforcement
stitches at the end of
sewing.
+
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches at the
beginning and sews
reinforcement
stitches when the
“Reverse Stitch”
button is touched.
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches at the
beginning, then
completes the pattern
and sews
reinforcement
stitches at the end of
sewing.
Sewing Curves
Sew slowly while keeping the seam parallel with
the fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the
curve.
Changing Sewing Direction
Stop the machine. Leave the needle in the fabric,
and press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to raise
the presser foot. Using the needle as a pivot, turn
the fabric so that you can sew in the new
direction. Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower the presser foot and start sewing.
Baste the corner before sewing, and then, after
changing the sewing direction at the corner, pull the
basting thread toward the back while sewing.
S
1
Sewing Basics
+
Machine starts
sewing and then sews
reinforcement
stitches while holding
the “Reverse Stitch”
button.
■ Sewing a Seam Allowance of 0.5 cm
or Less
a 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics
The sewing machine can sew fabrics up to 6 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch) thick. If the thickness of a seam
causes sewing to occur at an angle, help guide the
fabric by hand and sew on the downward slope.
CAUTION
• Do not forcefully push fabrics more than
6 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) thick through the
sewing machine. This may cause the needle to
break and cause injury.
• Thicker fabrics require a larger needle
(“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” of “Basic
operations”).
The pivot setting is useful when changing the
sewing direction. When the machine is stopped at
the corner of the fabric, the machine stops with the
needle in the fabric and the presser foot is
automatically raised so the fabric can easily be
rotated (“Pivoting” on page S-15).
Sewing S-7
SEWING
■ If the Fabric does not Fit under the
Presser Foot
c
Release the black button.
If the presser foot is in the up position, and you are
sewing heavyweight or multiple layers of fabric
which do not fit easily under the presser foot, use
the presser foot lever to raise the presser foot to its
highest position. The fabric will now fit under the
presser foot.
→ The presser foot remains level, enabling the fabric to
be fed.
Memo
Memo
• You cannot use the presser foot lever after
the presser foot has been raised using the
“Presser Foot Lifter” button.
• Once the trouble spot has been passed, the
foot will return to its normal position.
• When “Automatic Fabric Sensor System”
(Automatic Presser Foot Pressure) in the
machine settings screen is set to “ON”, the
thickness of the fabric is automatically
detected by the internal sensor so the fabric
can be fed smoothly for best sewing results.
(see page S-17 for details.)
Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener
■ If the Fabric does not Feed
If the fabric does not feed when starting to sew or
when sewing thick seams, press the black button on
the left side of presser foot “J”.
a
Raise the presser foot.
b
While keeping the black button on the left
side of presser foot “J” pressed in, press the
“Presser Foot Lifter” button to lower the
presser foot.
CAUTION
• Do not use adhesive backed hook-and-loop
fastener designed for sewing. If the adhesive
sticks to the needle or the bobbin hook race, it
may cause malfunction.
• If the hook-and-loop fastener is sewn with a
fine needle (65/9-75/11), the needle may bend
or break.
Note
• Before starting to sew, baste the fabric and
hook-and-loop fastener together.
Make sure that the needle passes through the
hook-and-loop fastener by rotating the handwheel
and lower the needle into the hook-and-loop
fastener before sewing. Sew the edge of the
hook-and-loop fastener at a slow speed.
If the needle does not pass through the
hook-and-loop fastener, replace the needle with
the needle for thick fabrics (“Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” of “Basic operations”).
a Edge of the hook-and-loop fastener
S-8
SEWING
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics
S
Place thin paper or tear away embroidery
stabilizer under thin fabrics to make sewing easier.
Gently tear off the paper or the stabilizer after
sewing.
1
Sewing Basics
a Thin paper
Sewing Stretch Fabrics
First, baste together the pieces of fabric, and then
sew without stretching the fabric.
In addition, a better result can be achieved by
using thread for knits or a stretch stitch.
Memo
• For best results when sewing stretch
fabrics, decrease the pressure of the
presser foot (“Using the Machine Setting
Mode Key” of “Basic operations”).
a Basting stitching
Sewing S-9
STITCH SETTINGS
STITCH SETTINGS
When you select a stitch, your machine automatically selects the appropriate stitch width, stitch length,
“L/R SHIFT”, and upper thread tension. However, if needed, you can change any of the individual
settings.
Note
• Settings for some stitches cannot be changed (refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68).
• If you turn off the machine or select another stitch without saving stitch setting changes (“Saving Your
Stitch Settings” on page S-22), the stitch settings will return to their default settings.
Setting the Stitch Width
Press
to widen the zigzag stitch pattern width.
Follow the steps below when you want to change
the zigzag stitch pattern width.
Memo
• For an alternate method of changing the
stitch width using the speed controller, see
page S-39.
Example:
Press
width.
→ The value in the display gets bigger.
Memo
to narrow the zigzag stitch pattern
• Press
after pressing
original setting.
to return to the
Note
• After adjusting the stitch width, slowly
rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) and check that the
needle does not touch the presser foot. If
the needle hits the presser foot, the needle
may bend or break.
Setting the Stitch Length
→ The value in the display gets smaller.
S-10
Follow the steps below when you want to change
the stitch pattern length.
STITCH SETTINGS
Example:
Press
to shorten the stitch length.
Setting the “L/R SHIFT”
Follow the steps below when you want to change
the placement of the zigzag stitch pattern by
moving it left and right.
to shift the pattern to the left.
→ The value in the display gets smaller.
Press
to lengthen the stitch length.
→ The value in the display appears with a minus sign.
Press
to shift the pattern to the right side of the
left needle position.
→ The value in the display gets bigger.
Memo
• Press
stitch.
to check changes made to the
• Press
after pressing
original setting.
to return to the
CAUTION
• If the stitches get bunched together, lengthen
the stitch length and continue sewing. Do not
continue sewing without lengthening the stitch
length. Otherwise, the needle may break and
cause injury.
1
Sewing Basics
Example:
Press
S
→ The value in the display appears with a plus sign.
Memo
• Press
after pressing
original setting.
to return to the
Note
• After adjusting the “L/R SHIFT”, slowly
rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) and check that the
needle does not touch the presser foot. If
the needle hits the presser foot, the needle
may bend or break.
Sewing S-11
STITCH SETTINGS
Setting the Thread Tension
You may need to change the thread tension,
depending on the fabric and thread being used.
Follow the steps below to make any necessary
changes.
Press
, to loosen the upper thread.
Memo
• When you finish sewing, remove the bobbin
cover and then make sure that the thread is
shown as below. If the thread is not shown
as below, the thread is not inserted through
the tension-adjusting spring of the bobbin
case correctly. Reinsert the thread
correctly. For details, refer to “Setting the
Bobbin” of “Basic operations”.
■ Proper Thread Tension
The upper thread and the bobbin thread should
cross near the center of the fabric. Only the upper
thread should be visible from the right side of the
fabric, and only the bobbin thread should be visible
from the wrong side of the fabric.
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose
If the upper thread is visible from the wrong side of
the fabric, the upper thread is too loose.
Note
a
b
c
d
• If the upper thread was incorrectly
threaded, the upper thread may appear to
be too loose. In this case, refer to “Upper
Threading” of “Basic operations” and
rethread the upper thread.
Wrong side
Surface
Upper thread
Bobbin thread
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight
If the bobbin thread is visible on the right side of the
fabric, the upper thread is too tight.
Note
• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly
threaded, the upper thread may appear to
be too tight. In this case, refer to “Setting
the Bobbin” of “Basic operations” and
rethread the bobbin thread.
a
b
c
d
Upper thread
Bobbin thread
Wrong side
Locks appear on wrong side of fabric
Press
, to tighten the upper thread.
Memo
• Press
after pressing
original setting.
a
b
c
d
S-12
Bobbin thread
Upper thread
Surface
Locks appear on surface of fabric
to return to the
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Automatic Thread Cutting
Set the fabric in the start position and start
c
sewing.
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Press
to set the automatic thread
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
→ The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue
sewing.
cutting function.
Memo
• If you press the “Start/Stop” button to
pause sewing, press the same button again
to continue. The beginning
reverse/reinforcement stitches will not be
sewn again.
d
→ The key will display as
.
1
Sewing Basics
After selecting a stitch pattern, turn on the
automatic thread cutting function before sewing,
and the machine will automatically sew
reinforcement stitches (or reverse stitches,
depending on the stitch pattern) at the beginning
and end of sewing, and trim the threads at the end
of sewing. This function is useful when sewing
buttonholes and bar tacks.
S
Press the “Reverse Stitch” button or
“Reinforcement Stitch” button.
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
→ The machine will sew reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches), then trim the thread.
Memo
• To turn off the automatic thread cutting
function, press
as
again, so it appears
.
Sewing S-13
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Adjusting the Needle Drop
Position with the Guideline
Marker (For models equipped
with the guideline marker)
The red guideline marker indicates the sewing
position on the fabric.
You can adjust the sewing position by moving the
guideline marker while checking the guideline
marker on the fabric.
CAUTION
c
Press
again to stop using the guideline
marker.
■ Adjusting the Guideline Marker
Position
If the guideline marker indicates the position
incorrectly in the center needle position, adjust the
initial position in the settings screen.
a
Press
to display “Guideline Marker
Adjustment” in the settings screen.
b
Display settings screen.
c
Press
• The guideline marker is a laser; therefore, do
not stare at the laser light directly. Otherwise
it may cause blindness.
a
Press
to display the guideline marker.
.
→ The “Guideline Marker Adjustment” screen appears.
d
Use
or
to adjust the guideline
marker position.
a
→ The guideline marker scale appears.
* Depending on the setting of “Initial Position” in the
settings screen, the initial needle drop position is
scaled as either 0.0 mm or 3.5 mm.
b
a Press to move the guideline marker to the left
b Press to move the guideline marker to the right
e
Press
twice to return to the original
screen.
Use
or
to move the needle drop
position.
→ Adjust the position from 10.5 mm (3/8 inch) to the
right of the left needle to -3.5 mm (-1/8 inch) to the
left of the left needle.
S-14
b
■ Adjusting the Brightness of the
Guideline Marker
a
Follow steps from a to c to display the
“Guideline Marker Adjustment” screen.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
b
Use
or
to adjust the brightness of
the guideline marker.
→ Set the brightness of the guideline marker from “1”
for a dim marker, to “5” for the brightest marker, on
the fabric.
b
Use your knee to move the knee lifter bar to
the right in order to raise the presser foot.
Release the knee lifter to lower the presser
foot.
S
1
Sewing Basics
c
Press
twice to return to the original
CAUTION
screen.
Using the Knee Lifter
Using the knee lifter, you can raise and lower the
presser foot with your knee, leaving both hands
free to handle the fabric.
Align the tabs on the knee lifter with the
a
notches in the knee lifter slot on the front of
the machine. Insert the knee lifter bar as far
as possible.
• Be sure to keep your knee away from the knee
lifter during sewing. If the knee lifter is pushed
during machine operation, the needle may
break or the thread tension may loosen.
Memo
• When the presser foot is in the up position,
move the knee lifter to the far right and then
release to return the presser foot to the
down position.
Pivoting
CAUTION
• Only change position of the knee lifter handle
when knee lifter is not on the machine,
otherwise the presser foot will go up, and then
the knee lifter may damage the mounting slot
on front of the machine.
Note
If the pivot setting is selected, the machine stops
with the needle lowered (in the fabric) and the
presser foot is automatically raised to an
appropriate height when the “Start/Stop” button is
pressed. When the “Start/Stop” button is pressed
again, the presser foot is automatically lowered
and sewing continues. This function is useful for
stopping the machine to rotate the fabric.
CAUTION
• When the pivot setting is selected, the
machine starts when the “Start/Stop” button is
pressed or the foot controller is pressed down
even if the presser foot has been raised. Be
sure to keep your hands and other items away
from the needle, otherwise injuries may occur.
• If the knee lifter bar is not pushed into the
mounting slot as far as possible, it may
come out during use.
Sewing S-15
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Memo
• When the pivot setting is selected, the
height of the presser foot when sewing is
stopped can be changed according to the
type of fabric being sewn. Press
to
display “Pivoting Height” in the settings
screen. Press
or
a
Select a stitch.
b
Press
to select the pivot setting.
to select one of
the three heights (3.2 mm, 5.0 mm or 7.5
mm). To raise the presser foot further,
increase the setting. (Normally, 3.2 mm is
set.)
Note
• The “Needle Position - UP/DOWN” in the
settings screen, must be set in the down
position
for the pivot function to be
used. When “Needle Position - UP/DOWN”
is set in the raised position,
appears
as light gray and cannot be used.
• The pivot function can only be used with
stitches where presser foot J or N is
indicated in the upper-left corner of the
→ The key appears as
c
.
Place the fabric under the presser foot with
the needle at the starting point of the
stitching, and then press the “Start/Stop”
button. The machine will begin sewing.
screen. If any other stitch is selected,
appears as light gray and is not available.
• Use the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
make sure the presser foot is lowered, and
then press the “Start/Stop” button to
continue sewing.
• If the pivot setting is selected,
and
beside “Presser Foot Height” in the settings
screen are not available and the setting
cannot be changed.
S-16
Memo
• If you press the “Start/Stop” button to
pause sewing, press it again to continue,
reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
will not be sewn.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the
machine at the point where the sewing
direction changes.
e
The thickness of the fabric is automatically
detected and the presser foot pressure is
automatically adjusted with an internal sensor
while sewing, to insure that your fabric is fed
smoothly. The fabric sensor system works
continuously while sewing. This function is useful
for sewing over thick seams (see page S-8), or
quilting (see page S-35).
Rotate the fabric, and then press the
“Start/Stop” button.
→ The presser foot is automatically lowered, and
sewing continues.
a
Press
to display “Automatic Fabric
Sensor System” in the settings screen.
b
Set “Automatic Fabric Sensor System” to
“ON”.
c
Press
to return to the original screen.
Sewing S-17
S
1
Sewing Basics
→ The machine stops with the needle in the fabric, and
the presser foot is raised.
Automatic Fabric Sensor System
(Automatic Presser Foot
Pressure)
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Needle Position – Stitch
Placement
When the “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” is
on, the needle will be partially lowered for precise
stitch placement and then press the “Needle
Position” button again to lower the needle
completely. Each press of the “Needle Position”
button changes the needle to the next position.
When the “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” is
turned off, each press of the “Needle Position”
button simply raises and then lowers the needle.
a Pointing needle mode is “ON”
b Pointing needle mode is “OFF”
Locking the Screen
If the screen is locked before starting to sew, the
various settings such as the stitch width and stitch
length are locked and cannot be changed. This
prevents screen settings from accidentally being
changed or the machine from being stopped while
large pieces of fabric or projects are being sewn.
The screen can be locked when sewing utility
stitches and character decorative stitches.
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
If necessary, adjust any settings such as the
stitch width and stitch length.
c
Press
to lock the screen settings.
→ The key appears as
*
When the needle is nearly lowered by pressing the
“Needle Position” button, the feed dogs are
lowered. At this time, the fabric can be shifted to
finely adjust the needle drop position.
.
d
Sew your project.
e
When you are finished sewing, press
again to unlock the screen settings.
CAUTION
• If the screen is locked (
screen by pressing
a
Press
to display “Needle Position –
Stitch Placement” in the settings screen.
b
Set “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” to
“ON” or “OFF”.
c
Press
S-18
to return to the original screen.
), unlock the
. While the screen is
locked, no other key can be operated.
• The settings are unlocked when the machine is
turned off and on.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
S
1
Sewing Basics
Sewing S-19
S Sewing
Chapter
2
Utility Stitches
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES ............................... 21
Selecting a Stitch ......................................................................21
■ Using the Mirror Image Key .................................................... 21
■ Using the Image Key ................................................................ 22
Saving Your Stitch Settings ......................................................22
■ Saving Settings ......................................................................... 22
■ Retrieving Saved Settings ......................................................... 23
SEWING THE STITCHES .......................................... 24
Straight Stitches ........................................................................24
■ Changing the Needle Position (Left or Middle Needle Position
Stitches Only) ......................................................................... 25
■ Aligning the Fabric with a Mark on the Needle Plate or Bobbin
Cover (with Mark).................................................................... 26
■ Using the Straight Stitch Needle Plate and the Straight
Stitch Foot................................................................................ 26
■ Basting ..................................................................................... 28
Dart Seam .................................................................................28
Gathering..................................................................................29
Flat Fell Seam............................................................................29
Pintuck......................................................................................30
Zigzag Stitches .........................................................................31
■
■
■
■
■
Overcasting (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ........................................ 31
Appliqué (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ............................................. 31
Patchwork (for Crazy Quilt) .................................................... 32
Sewing Curves (Using a Zigzag Stitch) .................................... 32
Cord Guide Bobbin Cover (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ................... 32
Elastic Zigzag Stitches ..............................................................33
■ Tape Attaching ........................................................................ 33
■ Overcasting ............................................................................. 33
Overcasting .............................................................................33
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “G” ....................................... 33
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “J” ......................................... 34
Quilting ...................................................................................35
■ Piecing .................................................................................... 36
■ Piecing Using the 1/4" Quilting Foot with Guide
(optional with some models) .................................................... 37
■ Appliqué ................................................................................. 38
■ Quilting with Satin Stitches ..................................................... 39
■ Free Motion Quilting ............................................................... 40
■ Echo Quilting Using the Free Motion Echo Quilting Foot “E”
(optional with some models) .................................................... 43
Blind Hem Stitches ..................................................................45
■ If the Needle Catches Too Much of the Hem Fold ................... 47
■ If the Needle does not Catch the Hem Fold ............................. 47
Appliqué ..................................................................................48
■ Appliqué Sharp Curves ............................................................ 48
■ Appliqué Corners ..................................................................... 49
Shelltuck Stitches .....................................................................49
Scallop Stitches ........................................................................50
Crazy Quilting ..........................................................................50
Smocking Stitches ....................................................................51
Fagoting ...................................................................................52
Tape or Elastic Attaching .........................................................52
Heirloom .................................................................................53
■ Hemstitching (1) ...................................................................... 53
■ Hemstitching (2) (Drawn Work (1)) ......................................... 54
■ Hemstitching (3) (Drawn Work (2)) ......................................... 54
One-step Buttonholes ..............................................................55
■ Sewing Stretch Fabrics ............................................................ 57
■ Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that do Not Fit into the Button
Holder Plate ............................................................................ 58
Darning .................................................................................... 58
Bar Tacks ................................................................................. 59
■ Bar Tacks on Thick Fabrics .......................................................61
Button Sewing ......................................................................... 61
■ Attaching 4 Hole Buttons..........................................................62
■ Attaching a Shank to the Button ..............................................62
Eyelet ...................................................................................... 62
Multi-directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch) ... 63
Zipper Insertion ...................................................................... 64
■ Centered Zipper .......................................................................64
■ Inserting a Side Zipper .............................................................65
STITCH SETTING CHART ........................................ 68
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
■ Using the Mirror Image Key
Selecting a Stitch
There are 5 categories of Utility Stitches.
a
Turn the main power to ON and display the
If
utility stitches.
possible to make a mirror image of the stitch.
→ Either “1-01 Straight stitch (Left)” or “1-03 Straight
stitch (Middle)” is selected, depending on the setting
selected in the settings screen.
b
Use
is lit when you select a stitch, it will be
Note
• If
you cannot create a horizontal mirror image
of the selected stitch due to the type of
stitch or type of presser foot recommended
(this is true of buttonholes, multi-directional
sewing, and others).
to select the
category you want.
*
Press
to view the next page.
*
Press
to view previous page.
is light gray after you select a stitch,
Press
to create a horizontal mirror image of the
selected stitch.
The key will display as
.
a
b
c
a Preview of the selected stitch
b Stitch selection screen
c Percentage size of view
c
Press the key of the stitch you want to sew.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68.
Sewing S-21
2
Utility Stitches
Depending on the type of utility stitch you select,
you may be able to sew a horizontal mirror image of
the stitch.
S
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
■ Using the Image Key
You can display an image of the selected stitch. You
can check and change the colors of the image of the
screen.
a
Press
b
Press
.
→ An image of the selected stitch is displayed.
to change the thread color of
the stitch on the screen.
*
Press
stitch.
to display an enlarged image of the
Saving Your Stitch Settings
The settings for the zigzag stitch width, stitch
length, thread tension, automatic thread cutting,
automatic reinforcement stitching, etc., are preset
in the machine for each stitch. However, if you
have specific settings that you wish to reuse later
for a stitch, you can change the settings so that
they can be saved for that stitch. Five sets of
settings can be saved for a single stitch.
■ Saving Settings
a
Select a stitch. (Example:
b
Specify your preferred settings.
c
Press
)
a
a Stitch screen
Memo
• The color changes every time you press
.
.
→ The memory function screen appears.
Note
• If stitches are wider or larger than display,
press darkened arrows to move the stitch
pattern for better visibility.
c
Press
d
Press
.
to return to the original screen.
→ The settings are saved. Touch
and the
original screen automatically appears.
Memo
• If you try to save settings when there are
already 5 sets of settings saved for a stitch,
the message “The pockets are full. Delete a
pattern.” will appear. Close the message
and delete a setting referring to page S-23.
S-22
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
■ Retrieving Saved Settings
a
Select a stitch.
Memo
b
Press
.
• To save new settings when there are
already 5 sets of settings saved for a stitch,
press
in the memory function screen.
Press the numbered key of the setting to be
deleted. Press
and then
. Press
,
, and then
. The new
setting will be saved in place of the recently
deleted setting.
• You can delete all the saved settings by
pressing
.
→ The memory function screen appears.
c
Press
d
Press the numbered key of the settings to be
retrieved.
*
.
Press
to return to the original screen without
retrieving settings.
a
a Numbered keys
e
Press
.
→ The selected settings are retrieved. Touch
and the original screen automatically appears.
Sewing S-23
S
2
Utility Stitches
• When a stitch is selected, the last settings
retrieved are displayed. The last settings
retrieved are retained even if the machine
was turned off or a different stitch was
selected.
Memo
SEWING THE STITCHES
SEWING THE STITCHES
Straight Stitches
Memo
• Refer to “Sewing Reinforcement
Stitches” on page S-5 for the detailed
information of reverse stitches and
reinforcement stitches.
See page S-68 for the detailed information of
stitches.
Stitch
Stitch name
Straight stitch (Left)
Presser foot
a
Select a stitch.
b
Attach presser foot “J”.
Straight stitch (Left)
Straight stitch (Middle)
Straight stitch (Middle)
Triple stretch stitch
Stem stitch
*
Decorative stitch
c
Basting stitch
a Left needle position
b Middle needle position
Attach presser foot “N” when you select
.
Hold the thread tail and fabric with your
left hand, and rotate the handwheel with
your right hand to insert the needle into the
fabric.
a Sewing start position
d
Lower the presser foot, and hold the
“Reverse Stitch” or “Reinforcement Stitch”
button to sew 3-4 stitches.
→ The machine sews reverse stitches (or reinforcement
stitches).
a Reverse stitch
b Reinforcement stitch
S-24
SEWING THE STITCHES
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to sew
forward.
■ Changing the Needle Position (Left
or Middle Needle Position Stitches
Only)
When you select left or middle needle position
stitches, you can use
and
in the stitch
a Reverse stitches
→ The machine will begin sewing slowly.
CAUTION
• Be sure the needle does not strike a basting
pin, or any other objects, during sewing. The
thread could tangle or the needle could break,
causing injury.
f
When sewing is completed, hold the
“Reverse Stitch” or “Reinforcement Stitch”
button to sew 3-4 reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) at the end of the
seam.
g
After sewing, press the “Thread Cutter”
button to trim the threads.
a Stitch width
Example: Left/Middle needle position stitches
12.0 mm
(approx.
1/2 inch)
8.5 mm
(approx.
11/32
inch)
6.5 mm
(approx.
1/4 inch)
5.0 mm
(approx.
3/16 inch)
Memo
• When the automatic thread cutting and
automatic reinforcement stitch keys on the
screen are selected, reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) will be sewn
automatically at the beginning of sewing
when the “Start/Stop” button is pressed.
Press the “Reverse Stitch” or
“Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew
reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
and trim the thread automatically at the end
of sewing.
Sewing S-25
2
Utility Stitches
width display to change the position of the needle.
Match the distance from the right edge of the presser
foot to the needle with the stitch width, then align
the edge of the presser foot with the edge of the
fabric during sewing for an attractive finish.
S
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Aligning the Fabric with a Mark on
the Needle Plate or Bobbin Cover
(with Mark)
While sewing, align the edge of the fabric with the
16 mm (approx. 5/8 inch) mark on the needle plate
or bobbin cover (with mark) depending on the
needle position (left or middle (center) needle
position stitches only).
For stitches with a left needle position
(Stitch width: 0.0 mm)
■ Using the Straight Stitch Needle
Plate and the Straight Stitch Foot
The straight stitch needle plate and the straight stitch
foot can only be used for straight stitches (middle
needle position stitches). Use the straight stitch
needle plate and the straight stitch foot when sewing
thin fabrics or when sewing small pieces which tend
to sink into the hole of the regular needle plate
during sewing. The straight stitch foot is perfect to
reduce puckering on lightweight fabrics. The small
opening on the foot provides support for the fabric
as the needle travels through the fabric.
a
b
c
d
a
b
c
d
e
f
Seam
Presser foot
Centimeters
Inches
Needle plate
16 mm (5/8 inch)
For stitches with a middle (center) needle position
(Stitch width: 3.5 mm)
a
b
c
d
e
S-26
Seam
Presser foot
Inches
Bobbin cover (with mark)
16 mm (5/8 inch)
2.25 mm (1/8 inch)
4.25 mm (3/16 inch)
6.25 mm (1/4 inch)
8.5 mm (5/16 inch)
CAUTION
• Always use the straight stitch foot in
combination with the straight stitch needle
plate.
a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle and turn the main power to OFF
or press
.
b
Remove the needle and the presser foot
holder (“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” of
“Basic operations”).
c
Remove the flat bed attachment.
d
Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover,
and then slide it toward you.
a Needle plate cover
SEWING THE STITCHES
e
Grasp the bobbin case, and then pull it out.
h
f
After reinstalling the needle plate cover,
select any of the straight stitches.
2
Memo
• When using the straight stitch needle plate,
all straight stitches become middle needle
position stitches. You cannot change the
needle position using the width display.
• Always secure the needle plate before
inserting the bobbin case into its original
position.
• “L/R SHIFT” does not work when straight
stitch needle plate is on the machine.
a Bobbin case
Use the disc-shaped screwdriver included
with the machine to unscrew and remove
the regular needle plate.
CAUTION
g
Set the straight stitch needle plate in place
and use the disc-shaped screwdriver to
tighten the plate.
• Selecting other stitches will cause an error
message to be displayed.
• Slowly rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) before sewing and make
sure that the needle is not contacting the
straight stitch foot and straight stitch needle
plate.
j
Insert needle and attach the straight stitch
foot.
a Round hole
Note
• Align the two screw holes on the needle
plate with the two holes on the machine.
Use the disc-shaped screwdriver included
with the machine to secure the screws in
the needle plate.
a Notch
b Pin
k
*
S
Utility Stitches
i
Insert the bobbin case in its original
position, and then attach the needle plate
cover.
Start sewing.
After sewing, make sure to remove the straight stitch
needle plate and the straight stitch foot, and reinstall
the regular needle plate, the needle plate cover and
the presser foot “J”.
Memo
• To prevent puckering on fine fabrics, use a
fine needle, size 75/11, and a short stitch
length. For heavier fabrics, use a heavier
needle, size 90/14, and longer stitches.
Sewing S-27
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Basting
a
b
Select
Dart Seam
and attach presser foot “J”.
Press the “Reverse Stitch” button to sew
reinforcement stitches, then continue
sewing.
a
Select
b
Sew a reverse stitch at the beginning of the
dart and then sew from the wide end to the
other end without stretching the fabric.
*
and attach presser foot “J”.
If automatic reinforcement stitching is preset, a
reinforcement stitch will automatically be sewn at
the beginning of sewing.
Memo
• When you use the basting stitch for
gathering, do not use a reinforcement stitch
at the beginning; you should lift the presser
foot, rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise), pull up the bobbin
thread and pull a length of top and bobbin
thread out from the rear of the machine.
• You can set the stitch length between 5 mm
(approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm (approx.
1-3/16 inches)
a Basting
c
*
Cut the thread at the end leaving 50 mm
(approx. 1-15/16 inches), and then tie both
ends together.
Do not sew a reverse stitch at the end.
a Between 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm
(approx. 1-3/16 inches)
c
Sew while keeping the fabric straight.
d
d
S-28
End the basting with reinforcement stitches.
Insert the ends of the thread into the dart
with a hand sewing needle.
SEWING THE STITCHES
e
Iron the dart to one side so that it is flat.
d
Sew two rows of straight stitches parallel to
the seam line, then trim excess thread
leaving 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).
S
2
Use on waists of skirts, sleeves of shirts, etc.
a
b
*
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.
Pull the bobbin threads to obtain the
desired amount of gather, then tie the
threads.
f
Smooth the gathers by ironing them.
g
Sew on the seam line and remove the
basting stitch.
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.
3/16 inch) and the thread tension to
approximately 2.0 (weaker tension).
If you press
and then
after pressing
, the stitch length will be set
automatically to 4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and the
thread tension will be automatically set to 2.0.
c
e
Pull the bobbin and upper threads out by
50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches) (see page
B-47).
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
c About 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches)
Flat Fell Seam
Use for reinforcing seams and finishing edges
neatly.
a
Select
b
Sew the finish line, then cut half of the seam
allowance from the side on which the flat
fell seam will lie.
*
When the automatic thread cutting and automatic
reinforcement stitching are preset, reinforcement
stitches will be sewn automatically at the beginning
of sewing. Press the “Reverse Stitch” button to sew a
and attach presser foot “J”.
Sewing S-29
Utility Stitches
a Seam line
b 10 mm to 15 mm (approx. 3/8 inch to 9/16 inch)
c About 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches)
Gathering
SEWING THE STITCHES
reinforcement stitch and trim the thread
automatically at the end of sewing.
Finished flat fell seam
a Surface
a About 12 mm (approx. 1/2 inch)
b Wrong side
c
Spread the fabric out along the finish line.
a Finish line
b Wrong side
d
Lay both seam allowances on the side of the
shorter seam (cut seam) and iron them.
a Wrong side
e
Fold the longer seam allowance around the
shorter one, and sew the edge of the fold.
a Wrong side
S-30
Pintuck
a
Mark along the folds on the wrong side of
the fabric.
a Wrong side
b
Turn the fabric and iron the folded parts
only.
a Surface
c
Select
and attach presser foot “I”.
SEWING THE STITCHES
d
Sew a straight stitch along the fold.
*
a
Select a stitch.
When the automatic thread cutting and automatic
reinforcement stitching are preset, reinforcement
stitches will be sewn automatically at the beginning
of sewing. Press the “Reverse Stitch” button to sew a
reinforcement stitch and trim the thread
automatically at the end of sewing.
S
2
Utility Stitches
b
■ Overcasting (Using a Zigzag Stitch)
a Width for pintuck
b Wrong side
c Surface
e
Attach presser foot “J”.
Iron the folds in the same direction.
Zigzag Stitches
Sew the overcasting along the edge of the fabric
while positioning the right-hand side needle drop
point just outside the edge of the fabric.
a Needle drop position
Zigzag stitches are useful for overcasting,
appliqué, patchwork, and many other
applications.
Select a stitch, and attach presser foot “J”.
See page S-5 for the detailed information of
reverse stitches and reinforcement stitches.
■ Appliqué (Using a Zigzag Stitch)
Attach the appliqué material using a temporary
spray adhesive or basting, and then sew it.
*
Sew a zigzag stitch while positioning the right-hand
side needle drop point just outside the edge of the
fabric.
See page S-68 for the detailed information of
stitches.
Stitch
Stitch name
Presser foot
Zigzag stitch
Zigzag stitch
Zigzag stitch (Right)
Zigzag stitch (Left)
Sewing S-31
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Patchwork (for Crazy Quilt)
Turn back the desired width of fabric and position it
over the lower fabric, then sew so that the stitch
bridges both pieces of fabric.
■ Sewing Curves (Using a Zigzag
Stitch)
Shorten the stitch length setting to obtain a fine
stitch. Sew slowly, keeping the seams parallel with
the fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the
curve.
c
*
Snap the cord guide bobbin cover into
place, making sure that the gimp thread can
be fed freely.
Make sure there are no restrictions when feeding the
thread.
d
Set the zigzag width from 2.0 mm - 2.5 mm
(approx. 1/16 inch - 3/32 inch).
e
Attach presser foot “N”.
f
Position the fabric right side up on top of
the cord and place the cord to the rear of
the machine under the presser foot.
■ Cord Guide Bobbin Cover (Using a
Zigzag Stitch)
a
b
Remove the bobbin cover from the machine
(“Setting the Bobbin” of “Basic
operations”).
Thread the gimp thread through the hole in
the cord guide bobbin cover from top to
bottom. Position the thread in the notch at
the back of the cord guide bobbin cover.
a Notch
b Gimp thread
S-32
a Fabric (right side)
b Gimp thread
g
Lower the presser foot and start sewing to
make a decorative finish.
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Overcasting
Elastic Zigzag Stitches
Use elastic zigzag stitches for tape attaching,
overcasting, darning, or a wide variety of other
uses.
Use this stitch to sew overcasting on the edge of
stretch fabrics. Sew the overcasting along the edge
of the fabric while positioning the right-hand side
needle drop point just outside the edge of the fabric.
Stitch
Stitch name
Presser foot
2 steps elastic zigzag
3 steps elastic zigzag
a
Select a stitch.
Overcasting
Use for the edge of seams in skirts or trousers, and
the edge of all cuttings. Use presser foot “G”,
presser foot “J”, or the optional side cutter
attachment depending on the kind of overcasting
stitch you select.
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “G”
Stitch
Stitch name
Presser foot
Overcasting stitch
Overcasting stitch
b
Attach presser foot “J”.
2
Utility Stitches
See page S-68 for the detailed information of
stitches.
S
Overcasting stitch
■ Tape Attaching
Stretch the tape flat. While stretching the tape flat,
sew the tape to the fabric.
a Tape
Sewing S-33
SEWING THE STITCHES
a
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “G”.
CAUTION
• After the stitch width is adjusted, rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise).
Check that the needle does not touch the
presser foot. If the needle hits the presser foot,
the needle may break and cause injury.
a The needle should not touch the center bar
• If the presser foot is raised to its highest level,
the needle may strike the presser foot.
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “J”
See page S-68 for the detailed information of
stitches.
Stitch
Stitch name
Presser foot
Overcasting stitch
Overcasting stitch
Lower the presser foot so that the presser
b
foot guide is set flush against the edge of the
fabric.
Overcasting stitch
Overcasting stitch
Single diamond overcast
Single diamond overcast
c
Sew along the presser foot guide.
a Guide
S-34
a
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “J”.
SEWING THE STITCHES
b
Sew with the needle dropping slightly off
the edge of the fabric.
Presser foot
Stitch
Stitch name
S
2
Stem stitch
Quilting appliqué zigzag stitch
Utility Stitches
Zigzag stitch (Right)
a Needle drop position
Zigzag stitch (Left)
Note
• Use the “L/R SHIFT” setting for fine tuning
the placement of the stitch. Be sure to sew
trial stitches using the same conditions as
the real sewing.
Quilting
2 steps elastic zigzag
3 steps elastic zigzag
Quilting appliqué stitch
You can make beautiful quilts quickly and easily
with this machine. When making a quilt, you will
find it convenient to use the knee lifter and foot
controller to free your hands for other tasks
(“Using the Foot Controller” on page S-4 and /or
“Using the Knee Lifter” on page S-15).
The 30 quilting stitches Q-01 through Q-30 and
the utility stitches with “P” or “Q” indicated on
their key are useful for quilting.
The “P” or “Q” at the bottom of the key display
indicates that these stitches are intended for (“Q”)
quilting and (“P”) piecing.
See page S-68 for the detailed information of
stitches.
Shell tuck edge
Blanket stitch
Quilting stippling
Overcasting stitch
Tape attaching
Presser foot
Stitch
Stitch name
Serpentine stitch
Piecing stitch (Middle)
Feather stitch
Piecing stitch (Right)
Fagoting cross stitch
Piecing stitch (Left)
Couching stitch
Hand-look quilting (Middle)
Patchwork double overlock
stitch
Basting stitch
(Middle)
Smocking stitch
Sewing S-35
SEWING THE STITCHES
Presser foot
Stitch
Note
Stitch name
• The width range of stitch setting is only
available in the Quilting stitch “Q” quilting
category.
Rick-rack stitch
■ Piecing
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitch
Hemstitching
Sewing two pieces of fabric together is called
piecing. When cutting pieces for quilt blocks, make
sure the seam allowance is 6.5 mm (approx.
1/4 inch).
a
Select
or
and attach presser foot
“J”.
Hemstitching
b
Align the edge of the fabric with the edge of
the presser foot, and start sewing.
*
To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam allowance
Single diamond
overcast
along the right edge of the presser foot with
selected, the width should be set to 5.50 mm
(approx. 7/32 inch).
Overcasting stitch
Piecing stitch (Right)
Piecing stitch (Middle)
Piecing stitch (Left)
Hand-look quilting
a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
* To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam allowance
along the left edge of the presser foot with
Quilting appliqué zigzag stitch
selected, the width should be set to 1.50 mm
(approx. 1/32 inch).
Quilting appliqué stitch
Quilting stippling
Memo
• When a stitch pattern in the Quilting
Stitches category (Q-02 through Q-30) is
selected, a finer stitch width can be set than
is available with stitch patterns in other
categories.
For example: Stitch Q-03 has 57 needle
positions and stitch Q-19 has 29 width
selections.
S-36
a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
*
To change the needle position, use
the width display.
or
in
SEWING THE STITCHES
Memo
a
a
Press
, and then attach the 1/4” quilting
foot with guide.
2
e
b
c
■ Piecing Using the 1/4" Quilting Foot
with Guide (optional with some
models)
This quilting foot can sew an accurate 1/4 inch or
1/8 inch seam allowance.
It can be used for piecing together a quilt or for
topstitching.
e
d
a
b
c
d
e
Align this mark with edge of fabric to begin.
Beginning of stitching
End of stitching
Opposite edge of fabric to end or pivot
1/4 inch
Memo
• For details on pivoting, refer to “Pivoting”
on page S-15.
Topstitching quilting, 1/8 inch
Sew with the edge of the fabric aligned with the left
side of the presser foot toe.
a
a
a Guide
b
Use the guide and marks on the presser foot
to sew accurate seam allowances.
Piecing a 1/4 inch seam allowance
Sew keeping the edge of the fabrics against the guide.
b
c
b
S
Utility Stitches
• Using a straight stitch (middle needle
position) makes it easier to sew smoothly
(see page S-24).
• For models equipped with the guideline
marker:
In the case Q-01(center, at width 3.5 mm) is
selected, if the guideline marker is set at
10.0 mm (3.5 mm plus 6.5 mm, close to 1/4
inch), you can sew piecing with referring the
guideline marker.
Creating an accurate seam allowance
Use the mark on the foot to begin, end, or pivot 1/4
inch from edge of fabric.
a Surface of fabric
b Seam
c 1/8 inch
a
a Guide
b 1/4 inch
Memo
• For accurate fabric placement, refer to
“Aligning the Fabric with a Mark on the
Needle Plate or Bobbin Cover (with Mark)”
on page S-26.
Sewing S-37
SEWING THE STITCHES
e
■ Appliqué
a
Trace the pattern onto the appliqué fabric
and then cut around it, leaving a 3 mm to
5 mm (approx. 1/8 inch to 3/16 inch) seam
allowance.
Use the quilting appliqué stitch to attach
the appliqué. Sew around the edge while
dropping the needle as close to the edge as
possible.
a Seam allowance: 3 mm to 5 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch to 3/16 inch)
b
Place a piece of stabilizer cut to the finished
size of the appliqué design onto the fabric,
and then fold over the seam margin using
an iron. Clip curves when necessary.
c
Turn the appliqué over, and attach the
stabilizer with basting pins or a basting
stitch.
a Appliqué
b Needle drop position
CAUTION
• Be careful that the needle does not strike a
basting pin during sewing. Striking a pin can
cause the needle to break, resulting in injury.
d
S-38
Select
and attach presser foot “J”.
SEWING THE STITCHES
You can use the appliqué technique to attach
appliqué designs like the three pictured below.
e
Set the “Width Control” to “ON”.
S
2
Utility Stitches
a Dresden plate
b Stained glass
c Sunbonnet sue
Memo
• You can use the speed control slide to
adjust the stitch width. Use the foot
controller to adjust the sewing speed.
■ Quilting with Satin Stitches
For better fabric control, use the foot controller to
sew with satin stitches. Set the speed control slide to
control the stitch width to make subtle changes in
the stitch width during sewing.
a
Attach the foot controller (see page S-4).
b
Select
and attach presser foot “J”.
c
Press
in the length display to shorten
f
Press
.
→ The display will return to the original screen.
g
*
the stitch length.
Start sewing.
You can adjust the stitch width during sewing by
moving the sewing speed controller. Slide the lever
to the left, and the stitch width becomes narrower.
Slide it to the right, the stitch width becomes wider.
The size of the width changes equally on both sides
of the middle needle position.
a narrower
b wider
Example: Changing the width
\
Memo
• The setting will vary according to the kind of
fabric and the thickness of the thread, but a
length of 0.3 mm to 0.5 mm (approx.
1/64 inch to 1/32 inch) is best for satin
stitches.
d
Press
h
When you are finished sewing, set the
“Width Control” back to “OFF”.
to use the speed control slide
to control the stitch width.
Sewing S-39
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Free Motion Quilting
Memo
With free motion quilting, the feed dogs can be
lowered by pressing
• When starting to sew, the internal sensor
detects the thickness of the fabric, and the
quilting foot is raised to the height specified
in the machine settings screen. Press
to display “Free Motion Foot
, so that the fabric can be
moved freely in any direction.
In this mode, the presser foot is raised to the
necessary height for free motion sewing.
We recommend attaching the foot controller and
sewing at a consistent speed. You can adjust the
sewing speed with the speed control slide on the
machine.
Height” of the settings screen. Press
to change the height that the quilting
foot is raised above the fabric. Increase the
setting by pressing
, when sewing fluffy
or thick fabric, so that the fabric passes
easily under the quilting foot. Decrease the
CAUTION
height by pressing
fabrics.
• With free motion quilting, control the feeding
speed of the fabric to match the sewing speed.
If the fabric is moved faster than the sewing
speed, the needle may break or other damage
may result.
Using free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
The free motion open toe quilting foot “O” is used
for free motion quilting with zigzag or decorative
stitches or for free motion quilting of straight stitches
on fabric with an uneven thickness. Various stitches
can be sewn using free motion open toe quilting foot
“O”. For details on the stitches that can be used,
refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” on
page S-68.
or
, when sewing thinner
• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it
may be necessary to adjust the upper
thread tension (see page S-12). Test with a
sample piece of quilting fabric.
a
Press
to set the machine to free motion
sewing mode.
Free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
With free motion quilting, control the feeding speed
of the fabric to match the sewing speed.
If the fabric is moved faster than the sewing speed,
the needle may break or other damage may result.
→ The key appears as
, the quilting foot is raised
to the necessary height, and then the feed dogs are
lowered for free motion sewing.
S-40
b
Select a stitch.
c
Remove the presser foot holder.
SEWING THE STITCHES
d
Attach free motion open toe quilting foot
“O” by positioning the pin of the quilting
foot above the needle clamp screw and
aligning the lower-left of the quilting foot
and the presser bar.
g
Press
mode.
to cancel the free motion sewing
S
→ Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
2
Memo
Using free motion quilting foot “C” (optional with
some models)
Use the free motion quilting foot “C” with straight
stitch needle plate for free motion sewing.
a pin
b Needle clamp screw
c Presser bar
Note
Free motion quilting foot “C”
• Make sure that the quilting foot is not
slanted.
Hold the quilting foot in place with your
e
right hand, and tighten the presser foot
holder screw using the disc-shaped
screwdriver with your left hand.
CAUTION
• When using free motion quilting foot “C”, be
sure to use the straight stitch needle plate and
sew with the needle in middle (center) needle
position. If the needle is moved to any position
other than the middle (center) needle position,
the needle may break, which may result in
injuries.
Memo
a Presser foot holder screw
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle
may touch the quilting foot, causing it to bend
or break.
f
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut,
and then move the fabric at a consistent
pace in order to sew uniform stitches
roughly 2.0 mm - 2.5 mm (approx.
1/16 inch - 3/32 inch) in length.
a Stitch
• When starting to sew, the internal sensor
detects the thickness of the fabric, and the
quilting foot is raised to the height specified
in the machine settings screen. Press
to display “Free Motion Foot
Height” of the settings screen. Press
or
to change the height that the quilting
foot is raised above the fabric. Increase the
setting by pressing
, when sewing fluffy
or thick fabric, so that the fabric passes
easily under the quilting foot. Decrease the
height by pressing
fabrics.
, when sewing thinner
• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it
may be necessary to adjust the upper
thread tension.Test with a sample piece of
fabric that is similar to your chosen fabric.
Sewing S-41
Utility Stitches
• Do not be discouraged with your initial
results. The technique requires practice.
SEWING THE STITCHES
a
Attach the straight stitch needle plate (see
page S-26).
→ The key appears as
, the quilting foot is raised to
the necessary height, and then the feed dogs are
lowered for free motion sewing.
a
a Round hole
Memo
• Notice this needle plate has a round hole for
the needle.
b
Select
c
Press
to set the machine to free motion
sewing mode.
or
.
a Free motion quilting foot “C”
→ When stitch Q-01 or 1-30 is selected, free motion
quilting foot “C” is indicated in the upper-left corner
of the screen.
d
Attach free motion quilting foot “C” at the
front with the presser foot holder screw
aligned with the notch in the quilting foot.
a
b
a Presser foot holder screw
b Notch
Note
• Make sure that the quilting foot is attached
properly and not slanted.
e
Hold the quilting foot in place with your
right hand, and tighten the presser foot
holder screw using the screwdriver with
your left hand.
a Presser foot holder screw
S-42
SEWING THE STITCHES
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle
may touch the quilting foot, causing it to bend
or break.
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut,
and then move the fabric at a consistent
pace in order to sew uniform stitches
roughly 2.0 mm - 2.5 mm (approx.
1/16 inch - 3/32 inch) in length.
Sewing quilting lines at equal distances around a
motif is called echo quilting. The quilting lines,
which appear as ripples echoing away from the
motif, are the distinguishing characteristic of this
quilting style. Use the free motion echo quilting foot
“E” for echo quilting. Using the measurement on the
presser foot as a guide, sew around the motif at a
fixed interval. We recommend attaching the foot
controller and sewing at a consistent speed.
Free motion echo quilting foot “E” measurement
a Stitch
g
Press
to cancel the free motion sewing
mode.
→ Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
h
After sewing, make sure to remove the
straight stitch needle plate and presser foot
“C”, and reinstall the regular needle plate
and the needle plate cover.
a 6.4 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
b 9.5 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
Note
• Free motion open toe quilting foot “O” can
also be used with the straight stitch needle
plate. We recommend using free motion
open toe quilting foot “O” with free motion
sewing of fabrics of uneven thicknesses.
• When using the straight stitch needle plate,
all straight stitches become middle needle
position stitches. You cannot change the
needle position using the width display.
CAUTION
• With free motion quilting, control the feeding
speed of the fabric to match the sewing speed.
If the fabric is moved faster than the sewing
speed, the needle may break or other damage
may result.
Memo
• Normally, the feed dogs are raised for
regular sewing.
• Do not be discouraged with your initial
results. The technique requires practice.
Sewing S-43
S
2
Utility Stitches
f
■ Echo Quilting Using the Free Motion
Echo Quilting Foot “E” (optional
with some models)
SEWING THE STITCHES
Memo
• When starting to sew, the internal sensor
detects the thickness of the fabric, and the
quilting foot is raised to the height specified
in the machine settings screen. Press
to display “Free Motion Foot
Height” of the settings screen (see page
c
Attach the adapter (“Attaching the Presser
Foot with the Included Adapter” of “Basic
operations”).
d
Attach the free motion echo quilting foot
“E” on the left side of the adapter with the
holes in the quilting foot and adapter
aligned.
e
Tighten the screw with the included
screwdriver.
S-15). Press
or
to change the height
that the quilting foot is raised above the
fabric. To create a greater distance between
the foot and needle plate for sewing thick,
fluffy fabrics, increase the setting by
pressing
. To create a lesser distance
between foot and needle plate for sewing
thin fabrics, decrease the setting by
pressing
.
• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it
may be necessary to adjust the upper
thread tension (see page S-12). Test with a
sample piece of quilting fabric.
a
Select
.
b
Press
to set the machine to free motion
sewing mode.
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle
may touch the quilting foot, causing it to bend
or break.
→ The key appears as
, the quilting foot is raised to
the necessary height, then the feed dogs are lowered
for free motion sewing.
S-44
SEWING THE STITCHES
f
Using the measurement on the quilting foot
as a guide, sew around the motif.
Blind Hem Stitches
Secure the bottoms of skirts and pants with a blind
hem. Two stitches are available for blind hem
stitching.
Stitch name
Presser foot
Blind hem stitch
Blind hem stitch stretch
Memo
• When the size of cylindrical pieces is too
small to slide onto the arm or the length is
too short, the fabric will not feed and
desired results may not be achieved.
a
Turn the skirt or pants wrong side out.
2
a 6.4 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
1
3
Finished project
a
b
c
d
b
Wrong side of fabric
Right side of fabric
Edge of fabric
Bottom side
Fold the fabric along the desired edge of the
hem, and press.
2
g
Press
to cancel the free motion sewing
mode.
→ Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
4
1
1
1
3
Wrong side of fabric
Right side of Fabric
Edge of fabric
Desired edge of hem
2
<Thick fabric>
2
3
<Seen
a
b
c
d
<Normal fabric>
from the side>
Sewing S-45
2
Utility Stitches
Stitch
S
SEWING THE STITCHES
c
Use a chalk to mark on the fabric about 5
mm (3/16 inch) from the edge of the fabric,
and then baste it.
6
5
3
1
4
2
1
2
1
2
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Select
h
Remove the flat bed attachment to use the
free-arm.
i
Slide the item that you wish to sew onto the
free arm, make sure that the fabric feeds
correctly, and then start sewing.
or
.
Wrong side of fabric
Right side of fabric
Edge of fabric
Desired edge of hem
5 mm (3/16 inch)
Basting
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
d
Fold back the fabric inside along the
basting.
5
3
4
6
2
1
1
7
1
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Wrong side of fabric
Right side of fabric
Edge of fabric
Desired edge of hem
5 mm (3/16 inch)
Basting
Basting point
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
a Free arm
Unfold the edge of fabric, and position the
e
fabric with the wrong side facing up.
4
3
1
1
1
1
6
1
5
2
a
b
c
d
e
f
Wrong side of fabric
Right side of fabric
Edge of fabric
Desired edge of hem
Basting point
Basting
S-46
Position the fabric with the edge of the
folded hem against the guide of the presser
foot, and then lower the presser foot lever.
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
f
j
Attach blind hem foot “R”.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Fold of hem
c Guide
SEWING THE STITCHES
k
Adjust the stitch width until the needle
slightly catches the fold of the hem.
■ If the Needle Catches Too Much of
the Hem Fold
The needle is too far to the left.
Press
to decrease the stitch width so that the
needle slightly catches the fold of the hem.
<Thick fabric>
<Stitch width>
<Normal fabric>
a Thick fabric
b Normal fabric
1
2
Memo
• Blind hem stitches cannot be sewn if the left
needle drop point does not catch the fold. If
the needle catches too much of the fold, the
fabric cannot be unfolded and the seam
appearing on the right side of the fabric will
be very large, leaving an unattractive finish.
If you experience either of these cases,
follow the instructions below to solve the
problem.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
■ If the Needle does not Catch the
Hem Fold
The needle is too far to the right.
Press
2
Utility Stitches
a Needle drop point
When you change the needle drop point, raise the
needle, and then change the stitch width.
S
to increase the stitch width so that the
needle slightly catches the fold of the hem.
<Thick fabric>
Sewing S-47
SEWING THE STITCHES
c
<Normal fabric>
Attach presser foot “J”. Check that the
needle drops slightly off the edge of the
appliqué, then start sewing.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
l
Sew with the fold of the hem against the
presser foot guide.
a Appliqué material
Remove the basting stitching and reverse
m
the fabric.
2
1
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
a Needle drop position
■ Appliqué Sharp Curves
Appliqué
a
*
Use a temporary spray adhesive, fabric glue
or a basting stitch to attach the appliqué to
the fabric.
This will keep the fabric from moving during
sewing.
a Appliqué
b Fabric glue
b
*
Select
or
.
Adjust the stitch length and width to correspond to
the appliqué shape, size, and quality of material (see
page S-10).
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68.
S-48
Stop the machine with the needle in the fabric
outside the appliqué. Raise the presser foot and turn
the fabric a little bit at a time while sewing for an
attractive finish to the seam.
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Appliqué Corners
c
Stop the machine with the needle in the right
position of the outside (or inside) corner of the
appliqué. Raise the presser foot and pivot the fabric
to align the fabric edge. Lower the presser foot and
continue stitching.
To make rows of shell tuck stitches, fold the
fabric in half along the bias.
S
2
Utility Stitches
Memo
• Use a thin fabric.
d
Attach presser foot “J”. Set the needle drop
point slightly off the edge of the fabric, and
start sewing.
a Outside corner
b Inside corner
Memo
• Placing a lightweight tear away stabilizer
beneath the stitching area will improve the
stitch placement along the edge of the
appliqué fabric.
Shelltuck Stitches
Shelltuck stitches give an attractive appearance of
shells along the curve of a collar. This stitch
pattern can be used for edging the neckline or
sleeves of dresses and blouses.
a
Select
a Needle drop position
.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68.
b
Increase the upper thread tension for an
attractive scallop finish to the shelltuck
stitches (see page S-12).
Memo
• If the upper thread tension is too weak, the
shelltuck stitches will not scallop.
Sewing S-49
SEWING THE STITCHES
e
Unfold the fabric, and iron the tucks to one
side.
c
Trim along the seam, making sure not to cut
the stitches.
Memo
Memo
• To make shell tucks at the edge of a collar
or neckline, follow the pattern’s instructions
and then use this stitch to make a
decorative finish on the collar or neckline.
• Use a seam sealant to secure the edges of
the scallop stitches.
Crazy Quilting
Scallop Stitches
This wave-shaped satin stitch is called the scallop
stitch. Use this stitch to decorate the edges of
blouse collars and handkerchiefs or use it as a hem
accent.
Memo
• A temporary spray adhesive may be
necessary for lightweight fabrics. Test sew
the fabric before sewing a project.
a
Select
For a decorative look called “Crazy Quilting”, the
following stitches can be sewn on top of a pressed
seam allowance.
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.
b
With the right sides facing each other, sew
two pieces of fabric together, and then
press open the seam allowance.
.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68.
b
*
S-50
Attach presser foot “N”. Sew scallop
stitches along the edge of the fabric.
Do not sew directly on the edge of the fabric.
a
b
c
d
Straight stitch
Seam margins
6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
Wrong side
SEWING THE STITCHES
c
d
Select a stitch for top stitching.
e
Pull the bobbin threads to obtain the
desired amount of gather, and then smooth
the gathers by ironing them.
S
2
Place the fabric right side up in the
machine, and center the presser foot over
the seam when sewing.
Utility Stitches
f
a Right side of fabric
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.
b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.
3/16 inch) and loosen the upper thread
tension to approximately 2.0 (see “Setting
the Stitch Length” on page S-10 and
“Setting the Thread Tension” on page S-12).
c
Pull the bobbin and upper threads out by
50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).
d
Sew the seams, leaving approximately
10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch) between the
seams, then trim excess thread, leaving
50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).
or
.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68.
Smocking Stitches
Use smocking stitches for decorative sewing on
clothes, etc.
Select
g
Sew the spaces between the straight seams.
h
Pull out the straight stitch threads.
a Approximately 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
Sewing S-51
SEWING THE STITCHES
Fagoting
Tape or Elastic Attaching
When there is a space between two fabrics with
thread sewn over the space to join the fabrics
together, it is called fagoting. Use this stitch when
sewing blouses or children’s clothes.
a
*
Baste two pieces of fabric onto thin paper,
leaving a space of 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
between the fabrics.
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.
b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.
3/16 inch), and loosen the upper thread
tension to 2.0 (see “Setting the Stitch
Length” on page S-10 and “Setting the
Thread Tension” on page S-12).
If you draw a line down the middle of the thin paper
or water-soluble stabilizer, sewing is easier.
Memo
• Be sure that neither automatic
reinforcement
cutting
c
nor automatic thread
is selected.
Sew two rows of straight stitches on the
right side of the fabric, then pull the bobbin
thread to create the necessary gather.
a 4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
b Paper
c Basting stitches
b
Select
or
.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68.
c
Memo
Attach presser foot “J”. Align the center of
• Before sewing the straight stitch, rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
and pull up the bobbin thread. Holding the
top and bobbin thread, pull a length of
thread out from the rear of the machine. (Be
sure that the presser foot is raised.)
the presser foot with the middle of the
space between the fabrics and begin
sewing.
d
Place the tape over the gather, and hold it
in place with basting pins.
a Basting stitches
Memo
• Use a thick thread.
a Tape
When sewing is finished, gently tear the
d
paper away.
S-52
SEWING THE STITCHES
e
Select
or
.
S
■ Hemstitching (1)
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68.
Use for sewing tablecloths, decorative hems, and
decorative stitching on shirt fronts.
Sew over the tape (or elastic).
Memo
• Use a light to medium weight homespun
fabric with a little stiffness.
a
*
Insert a type 130/705H, size 100/16 Wing
needle.
This specialty sewing needle is not furnished with
your machine. Must be purchased separately.
CAUTION
CAUTION
• Be sure the needle does not strike a basting
pin, or any other objects, during sewing. The
thread could tangle or the needle could break,
causing injury.
g
• The “Automatic Threading” button cannot be
used. Thread the wing needle by hand, from
front to back. Using the “Automatic
Threading” button may result in damage to the
machine.
• A more attractive finish can be obtained if you
use a “130/705H Wing” needle when sewing
these patterns. If using a wing needle and the
stitch width has been set manually, check that
the needle will not touch the presser foot by
carefully rotating the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) before starting to sew.
b
*
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “N”.
Select any stitch between 3-01 and 3-22.
Pull out the straight stitch threads.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68.
Sewing S-53
2
Utility Stitches
f
Heirloom
SEWING THE STITCHES
c
Start sewing.
d
Press
to create a mirror image of the
stitch.
Example: Illustration of finished product
e
Match beginning needle drop points on the
opposite edge of the open area to keep the
stitching symmetrical.
■ Hemstitching (2) (Drawn Work (1))
a
*
Pull out several threads from one area on a
piece of fabric to open the area.
Pull out 5 or 6 threads to leave a 3 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch) area open.
■ Hemstitching (3) (Drawn Work (2))
a
*
Pull out several threads from both sides of
the 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) area which
are not yet open.
Pull out four threads, leave five threads, and then
pull out four threads. The width of five threads is
approximately 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) or less.
Memo
• Loosely woven fabrics work best for this.
b
Select
.
a Approx. 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) or less
b Four threads (pull out)
c Five threads (leave)
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68.
c
S-54
Attach presser foot “N”. With the right side
of the fabric facing up, sew one edge of the
open area.
b
Select
.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68.
SEWING THE STITCHES
c
Sew the decorative stitch in the center of
the five threads created above.
Stitch
Stitch name
Presser foot
Bound buttonhole
S
2
Keyhole buttonhole
Utility Stitches
Tapered keyhole buttonhole
Keyhole buttonhole
Memo
• A wing needle can be used for Hemstitching
(3).
One-step buttonholes are sewn from the front of
the presser foot to the back, as shown below.
One-step Buttonholes
With one-step buttonholes, you can make
buttonholes appropriate to the size of your button.
See page S-68 for the detailed information of
stitches.
Stitch
Stitch name
Presser foot
Narrow rounded buttonhole
Wide round ended
buttonhole
Tapered round ended
buttonhole
Round ended buttonhole
Round ended buttonhole
a Reinforcement stitching
Round double ended
buttonhole
Narrow squared buttonhole
Wide squared buttonhole
Stretch buttonhole
Heirloom buttonhole
Sewing S-55
SEWING THE STITCHES
a
b
Select a buttonhole stitch, and attach
buttonhole foot “A”.
Note
• Pass the thread underneath the presser
foot.
• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole
foot backward as far as possible as shown
in the illustration, making sure that there is
no gap behind the part of the foot marked
“A”. If the buttonhole foot is not slid back as
far as possible, the buttonhole will not be
sewn at the correct size.
Mark the position and length of the
buttonhole on the fabric.
2
1
a Marks on fabric
b Buttonhole sewing
e
Memo
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is
positioned behind the metal bracket on the
buttonhole foot.
• The maximum buttonhole length is about
28 mm (approx. 1-1/16 inches) (diameter +
thickness of the button).
c
Pull out the button holder plate on the
presser foot, and insert the button that will
be put through the buttonhole. Then tighten
the button holder plate around the button.
a Buttonhole lever
a Button holder plate
a Metal bracket
Memo
• The size of the buttonhole is determined by
the size of the button in the button holder
plate.
d
Align the presser foot with the mark on the
fabric, and lower the presser foot.
A
a Mark on the fabric
b Marks on the presser foot
S-56
f
*
Gently hold the end of the upper thread,
and then start sewing.
Feed the fabric carefully by hand while the
buttonhole is sewn.
→ Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then
stops.
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Sewing Stretch Fabrics
Memo
• If automatic thread cutting is turned on
before you start sewing, both threads are
automatically cut after the reinforcement
stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed
(for example, because it is too thick),
increase the stitch length setting.
or
,
sew the buttonhole stitches over a gimp thread.
a
Insert a pin along the inside of one of the
bar tacks, and then insert the seam ripper
into the center of the buttonhole and cut
towards the pin.
Hook the gimp thread onto the back of
presser foot “A”. Insert the ends into the
grooves at the front of the presser foot, and
then temporarily tie them there.
a Upper thread
a Basting pin
b Seam ripper
b
Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
CAUTION
• When using the seam ripper to open the
buttonhole, do not put your hand or finger in
the path of the ripper. The ripper may slip and
cause injury. Do not use the seam ripper in any
other way than how it is intended.
Memo
Memo
• For keyhole buttonholes, use the eyelet
punch to make a hole in the rounded end of
the buttonhole. Then insert a pin along the
inside of one of the bar tacks, insert a seam
ripper into the hole made with the eyelet
punch, and cut towards the pin.
• Set the width of the satin stitches to the
width of the gimp thread, and set the
buttonhole width to be 2-3 times the width
of the gimp thread.
c
Once sewing is completed, gently pull the
gimp thread to remove any slack, and trim
off any excess.
a Eyelet punch
b Basting pin
Memo
• After using the seam ripper to cut open the
threads over the buttonhole, trim off the
threads.
Sewing S-57
S
2
Utility Stitches
g
When sewing on stretch fabric with
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that do
Not Fit into the Button Holder Plate
Use the markings on the presser foot scale to set the
size of the buttonhole. One mark on the presser foot
scale equals 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch).
Add the button diameter and thickness together, and
then set the plate at the calculated value.
Darning
Use darning stitches for mending and other
applications.
See page S-68 for the detailed information of
stitches.
Stitch
Stitch name
Presser foot
Darning
Darning
Darning is performed by sewing from the front of the
presser foot to the back as shown below.
a
b
c
d
Presser foot scale
Button holder plate
Completed measurement of diameter + thickness
5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Memo
• For example, for a button with a diameter of
15 mm (approx. 9/16 inch) and a thickness
of 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch), the scale
should be set at 25 mm (approx. 1 inch).
a Reinforcement stitches
a 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
b 15 mm (approx. 9/16 inch)
a
Select a stitch, and attach buttonhole foot
“A”.
b
Set the scale to the desired length of the
darning.
a
b
c
d
Presser foot scale
Completed length measurement
Width 7 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Memo
• The maximum length for darning is 28 mm
(approx. 1-1/16 inches).
S-58
SEWING THE STITCHES
c
Check that the needle drops at the desired
position and lower the presser foot, making
sure the upper thread passes underneath
the buttonhole foot.
e
Gently hold the end of the upper thread,
and then press the “Start/Stop” button to
start the machine.
S
2
Utility Stitches
Note
→ Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then
stops.
• Pass the thread underneath the presser
foot.
• Set the presser foot so that there is no gap
behind the section marked with an “A” (the
shaded area in the illustration below). If
there is a gap, the size of the darning will
not be correct.
Memo
• If automatic thread cutting is turned on
before you start sewing, both threads are
automatically cut after the reinforcement
stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed
(for example, because it is too thick),
increase the stitch length setting.
Bar Tacks
d
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is
positioned behind the metal bracket on the
buttonhole foot.
Use bar tacks to reinforce areas that will be subject
to strain, such as pocket corners.
See page S-68 for the detailed information of
stitches.
Stitch
Stitch name
Presser foot
Bar tack
a Buttonhole lever
a
Select
b
Attach buttonhole foot “A” and set the
scale to the length of the bar tack you wish
to sew.
.
a Metal bracket
a Presser foot scale
b Completed length measurement
c 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Sewing S-59
SEWING THE STITCHES
Memo
e
• Bar tacks can be between 5 mm (approx.
3/16 inch) and 28 mm (approx. 1-1/16
inches). Bar tacks are usually between 5
mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and 10 mm (approx.
3/8 inch).
c
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is
positioned behind the metal bracket on the
buttonhole foot.
Set the fabric so that the pocket moves
toward you during sewing.
Note
• Pass the thread underneath the presser
foot.
• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole
foot backward as far as possible as shown
in the illustration, making sure that there is
no gap behind the part of the foot marked
“A”. If the buttonhole foot is not slid back as
far as possible, the bar tack will not be sewn
to the correct size.
d
Check the first needle drop point and lower
the presser foot.
a 2 mm (approx. 1/16 inch)
S-60
a Metal bracket
f
Gently hold the end of the upper thread and
begin sewing.
→ When sewing is completed, the machine will sew
reinforcement stitches and stop automatically.
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Bar Tacks on Thick Fabrics
c
Place a piece of folded fabric or cardboard beside
the fabric being sewn to level the buttonhole foot
and allow for easier and even feeding.
Attach button sewing foot “M”, slide the
button along the metal plate and into the
presser foot, and lower the presser foot.
S
2
Utility Stitches
a Button
b Metal plate
a Presser foot
b Thick paper
c Fabric
d
Memo
• If automatic thread cutting is turned on
before you start sewing, both threads are
automatically cut after the reinforcement
stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed
(for example, because it is too thick),
increase the stitch length setting.
*
*
e
Buttons with 2 or 4 holes can be attached, using
the machine.
See page S-68 for the detailed information of
stitches.
Stitch name
If the needle does not reach the holes on the left
side, adjust the stitch width.
To attach the button more securely, repeat the
process.
Gently hold the end of the upper thread and
start sewing.
→ The machine stops automatically when sewing is
finished.
Button Sewing
Stitch
Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to check that the needle
goes into each hole correctly.
Presser foot
Button sewing
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
button during sewing. The needle may break
and cause injury.
f
From the wrong side of the fabric, pull the
end of the bobbin thread to pull the upper
thread through to the wrong side of the
fabric. Tie the two thread ends together and
cut the threads.
g
After the button is attached, select another
stitch and rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
Note
• Do not use the automatic thread cutting
function when sewing buttons. Otherwise,
you will lose the thread ends.
a
Select
.
→ The feed dogs are lowered automatically.
b
Raise the presser foot.
Sewing S-61
SEWING THE STITCHES
■ Attaching 4 Hole Buttons
Sew the two holes closest to you. Then raise the
presser foot and move the fabric so that the needle
goes into the next two holes, and sew them in the
same way.
Eyelet
Use this stitch for making belt holes and other
similar applications.
See page S-68 for the detailed information of
stitches.
Stitch
Stitch name
Presser foot
Eyelet
■ Attaching a Shank to the Button
Pull the shank lever toward you before
a
sewing.
a Shank lever
b
c
Pull the two ends of the upper thread
between the button and the fabric, wind
them around the shank, and then tie them
firmly together.
a
Select
b
Use
.
or
in either the stitch width
display or the stitch length display to
choose the size of the eyelet.
*
a
b
c
c
Actual size
Large 7 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
Medium 6 mm (approx. 15/64 inch)
Small 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Attach monogramming foot “N”, then
rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to check the needle
drop position.
Tie the ends of the bobbin thread from the
beginning and end of sewing together on
the wrong side of the fabric.
Note
• When sewing is completed, be sure to
select the other stitch and rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
to raise the feed dogs.
d
Cut off any excess thread.
a Needle drop position
d
Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
→ When sewing is finished, the machine sews
reinforcement stitches and stops automatically.
Note
• If the stitch pattern comes out poorly, make
adjustments to “SEWING STITCH
PATTERNS” on page S-81.
S-62
SEWING THE STITCHES
e
Use the eyelet punch to make a hole in the
center of the stitching.
b
Select
and attach monogramming foot
S
“N”.
2
Utility Stitches
Multi-directional Sewing
(Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch)
Use these stitch patterns to attach patches or
emblems to pant legs, shirt sleeves, etc.
a
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68.
c
Remove the flat bed attachment to use the
free-arm.
Memo
• Insert the tubular piece of fabric onto the
free-arm, and then sew in the order shown
in the illustration.
Set the needle in the fabric at the sewing
start point, and sew seam “1” as shown.
a Start Point
d
*
Select
and sew seam “2” as shown.
The fabric will move sideways, guide the fabric by
hand to keep sewing straight.
Sewing S-63
SEWING THE STITCHES
e
Select
and sew seam “3” as shown.
b
Attach presser foot “J” and sew straight
stitches up to the zipper opening. Change to
a basting stitch (see page S-28) and sew to
the top of the fabric.
→ The fabric feeds forward while stitching backward.
f
Select
and sew seam “4” as shown.
a
b
c
d
c
Basting stitches
Reverse stitches
End of zipper opening
Wrong side
Press the seam allowance open and attach
the zipper with a basting stitch in the
middle of each side of the zipper tape.
→ The seam will be connected to the starting point of
seam 1.
Zipper Insertion
■ Centered Zipper
Use for bags and other such applications.
a
Select
.
Memo
a Basting stitches
b Zipper
c Wrong side
d
Remove presser foot “J”. Align the right
side of the pin in zipper foot “I” with the
presser foot holder, and attach the zipper
foot.
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-68.
Note
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position.
a Right
b Left
c Needle drop position
S-64
SEWING THE STITCHES
CAUTION
b
e
Topstitch 7 mm to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 inch
to 3/8 inch) from the seamed edge of the
fabric, then remove the basting.
a
b
c
d
c
Reverse stitches
Wrong side of fabric
Basting stitches
End of zipper opening
Press the seam allowance open and align
the folded hem along the teeth of the
zipper, while maintaining 3 mm (approx.
1/8 inch) of sewing space.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
zipper during sewing. If the needle strikes the
zipper, the needle may break, leading to
injury.
■ Inserting a Side Zipper
Use for side zippers in skirts or dresses.
a
Select
.
Note
S
2
Utility Stitches
• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the
straight stitch, middle needle position is
selected. Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to make sure the needle
does not strike the presser foot. If another
stitch is selected, the needle will strike the
presser foot, causing the needle to break and
possibly causing injury.
Attach presser foot “J” and sew straight
stitches up to the zipper opening. Change to
a basting stitch and sew to the top of the
fabric.
a
b
c
d
e
d
Zipper pull tab
Wrong side of fabric
Zipper teeth
End of zipper opening
3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)
Remove presser foot “J”.
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position.
Sewing S-65
SEWING THE STITCHES
e
Align the right side of the pin in zipper foot
“I” with the presser foot holder, and attach
the presser foot.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
zipper during sewing. If the needle strikes the
zipper, the needle may break, leading to
injury.
i
Close the zipper, turn the fabric over, and
sew a basting stitch.
a Right
b Left
c Needle drop position
CAUTION
• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the
straight stitch, middle needle position is
selected. Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to make sure the needle
does not strike the presser foot. If another
stitch is selected, the needle will strike the
presser foot, causing the needle to break and
possibly causing injury.
f
Set the presser foot in the 3 mm (approx.
1/8 inch) margin.
g
Starting from the end of the zipper opening,
sew to a point about 50 mm (approx.
2 inches) from the edge of the fabric, then
stop the machine.
h
Pull down the zipper slider, then continue
sewing to the edge of the fabric.
a
b
c
d
j
*
Front of the skirt (wrong side of fabric)
Basting stitches
Front of the skirt (right side of fabric)
Back of the skirt (right side of fabric)
Remove the presser foot, and reattach it so
that the left side of the pin is attached to the
presser foot holder.
When sewing the left side of the zipper, the needle
should drop on the right side of the presser foot.
When sewing the right side of the zipper, the needle
should drop on the left side of the presser foot.
a Right
b Left
c Needle drop position
a 50 mm (approx. 2 inches)
b 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)
S-66
k
Set the fabric so that the left edge of the
presser foot touches the edge of the zipper
teeth.
l
Sew reverse stitches at the top of the
zipper, then continue sewing.
m
Stop sewing about 50 mm (approx.
2 inches) from the edge of the fabric, leave
the needle in the fabric, and remove the
basting stitches.
SEWING THE STITCHES
n
Open the zipper and sew the rest of the
seam.
S
2
Utility Stitches
a
b
c
d
Basting stitches
7 mm to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch)
Reverse stitches
50 mm (approx. 2 inches)
Sewing S-67
STITCH SETTING CHART
STITCH SETTING CHART
The following chart shows information for each utility stitch concerning applications, stitch lengths, stitch
widths, and whether or not the twin needle mode can be used.
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Presser foot
Stitch
Stitch name
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
Straight stitch
(Left)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
Straight stitch
(Middle)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
Straight stitch
(Middle)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
Triple stretch
stitch
General sewing for
reinforcement and decorative
topstitching
Stem stitch
Reinforced stitching, sewing
and decorative applications
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching, top
stitching
Basting stitch
Basting
Zigzag stitch
S-68
Applications
Straight stitch
(Left)
Zigzag stitch
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
For overcasting, mending.
For overcasting, mending.
Twin
needle
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
1.0
(1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
20
(3/4)
5 - 30
(3/16 1-3/16)
NO
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.4
(1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.4
(1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
Zigzag stitch
(Right)
Start from right needle
position, zigzag sew at left.
Zigzag stitch
(Left)
Start from left needle position,
zigzag sew at right.
2 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium weight
and stretch fabrics), tape and
elastic
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
3 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcing of light and
medium weight fabrics
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
STITCH SETTING CHART
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Presser foot
Stitch
Stitch name
Applications
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcing of heavyweight
fabric
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcing of medium,
heavyweight and easily friable
fabrics or decorative stitching.
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforced seaming of stretch
fabric
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcing of medium stretch
fabric and heavyweight fabric,
decorative stitching
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric or decorative stitching
Overcasting
stitch
Stretch knit seam
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement and seaming
stretch fabric
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric
With side cutter
Straight stitch while cutting
fabrics
With side cutter
With side cutter
With side cutter
With side cutter
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Zigzag stitch while cutting
fabrics
Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
Piecing stitch
(Right)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch) left seam
allowance
Piecing stitch
(Middle)
Piecework/patchwork
Piecing stitch
(Left)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch) left seam
allowance
Hand-look
quilting
Quilting stitch made to look
like hand quilting stitch
Quilting
appliqué zigzag
stitch
Zigzag stitch for quilting and
sewing on appliqué quilt
pieces
Twin
needle
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
5.0
(3/16)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.8
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 2.5
(0 - 3/32)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
3.5
(1/8)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
NO
3.5
(1/8)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.5
(7/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
—
—
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
1.5
(1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
NO
Sewing S-69
STITCH SETTING CHART
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Presser foot
Stitch
Stitch name
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching binding
Quilting
stippling
Background quilting
Blind hem stitch
Hemming woven fabrics
Blind hem stitch
stretch
Hemming stretch fabric
Blanket stitch
Appliqués, decorative blanket
stitch
Shell tuck edge finish on
fabrics
Satin scallop
stitch
Decorating collar of blouse,
edge of handkerchief
Scallop stitch
Decorating collar of blouse,
edge of handkerchief
Patchwork join
stitch
Patchwork stitches, decorative
stitching
Patchwork
double overlock
stitch
Patchwork stitches, decorative
stitching
Couching stitch
Decorative stitching, attaching
cord and couching
Smocking stitch
Feather stitch
Smocking, decorative
stitching
Fagoting, decorative stitching
Fagoting cross
stitch
Fagoting, bridging and
decorative stitching
Tape attaching
Attaching tape to seam in
stretch fabric
Ladder stitch
Rick-rack stitch
Decorative
stitch
S-70
Applications
Quilting
appliqué stitch
Shell tuck edge
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Decorative stitching
Decorative top stitching
Decorative stitching
Twin
needle
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
1.5
(1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.8
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
7.0
(1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
00
3← - →3
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
00
3← - →3
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.1 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
7.0
(1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.2
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.2
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
5.5
(7/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
STITCH SETTING CHART
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Presser foot
Stitch
Stitch name
Applications
Serpentine
stitch
Decorative stitching and
attaching elastic
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching and
appliqué
Decorative
stippling stitch
Decorative stitching
Hemstitching
Decorative hems, triple
straight at left
Hemstitching
Decorative hems, triple
straight at center
Hemstitching
zigzag
Decorative hems, top stitching
Hemstitching
Decorative hems, lace
attaching pin stitch
Hemstitching
Hemstitching
Hemstitching
Hemstitching
Hemstitching
Hemstitching
Hemstitching
Decorative hems
Decorative hems daisy stitch
Heirloom, decorative hems
Heirloom, decorative hems
Heirloom, decorative hems
Heirloom, decorative hems
Heirloom, decorative hems
Honeycomb
stitch
Heirloom, decorative hems
Honeycomb
stitch
Heirloom, decorative hems
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative hems
Hemstitching
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Heirloom, decorative hems
Twin
needle
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
7.0
(1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
1.0
(1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
3.0
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Sewing S-71
STITCH SETTING CHART
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Presser foot
Stitch
Stitch name
Hemstitching
Hemstitching
Hemstitching
Hemstitching
Hemstitching
Hemstitching
Hemstitching
S-72
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Applications
Heirloom, decorative hems
Heirloom, decorative hems
Heirloom, decorative hems
Decorative hems and bridging
stitch
Decorative hems. Fagoting,
attaching ribbon
Decorative hems, smocking
Decorative hems, smocking
Narrow rounded
buttonhole
Buttonhole on light to medium
weight fabrics
Wide round
ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with extra space
for larger buttons
Tapered round
ended
buttonhole
Reinforced waist tapered
buttonholes
Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with vertical bar
tack in heavyweight fabrics
Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with bar tack
Round double
ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes for fine, medium
to heavyweight fabrics
Narrow squared
buttonhole
Buttonholes for light to
medium weight fabrics
Wide squared
buttonhole
Buttonholes with extra space
for larger decorative buttons
Stretch
buttonhole
Buttonholes for stretch or
woven fabrics
Heirloom
buttonhole
Buttonholes for heirloom and
stretch fabrics
Bound
buttonhole
The first step in making bound
buttonholes
Twin
needle
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
(J)
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
5.5
(7/32)
3.5 - 5.5
(1/8 - 7/32)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
5.5
(7/32)
3.5 - 5.5
(1/8 - 7/32)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
6.0
(15/64)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
1.0
(1/16)
0.5 - 2.0
(1/32 - 1/16)
NO
6.0
(15/64)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
1.5
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
NO
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 6.0
(0 - 15/64)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
STITCH SETTING CHART
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Presser foot
Stitch
Stitch name
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Applications
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
Twin
needle
Keyhole
buttonhole
Buttonholes in heavyweight or
thick fabrics for larger flat
buttons
7.0
(1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Tapered keyhole
buttonhole
Buttonholes in medium to
heavy weight fabrics for larger
flat buttons
7.0
(1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Keyhole
buttonhole
Buttonholes with vertical bar
tack for reinforcement in
heavyweight or thick fabrics
7.0
(1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Darning
Darning of medium weight
fabric
7.0
(1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 3/32)
NO
7.0
(1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 3/32)
NO
2.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
0.4
(1/64)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 4.5
(3/32 - 3/16)
—
—
NO
7.0
(1/4)
7.0 6.0 5.0
(1/4 15/64
3/16)
7.0
(1/4)
7.0 6.0 5.0
(1/4 15/64
3/16)
NO
Darning
Bar tack
Button sewing
Eyelet
Darning of heavyweight fabric
Reinforcement at opening of
pocket, etc.
Attaching buttons
For making eyelets, holes on
belts, etc.
Diagonally left
up (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
—
—
—
—
NO
Reverse
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
—
—
—
—
NO
Diagonally right
up (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
—
—
—
—
NO
Sideways to left
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
—
—
—
—
NO
Sideways to
right (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
—
—
—
—
NO
Diagonally left
down (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
—
—
—
—
NO
Forward
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
—
—
—
—
NO
Diagonally right
down (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
—
—
—
—
NO
Sideways to left
(Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
—
—
—
—
NO
Sideways to
right (Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
—
—
—
—
NO
Sewing S-73
STITCH SETTING CHART
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Presser foot
Stitch
Stitch name
Applications
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
Twin
needle
Forward
(Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
—
—
—
—
NO
Reverse
(Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
—
—
—
—
NO
Piecing stitch
(Middle)
Piecework/patchwork
—
—
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Piecing stitch
(Right)
Piecework/patchwork
6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) right
seam allowance
5.50
(7/32)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Piecing stitch
(Left)
Piecework/patchwork
6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left
seam allowance
1.50
(1/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hand-look
quilting
Quilting stitch made to look
like hand quilting stitch
3.50
(1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Basting stitch
Basting
3.50
(1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
20
(3/4)
5 - 30
(3/16 - 1-3/16)
NO
1.00
(1/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
3.50
(1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
NO
3.50
(1/8)
2.50 - 5.00
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.6
(1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
3.50
(1/8)
2.50 - 5.00
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.6
(1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Stem stitch
Reinforced stitching, sewing
and decorative applications
Quilting
appliqué zigzag
stitch
Zigzag stitch for quilting and
sewing on appliqué quilt
pieces
Zigzag stitch
(Right)
Start from right needle
position, zigzag sew at left
Zigzag stitch
(Left)
Start from left needle position,
zigzag sew at right
2 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium weight
and stretch fabrics), tape and
elastic
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
3 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting
appliqué stitch
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching binding
2.00
(1/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Shell tuck edge
Shell tuck edge finish on
fabrics
4.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
3.50
(1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
7.00
(1/4)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Blanket stitch
S-74
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Appliqués, decorative blanket
stitch
Quilting
stippling
Background quilting
Overcasting
stitch
Stretch knit seam
STITCH SETTING CHART
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Presser foot
Stitch
Stitch name
Tape attaching
Applications
Attaching tape to seam in
stretch fabric
Serpentine
stitch
Decorative stitching and
attaching elastic
Feather stitch
Fagoting, decorative stitching
Fagoting cross
stitch
Fagoting, bridging and
decorative stitching
Couching stitch
Decorative stitching, attaching
cord and couching
Patchwork
double overlock
stitch
Patchwork stitches, decorative
stitching
Smocking stitch
Smocking, decorative
stitching
Rick-rack stitch
Decorative top stitching
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching and
appliqué
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative hems
Hemstitching
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Decorative hems and bridging
stitch
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement and seaming
stretch fabric
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric or decorative stitching
Twin
needle
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
5.50
(7/32)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.2
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
4.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
6.00
(15/64)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.50
(7/32)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
6.00
(15/64)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
6.00
(15/64)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
4.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Sewing S-75
S Sewing
Chapter
3
Character/Decorative Stitches
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS ............................... 77
Selecting Decorative Stitch Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch
Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch
Patterns/Cross Stitch/Utility Decorative Stitch Patterns ...........78
Characters ................................................................................78
■ Deleting Characters ................................................................. 79
■ Adjusting the Character Spacing .............................................. 80
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS ................................... 81
Sewing Attractive Finishes .......................................................81
Basic Sewing .............................................................................81
Making Adjustments ................................................................82
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS................................... 84
■ Key Functions........................................................................... 84
Changing the Size .....................................................................86
Changing the Length (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ......87
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image .............................................87
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ........................................87
Sewing a Pattern Continuously ................................................87
Changing Thread Density (for Satin Stitch Patterns Only) .......88
Returning to the Beginning of the Pattern.................................88
Checking the Image ..................................................................89
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS............................ 90
Before Combining .....................................................................90
Combining Various Stitch Patterns ..........................................90
Combining Large and Small Stitch Patterns .............................91
Combining Horizontal Mirror Image Stitch Patterns ...............92
Combining Stitch Patterns of Different Length .........................92
Making Step Stitch Patterns
(for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) .......................................93
■ More Examples......................................................................... 94
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ......................... 95
Stitch Data Precautions ............................................................95
■ Types of Stitch Data that can be Used ..................................... 95
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used........................ 95
■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following
Specifications can be Used....................................................... 95
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data ...... 95
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ......................96
■ If the Memory is Full ................................................................ 96
Saving Stitch Patterns to USB Media.........................................97
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Computer.....................................98
Retrieving Stitch Patterns from the Machine’s Memory ............99
Recalling from USB Media ......................................................100
Recalling from the Computer..................................................101
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
Press
S
to display the screen below. There are 7 categories of Character/Decorative stitch patterns.
a
b
d
Character/Decorative Stitches
c
e
f
g
h
i
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
j
Decorative stitch patterns
7mm decorative stitch patterns. You can set stitch length and width.
Satin stitch patterns
7mm satin stitch patterns. You can set stitch length and width.
Cross stitch
Utility decorative stitch patterns
Characters (Gothic font, Handwriting font, Outline, Cyrillic font, Japanese font)
Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (see page S-99)
Patterns saved in USB media (see page S-100)
Patterns saved on the computer (see page S-101)
.
Note
• If the screen is locked (
key can be operated.
), unlock the screen by pressing
3
. While the screen is locked, no other
Sewing S-77
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
Selecting Decorative Stitch
Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch
Patterns/Satin Stitch
Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch
Patterns/Cross Stitch/Utility
Decorative Stitch Patterns
Characters
Example: Entering “Blue Sky”.
a
Select the category of the pattern you want
to sew.
b
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want
to sew.
*
Press
to view the next page.
*
Press
to view the previous page.
*
Touch the bar that appears between
leap multiple pages at one time.
*
To select a different stitch pattern, press
and
to
a
Press
.
b
Press
,
,
,
or
to select a font.
.
When the current stitch pattern is erased, select the
new stitch pattern.
Memo
• There are four fonts for alphabet character
stitching, and a font for Japanese character
stitching. Refer to the Quick Reference
Guide for the details about the different font
selections available.
c
→ The selected pattern is displayed.
S-78
Press a tab to change the selection screens.
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
d
Press
and then enter “B”.
h
Press
and then enter “ky”.
S
3
Press
and then enter “lue”.
*
If you want to continue entering characters in a
different font, press
step b.
, and then repeat from
■ Deleting Characters
a
f
Press
g
Press
Press
to delete the last character.
to enter a space.
Memo
again and enter “S”.
• Characters are deleted individually starting
with the last character entered.
b
*
Select the correct character.
Continually press
and all characters will be
deleted.
a
a Space is a jumping stitch
* Remove the jumping stitches after sewing.
Sewing S-79
Character/Decorative Stitches
e
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
■ Adjusting the Character Spacing
The space between the characters can be adjusted.
a
*
Press
Press
b
Press
or
to adjust character spacing.
.
to display
on the screen.
*
Press
to increase the character spacing and
press
to decrease the character spacing.
Example:
→ The character spacing window appears.
*
Each setting equals a specific distance between
characters.
Value
mm
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0
0.18
0.36
0.54
0.72
0.9
1.08
1.26
1.44
1.62
1.8
Memo
• The default setting is “0”. No number less
than “0” can be set.
• Changing character spacing by this
method, pertains to all characters. Spacing
changes are valid not only while entering
characters but also before and after the
entering of characters.
S-80
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS
S
Sewing Attractive Finishes
Note
• Other factors, such as fabric thickness, stabilizer material, etc., also have an effect on the stitch, so
you should always sew a few trial stitches before beginning your project.
• When sewing satin stitch patterns, there may be shrinking or bunching of stitches, so be sure to
attach a stabilizer material.
• Guide the fabric with your hand to keep the fabric feeding straight and even during sewing.
Fabric
When sewing on stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics, or fabrics with coarse weaves, attach stabilizer on the
wrong side of the fabric. If you do not wish to do so, place the fabric on a thin paper such as tracing paper.
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
c Thin paper
Thread
#50 - #60
Needle
With lightweight, regular, or stretch fabrics: the Ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14
With heavyweight fabrics: home sewing machine needle 90/14
Presser foot
Monogramming foot “N”.
Using another presser foot may give inferior results.
Basic Sewing
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Attach monogramming foot “N”.
c
Place the fabric under the presser foot, pull
the upper thread out to the side, and then
lower the presser foot.
d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
sewing.
CAUTION
• When sewing 7 mm satin stitch patterns and
the stitches are bunched, lengthen the stitch
length. If you continue sewing when the
stitches are bunched, the needle may bend or
break (“Setting the Stitch Length” on
page S-10).
Sewing S-81
Character/Decorative Stitches
To achieve attractive results when sewing character/decorative stitches, check the table below for the
proper fabric/thread/needle combinations.
3
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS
Memo
Note
• If the fabric is pulled or pushed during
sewing, the pattern may not turn out
correctly. Also, depending on the pattern,
there may be movement to the left and right
as well as front and back. Guide the fabric
with your hand to keep the fabric feeding
straight and even during sewing.
• When sewing some patterns, the needle will
temporarily pause in the raised position
while the fabric is fed due to the operation
of the needle bar separation mechanism
which is used in this machine. At such
times, a clicking sound different from the
sound generated during sewing will be
heard. This sound is normal and is not the
sign of a malfunction.
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop
sewing.
f
Press the “Reverse Stitch” button or
“Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew
reinforcement stitches.
Making Adjustments
Your stitch pattern may sometimes turn out poorly,
depending on the type or thickness of fabric, the
stabilizer material used, sewing speed, etc. If your
sewing does not turn out well, sew trial stitches
using the same conditions as the real sewing, and
adjust the stitch pattern as explained below. If the
pattern does not turn out well even after making
adjustments based on the
pattern, make
adjustments for each pattern individually.
Memo
• When sewing character stitches, the
machine automatically sews reinforcement
stitches at the beginning and end of each
character.
• When sewing is completed, trim any excess
thread between letters.
S-82
a
Press
and select
on 19/24.
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS
b
Attach monogramming foot “N” and sew
the pattern.
*
If the pattern is bunched:
Press
in the “Fine Adjust Verti.” display.
→ The displayed value increases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will lengthen.
If the pattern has gaps:
Press
in the “Fine Adjust Verti.” display.
→ The displayed value decreases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will shorten.
c
Compare the finished pattern to the
illustration of the correct pattern below.
*
If the pattern is skewed to the left:
Press
d
Press
, and then adjust the pattern
in the “Fine Adjust Horiz.” display.
→ The displayed value increases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will slide to the right.
with the “Fine Adjust Verti.” or “Fine
Adjust Horiz.” displays.
*
If the pattern is skewed to the right:
Press
in the “Fine Adjust Horiz.” display.
→ The displayed value decreases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will slide to the left.
e
*
Sew the stitch pattern again.
If the stitch pattern still comes out poorly, make
adjustments again. Adjust until the stitch pattern
comes out correctly.
Memo
• You can sew with the setting screen on the
display.
f
Press
to return to the original screen.
Sewing S-83
3
Character/Decorative Stitches
*
S
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
■ Key Functions
You can create just the finish you want using the editing functions. Make patterns larger or smaller, make mirror
images, etc.
Note
• Some editing functions cannot be used with certain stitch patterns. Only the functions for the
displayed keys are available when a pattern is selected.
u
t
s
r
a
b
c
d
e
l
f
i
g
h
k
j
y
x
v
w
S-84
m
q
p
o
n
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
No.
a
Display
Key Name
Pattern display size
Explanation
Page
S-21
Show the approximate size of the pattern selected.
: Nearly the same size as the sewn pattern
3
: 1/2 the size of the sewn pattern
: 1/4 the size of the sewn pattern
Pivot key
Press this key to select the pivot setting. When the pivot setting is
selected, stopping the machine lowers the needle and slightly raises the
presser foot automatically. In addition, when sewing is restarted, the
presser foot is automatically lowered.
• If this key appears as
S-15
, the pivot function cannot be used.
• Be sure the “Needle Position - UP/DOWN” of Machine Settings is set to
the down position.
c
Free motion mode
key
Press this key to enter free motion sewing mode.
The feed dog is lowered and presser foot is raised to a height appropriate
for free motion quilting.
S-40
d
Automatic
reinforcement stitch
key
Press this key to turn on the automatic reinforcement stitching mode.
S-5
e
Automatic thread
cutting key
Press this key to turn on the automatic thread cutting mode.
S-13
f
Horizontal mirror
image key
After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to create a horizontal mirror
image of the stitch pattern.
S-87
g
Stitch width and
stitch length key
Shows the stitch width and stitch length of the selected stitch pattern. The
machine default settings are highlighted.
S-10 to
S-12
h
Thread tension key
Shows the thread tension setting for the selected stitch pattern. The
machine default settings are highlighted
i
Memory key
Use this key to save stitch pattern combinations.
j
Elongation key
When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, press this key to choose
from 5 automatic length settings, without changing the stitch zigzag width
or stitch length settings.
k
Needle mode
selection key
(Single/Double)
Press this key to choose single needle sewing or twin needle sewing.
l
Sensor function key
Press this key to use the sensor function.
m
Size selection key
Use this key to select the size of the stitch pattern (large, small).
S-86
n
Image key
Press this key to display an enlarged image of the selected stitch pattern.
S-89
o
Vertical mirror image
key
After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to create a vertical mirror
image of the stitch pattern.
S-87
p
Thread density key
After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to change the thread density
of the pattern.
S-88
q
Delete key
When you make a mistake selecting a stitch pattern, use this key to delete
the mistake. When you make a mistake in combining stitch patterns, use
this key to delete stitch patterns.
S-78,
S-79
r
Single/Repeat sewing Press this key to choose single stitches or continuous stitches.
key
S-87
s
Back to beginning key When sewing is stopped, press this key to return to the beginning of the
pattern.
S-88
t
Home page screen
key
(For embroidery and sewing machine only)
Press this key to return to the home page screen.
u
Screen lock key
Press this key to lock the screen. When the screen is locked, the various
settings, such as the stitch width and stitch length, are locked and cannot
be changed. Press this key again to unlock the settings.
S-12
S-96 to S-97
S-87
“Basic
operations”
–
S-18
Sewing S-85
Character/Decorative Stitches
* The actual size of the sewn pattern may differ depending on the type of
fabric and thread that is used.
b
S
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
No.
Display
Key Name
Explanation
Page
v
Guideline marker key Press this key to display the guideline marker along the sewing line. The
(For models equipped guideline marker makes it easier to align stitches with the fabric edge or
with the guideline
other marker on the fabric.
marker)
S-14
w
“L/R SHIFT” key
S-11
x
Character spacing
key
Press this key to change the spacing of character patterns.
S-80
y
Function page key
Press this key to show all the functions available in this screen.
S-80
Press
to shift the stitch pattern to the right or press
to shift the
pattern to the left. This feature is not available on all patterns. Only those
applicable will be shifted. The machine default setting is highlighted.
Changing the Size
Select a stitch pattern, then press
to change the size of the stitch pattern. The stitch pattern will be
sewn in the size highlighted on the key.
Memo
• If you continue entering stitch patterns after changing the size, those patterns will also be sewn in that
size.
• You cannot change the size of combined stitch patterns once the stitch pattern is entered.
Actual Stitch Pattern Size
*
S-86
The size differs depending on the fabric and threads.
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
Changing the Length (for 7mm
Satin Stitch Patterns Only)
Creating a Horizontal Mirror
Image
When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, press
To create a horizontal mirror image, select a stitch
to choose from 5 automatic length settings,
without changing the stitch zigzag width or stitch
length settings.
pattern then press
Sewing a Pattern Continuously
To create a vertical mirror image, select a stitch
pattern then press
.
3
Character/Decorative Stitches
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image
.
S
Press
to select continuous sewing or single
stitch sewing.
Memo
• To finish a complete motif while sewing the
pattern continuously, you can press the
key while sewing. The machine will
automatically stop when the motif is
finished.
Sewing S-87
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
Changing Thread Density
(for Satin Stitch Patterns Only)
After selecting a satin stitch pattern, press
select your preferred thread density.
Returning to the Beginning of the
Pattern
to
When sewing character/decorative stitches, you
can return to the beginning of the pattern after trial
sewing or when the stitching is sewn incorrectly.
a
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the
machine, and then press
CAUTION
→ Sewing returns to the beginning of the selected
pattern (“W”) from the point where sewing was
stopped.
• If the stitches bunch when thread density is
changed to
.
Memo
• If this key is pressed when sewing is
stopped, patterns can be added at the end
of a combined stitch pattern. (In this
example, “!” is added.)
, return the thread density to
. If you continue sewing when the stitches
are bunched, the needle may bend or break.
Memo
• Even if you select a new pattern after
changing the thread density, the thread
density remains the same until you change
it.
• You cannot change thread density for a
combined pattern after additional patterns
are added.
b
S-88
Press the “Start/Stop” button to continue
sewing.
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
Checking the Image
d
b
Press
/
/
to view any part of
to change the thread color in
the image to red, blue, or black.
e
Press
to return to the original screen.
Memo
→ The color changes every time you press the button.
Press
3
.
→ An image of the selected pattern is displayed.
c
S
Character/Decorative Stitches
Press
/
the image that extends out of the viewable
display area.
You can display an approximate size image of the
selected stitch pattern. You can also check and
change the colors of the image on the screen.
a
Use
• You can also sew from this screen when the
presser foot symbol is displayed.
• Image of some patterns will display in
default size only.
to display the enlarged image.
Sewing S-89
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
You can combine many varieties of stitch patterns, such as character stitches, cross stitches or satin
stitches. You can also combine stitch patterns of different sizes, mirror image stitch patterns, and others.
Before Combining
Single stitch sewing is automatically selected for sewing combined patterns. If you want to sew the
pattern continuously, press
after finishing the stitch pattern combination.
When changing sizes, creating mirror images, or making other adjustments to a combined stitch pattern,
be sure to edit the selected stitch pattern before selecting the next one. You cannot edit a stitch pattern
once the next stitch pattern is selected.
Combining Various Stitch
Patterns
b
Select
.
c
Press
.
Example:
a
Press
.
→ The display returns to the stitch selection screen.
d
S-90
Press
.
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
e
Select
a
.
Press
.
S
3
→ The large size stitch will be selected.
Press
again, then press
to select
the small size.
f
Press
g
Press
to sew the pattern continuously.
.
→ The pattern is displayed in a smaller size.
c
Press
to sew continuously.
Memo
• Patterns are deleted individually starting
with the last pattern entered by pressing
.
Combining Large and Small
Stitch Patterns
→ The entered pattern is repeated.
Example:
Sewing S-91
Character/Decorative Stitches
b
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
Combining Horizontal Mirror
Image Stitch Patterns
Example:
a
Press
Combining Stitch Patterns of
Different Length
Example:
a
.
Press
, then press
once.
→ The length of the image is set to
b
Press
again, then press
.
b
Select
.
again, then press
3 times.
→ The pattern is flipped along a vertical axis.
c
Press
.
→ The length of the image is set to
→ The entered pattern is repeated.
S-92
.
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
c
Press
Example:
.
S
3
Press
.
b
Press
.
Character/Decorative Stitches
a
→ The entered pattern is repeated.
Making Step Stitch Patterns (for
7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only)
You can use the
keys with 7mm satin
stitch patterns to create a step effect.
Stitch patterns sewn so that they create a step
effect are called step stitch patterns.
*
Press
→ The next stitch pattern will move to the right.
c
Press
again.
d
Press
.
to move the stitch pattern a distance
equal to half of the stitch pattern’s size to the left.
*
Press
to move the stitch pattern a distance
equal to half of the stitch pattern’s size to the right.
→ The next stitch pattern will move to the left.
Sewing S-93
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
e
Press
.
→ The entered pattern is repeated.
■ More Examples
→
→
→
→
.
Press
→
→
→
→
→
S-94
→
→
→
Press
→
→
Press
→
Press
.
→
→
→
→
→
→
.
.
→
→
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
S
Stitch Data Precautions
■ Types of Stitch Data that can be Used
• In the Character/Decorative Stitch memory, “.pmv”, “.pmx” and “.pmu” stitch data files can be used with this
machine. “.pmu” stitch data files can be retrieved; however, when the machine is used to save the file, it is
saved as a “.pmv” stitch data file. Using data other than that created using this machine or the machine which
create “.pmu” data file, may cause the machine to malfunction.
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used
Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB external media. Use external media that meets the following
specifications.
• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)
• USB Floppy disk drive
Stitch data can be recalled only from;
• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives
You can also use the following types of media with the USB Memory Card Reader/USB card writer module.
• Secure Digital (SD) Card
• CompactFlash
• Memory Stick
• Smart Media
• Multi Media Card (MMC)
• xD-Picture Card
Note
• Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website for more details.
• The access lamp will begin blinking after inserting USB Devices/Media, and it will take about 5 to 6
seconds to recognize the Devices/Media. (Time will differ depending on the USB Device/Media).
• To create file folders, use a computer.
■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following Specifications can be
Used
• Compatible models:
IBM PC with a USB port as standard equipment
IBM PC-compatible computer equipped with a USB port as standard equipment
• Compatible operating systems:
Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data
• If the name of the stitch data file/folder cannot be identified, for example, because the name contains special
characters, the file/folder is not displayed. If this occurs, change the name of the file/folder. We recommend
using the 26 letters of the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9, “-”, and “_”.
• Stitch data in a folder created in USB media can be retrieved.
• Do not create folders in “Removable Disk” on a computer. If stitch data is stored in a folder in “Removable
Disk”, that stitch data cannot be retrieved by the machine.
Sewing S-95
Character/Decorative Stitches
Observe the following precautions when using stitch data other than that created and saved in this
machine.
3
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Saving Stitch Patterns in the
Machine’s Memory
You can save often used stitch patterns in the
machine’s memory. A total of about 1 MB of stitch
patterns can be saved in the machine’s memory.
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the stitch pattern you are saving.
■ If the Memory is Full
If the following screen appears while you are trying
to save a pattern on the machine’s memory, the
memory is too full to hold the currently selected
stitch pattern. To save the stitch pattern in the
machine’s memory, you have to delete a previously
saved stitch pattern.
a
Press
*
Press
saving.
.
to return to the original screen without
Memo
• It takes a few seconds to save a stitch
pattern.
• See page S-99 for information on retrieving
a saved stitch pattern.
a
Press
.
b
Choose a stitch pattern to delete.
*
b
*
Press
Press
saving.
.
Press
pattern.
if you decide not to delete the stitch
a
to return to the original screen without
a Pockets holding saved stitch patterns
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern
is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
S-96
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
c
Press
.
Saving Stitch Patterns to USB
Media
When sending stitch patterns from the machine to
USB media, plug the USB media into the
machine’s top USB port.
• USB media is commercially available, but
some USB media may not be usable with
this machine. Please visit our website for
more details.
• Depending on the type of USB media being
used, either directly plug the USB device
into the machine’s USB port or plug the
USB media Reader/Writer into the
machine’s USB port.
• The USB media can be inserted or removed
at any time except when saving or deleting.
→ A confirmation message appears.
d
*
Press
.
If you decide not to delete the stitch pattern, press
.
a
Press
.
→ The machine deletes the stitch pattern, then
automatically saves the new stitch pattern.
Sewing S-97
3
Character/Decorative Stitches
Memo
S
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
b
Insert the USB media into the USB port on
the machine.
Saving Stitch Patterns in the
Computer
Using the included USB cable, the machine can
be connected to your computer, and the stitch
patterns can be temporarily retrieved from and
saved in the “Removable Disk” folder in your
computer. A total of about 3 MB of stitch patterns
can be saved in the “Removable Disk”, but the
saved stitch patterns are deleted when the
machine is turned OFF.
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the stitch pattern you are saving.
a USB port
b USB media
Note
• The processing speed may vary by quantity
of data.
• Two USB media cannot be used with this
machine at the same time. If two USB
media are inserted, only the USB media
inserted first is detected.
c
*
Press
Press
saving.
.
a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine.
b
Turn on your computer and select
“Computer (My computer)”.
*
The USB cable can be plugged into the USB ports
on the computer and machine whether or not they
are turned on.
to return to the original screen without
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern
is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
Note
• Do not insert or remove USB media while
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
some or all of the pattern you are saving.
a USB port for computer
b USB cable connector
→ The “Removable Disk” icon will appear in
“Computer (My computer)” on the computer.
Note
• The connectors on the USB cable can only
be inserted into a port in one direction. If it
is difficult to insert the connector, do not
insert it with force and check the orientation
of the connector.
• For details on the position of the USB port
on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the
instruction manual for the corresponding
equipment.
S-98
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
c
Press
.
Retrieving Stitch Patterns from
the Machine’s Memory
a
Press
3
.
d
*
Press
Press
saving.
.
to return to the original screen without
*
If the entire saved stitch pattern is not displayed,
press the thumbnail.
*
Press
saving.
Select the stitch pattern’s .pmv file and
copy the file to the computer.
a Saved stitch patterns
c
*
Note
• Do not turn off the machine while the
“Saving” screen is showing. You may lose
the data.
to return to the original screen without
a
→ The stitch pattern will be temporarily saved to
“Removable Disk” under “Computer (My
computer)”.
e
Choose a stitch pattern to retrieve.
Press
Press
.
to delete the stitch pattern.
→ The selected stitch pattern is retrieved and the
sewing screen will be displayed.
Sewing S-99
Character/Decorative Stitches
→ The pocket selection screen appears.
b
S
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Recalling from USB Media
You can recall a specific stitch pattern from either
direct USB media or a folder in the USB media. If
the stitch pattern is in a folder, check each folder
to find the stitch pattern.
a
c
Press
when there is a subfolder to
sort two or more stitch patterns to USB
media, the stitch pattern in the subfolder is
displayed.
*
Press
recalling.
to return to the original screen without
Insert the USB Media into the USB port on
the machine (see page S-97).
a
→ Stitch patterns and a subfolder within a folder are
displayed. Select the folder to display the patterns in
it.
a USB port
b USB media
b
Press
.
c
→ Stitch patterns and a folder in a top folder are
displayed.
b
a Folder name
b Stitch patterns in a folder show only the first
pattern of any combined patterns.
c Path
*
Press
*
Use the computer to create folders. Folders cannot
be created with the machine.
d
S-100
to return to the previous folder.
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want
to recall.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
e
*
Press
.
c
Move/copy the pattern data to “Removable
Disk”.
S
Press
to delete the stitch pattern. The pattern
will be deleted from the USB media.
3
Note
• While data is being written, do not
disconnect the USB cable.
• Do not create folders within “Removable
Disk”. Since folders are not displayed, stitch
pattern data within folders cannot be
recalled.
→ The selected stitch pattern is recalled and the sewing
screen will be displayed.
Recalling from the Computer
a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine (see page S-98).
b
On the computer, open “Computer (My
computer)” then go to “Removable Disk”.
d
Press
.
→ The stitch patterns in the computer are displayed on
the selection screen.
e
*
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want
to recall.
Press
recalling.
to return to the original screen without
Sewing S-101
Character/Decorative Stitches
→ Stitch pattern data in “Removable Disk” is written to
the machine.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
f
Press
*
.
Press
to delete the stitch pattern.
The pattern will be deleted from the “Removable
Disk” folder in your computer.
→ The selected stitch pattern is recalled and the sewing
screen will be displayed.
Note
• The pattern recalled from the computer is
only temporarily written to the machine. It is
erased from the machine when the machine
is turned off. If you wish to keep the stitch
pattern, store it in the machine (“Saving
Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory”
on page S-96).
S-102
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
S
3
Character/Decorative Stitches
Sewing S-103
S Sewing
Chapter
4
How to Create Bobbin Work
(Sewing)
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK........................................ 105
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK......................... 105
Required Materials..................................................................105
■
■
■
■
■
■
Bobbin case and bobbin cover ............................................... 105
Lower thread.......................................................................... 106
Upper thread ......................................................................... 106
Needle ................................................................................... 106
Presser foot ............................................................................ 106
Fabric ..................................................................................... 106
Upper Threading.....................................................................106
Preparing the Bobbin Thread ..................................................107
■ When tension is applied to the bobbin thread........................ 109
■ When tension is not applied to the bobbin thread ................. 110
CREATING BOBBIN WORK .................................. 111
Positioning the Fabric and Sewing ..........................................111
■ Finishing the thread ends ....................................................... 113
Bobbin Work Free Motion Sewing ..........................................113
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION.................... 114
■ Adjusting the upper thread tension ........................................ 114
■ Adjusting the tension of the bobbin thread ............................ 114
TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................... 115
■ The thread was activated and the bobbin thread is caught
inside the machine ................................................................. 115
■ Correcting bobbin work tension ............................................ 115
■ The bobbin thread catches on the tension spring
of the bobbin case.................................................................. 115
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK
Beautiful embroidery work, with a three-dimensional appearance, can be created by winding the bobbin
with medium to heavy weight thread or ribbon, which is too thick to be threaded through the machine’s
needle. The decorative thread or ribbon will stitch out on the underneath side of fabric while sewing with
the fabric wrong side facing up.
S
4
How to Create Bobbin Work (Sewing)
1. Utility stitches
2. Decorative stitches
3. Free motion sewing
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
Required Materials
■ Bobbin case and bobbin cover
Bobbin cover
There are two small v-shaped tabs on the back of
the bobbin cover as indicated by the letter “B”.
The tabs help hold the bobbin in place so it does
not lift up while thick thread is being pulled
through.
Bobbin case (gray)
There is a notch at the location indicated by the
letter “A”.
Sewing S-105
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
■ Lower thread
We recommend the following types of threads for
bobbin work.
No.5 or finer hand embroidery
thread or decorative thread
■ Presser foot
Utility stitches or decorative stitches:
Monogramming foot “N”
Free motion sewing:
Free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
Flexible woven ribbon
Fine embroidery ribbon (silk or
silk-like material) (3.5 mm (approx.
1/8 inch) or less is recommended)
* When wide ribbon or heavy weight threads are being used, we
recommend test sewing with the thread through and also
bypassing the bobbin case tension to see which gives the best
stitching results.
If wide ribbon such as 3.5mm (approx. 1/8 inch) is to be used,
we recommend that bobbin case tension not be applied. Refer
to page S-110 for more detailed instructions.
■ Fabric
Be sure to sew trial stitches on a piece of scrap
fabric, which includes the same threads and fabric
as what is being used in your project.
Note
• The sewing results may be affected by the
type of fabric used. Before sewing your
project, be sure to sew trial stitches on a
piece of scrap fabric that is the same as the
fabric used in the project.
Note
• Do not use thread heavier than No.5 hand
embroidery thread.
• Some threads may not be appropriate for
bobbin work. Be sure to sew trial stitches
before sewing on your project.
■ Upper thread
Sewing machine embroidery thread (polyester
thread) or monofilament (transparent nylon) thread.
If you do not wish for the upper thread to be visible,
we recommend using transparent nylon
monofilament thread or polyester light weight
thread (50wt. or above) that is the same color as the
lower thread.
■ Needle
Use a needle appropriate for the upper thread and
fabric being used. Refer to “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” of “Basic operations”.
S-106
Upper Threading
a
Install a needle appropriate for the upper
thread and fabric to be used.
For details on installing the needle, refer to
“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” of “Basic operations”.
b
Attach the presser foot.
c
Thread the machine with the upper thread.
For details on threading the machine, refer to
“Upper Threading” of “Basic operations”.
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
Preparing the Bobbin Thread
In order to create bobbin work, the bobbin case
must be replaced with the one for bobbin work.
f
Wipe the bobbin case (gray) with a soft lint
free cloth to clean it.
g
Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark
on the bobbin case aligns with the ● mark
on the machine.
Before creating bobbin work, clean the bobbin case
and the race.
Raise the needle and presser foot, and then
turn off the machine.
b
Remove the flat bed attachment.
c
Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover,
and then slide it toward you to remove it.
a
b
a
a Needle plate cover
d
Align the S and ● marks.
Remove the bobbin case.
a Bobbin case
e
*
b
Use the cleaning brush included with the
machine or a vacuum cleaner to remove
any lint and dust from the race and its
surrounding area.
a S mark on the bobbin case
b ● mark on the machine
c Bobbin case
Note
• The bobbin case (gray) cannot be used for
sewing in any way other than bobbin work.
After sewing bobbin work, refer back to the
steps in “Preparing the Bobbin Thread” on
page S-107 for removing and cleaning the
bobbin case (gray), and then reinstall the
standard bobbin case.
CAUTION
a Cleaning brush
b Race
• Be sure to use the bobbin case (gray) when
creating bobbin work. Using any other bobbin
case may result in the thread becoming
tangled or damage to the machine.
• Make sure that the bobbin case is correctly
installed. If the bobbin case is incorrectly
installed, the thread may become tangled or
the machine may be damaged.
Sewing S-107
4
How to Create Bobbin Work (Sewing)
a
S
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
h
Install the needle plate cover.
CAUTION
For details on installing the needle plate cover,
refer to “Cleaning the Race” of “Appendix”.
• Use a bobbin thread that has been correctly
wound. Otherwise, the needle may break or
the thread tension will be incorrect.
a Needle plate cover
i
Install the flat bed attachment.
j
Insert the thread tail from the spool of
thread through the hole in the bobbin from
the inside to the outside. Hold the thread
tail while winding the thread around the
bobbin by hand. After winding the bobbin
so it is filled as shown below (about 80%),
cut the thread.
• The included bobbin was designed specifically
for this sewing machine. If bobbins from other
models are used, the machine will not operate
correctly. Use only the included bobbin or
bobbins of the same type (part code:
X52800-150).
*
a
b
c
Actual size
This model
Other models
11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)
Note
• Slowly and evenly wind the thread around
the bobbin.
• For best results, wind the bobbin so the
thread is snug and not twisted.
k
Using scissors carefully trim the thread tail
as close to the bobbin as possible.
a Beginning of wound thread
CAUTION
• If thread extends beyond the top of the bobbin
too much, the thread may become tangled or
the needle may break.
S-108
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
Memo
• If inserting thread tail through bobbin hole is
difficult, bobbin can be wound by holding
the tail and wrapping thread around inside
base. Then carefully trim thread tail so it
does not extend from the side of the
bobbin.
Install the bobbin wound with thread.
Whether or not tension should be applied to the
bobbin thread depends on the type of thread being
used.
■ When tension is applied to the
bobbin thread
Insert bobbin into bobbin case so the thread
unwinds from the left side.
Then correctly pass the thread through the tension
spring as shown below.
a Tension spring
Sewing S-109
S
4
How to Create Bobbin Work (Sewing)
l
CAUTION
• When winding the bobbin, make sure the
thread is not frayed. Sewing with frayed
thread may result in the thread catching on
the tension spring of the bobbin case, the
thread completely becoming tangled or
damage to the machine.
• Do not guide the bobbin thread completely
through the groove in the needle plate cover,
otherwise the lower threading cannot be done
correctly. Thread only as far as shown below.
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
■ When tension is not applied to the
bobbin thread
If the bobbin thread in the trial stitching is too tight
and adjusting the bobbin case tension does not help,
do not pass the thread through the tension spring.
p
Insert tweezers through bobbin thread loop
and pull bobbin thread above the needle
plate.
q
Align the upper thread and bobbin thread,
and then pull out about 10 cm (approx.
4 inches) of the threads and pass them
under the presser foot toward the rear of
the machine.
r
Install the bobbin cover with tabs.
Hold the bobbin with your left hand so the thread
unwinds from the right side and hold the end of the
thread with your right hand.
m
Pull out about 8 cm (approx. 3 inches) of
bobbin thread.
Lightly hold the end of the upper thread
n
while turning the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) until the mark on the
handwheel aligns with the center top of
machine.
o
Gently pull the upper thread to bring the
bobbin thread up through the needle plate.
→ A loop of the bobbin thread comes out through the
hole in the needle plate.
S-110
a Bobbin cover
→ This completes the upper and lower threading.
CAUTION
• When creating bobbin work, use the bobbin
cover with tabs, otherwise the thread may
become tangled or the needle may break.
CREATING BOBBIN WORK
CREATING BOBBIN WORK
Positioning the Fabric and Sewing
Increase the upper thread tension. Upper
c
thread tension setting between 6 and 8 is
recommended for bobbin work.
• Recommended stitches for bobbin work are
open “airy” type stitches.
• Be sure to sew trial stitches using same
fabric and threads as project in order to
check the sewing results.
• The bobbin thread may become tangled
due to the type of pattern and thread that
are being used. Since this may cause the
needle to break, immediately stop sewing if
this occurs. Turn off the machine and cut
out the tangled thread with scissors. Then,
clean the race and bobbin case as
described in “Fabric is caught in the
machine and cannot be removed” of
“Appendix”.
a
b
Note
• Before sewing, check that there is enough
thread on the bobbin.
d
Make sure the automatic thread cutting
(
) and automatic reinforcement
stitching (
) have been turned off.
CAUTION
Turn on the machine.
• Before sewing, make sure the automatic thread
cutting has been turned off. If sewing is started with
automatic thread cutting turned on, the thread may
become tangled or the machine may be damaged.
Select a stitch in the Utility and Decorative
Stitches mode. For this example, press
.
e
Place stabilizer on top (wrong side) of the
fabric.
Memo
• For best results, select a longer stitch length
and a wider stitch width. Depending on the
selected stitch, it may not be possible to
change the stitch length and stitch width
settings.
Note
• Type and weight of stabilizer will depend on
fabric and thread being used.
f
If thread is too thick to pull through fabric
to machine surface use an awl to punch a
small hole in the fabric at the beginning of
stitching so the bobbin thread can be fed
through the opening.
g
Press
• Depending on the fabric, bunched stitches
may result. We recommend selecting a
simple stitch and sewing trial stitches to
check the sewing results.
Examples of simple stitches:
,
,
.
→ The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked.
Sewing S-111
4
How to Create Bobbin Work (Sewing)
For details on adjusting the upper thread tension,
refer to “Setting the Thread Tension” on
page S-12.
Note
S
CREATING BOBBIN WORK
h
i
Use the presser foot lever to raise the
presser foot.
Note
With the wrong side facing up, place the
fabric under the presser foot.
• If the bobbin thread does not come up, hold
the upper thread as shown below to pull up
the bobbin thread.
a Upper thread
a Wrong side of fabric
j
l
Turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to feed the needle into
the fabric or punched hole. Position the
upper thread over the presser foot and
lightly hold, and then lower the presser foot
lever.
Raise the presser foot lever, and then use
tweezers to pull up the bobbin thread and
bring the end of the thread to the top of the
fabric.
Note
• Pull the thread while holding down the
fabric so it does not move out of place.
m
Align the upper thread and bobbin thread,
and then pass them under the presser foot
toward the rear of the machine.
n
While gently holding threads at the rear of
the machine, turn the handwheel to feed
the needle into the fabric or punched hole
again, and then lower the presser foot lever.
o
Press
p
Select a low speed, gently hold the threads
behind the presser foot and start sewing.
Threads can be released after several
stitches have been made.
a Punched hole
b Upper thread over the presser foot
k
Pulling the upper thread gently, turn the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
until the mark on the handwheel aligns with
the center top of machine.
on lower part of LCD screen.
→ All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and
the previous screen is displayed.
→ A loop of the bobbin thread comes out through the
hole in the fabric.
S-112
CREATING BOBBIN WORK
q
When you have reached the end of the
stitching area, stop the machine.
Note
• If it is difficult to place bobbin thread
through the eye of a hand sewing needle,
use a ribbon embroidery needle to pull the
thread to the wrong side of the fabric.
Otherwise, use an awl to pull up the bobbin
thread.
Note
r
Raise the needle and presser foot.
s
Leaving about 10 cm (approx. 4 inches) of
thread at the ends, use scissors to cut the
threads.
b
Working from the wrong side of the fabric,
tie the bobbin and upper threads together
by hand. Cut away excess threads with
scissors.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
Note
• To ensure threads do not come undone
after being tied place a drop of fabric glue
on knots.
a 10 cm (approx. 4 inches)
Note
c
• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button to
cut the threads, otherwise the machine may
be damaged.
For more details, refer to “ADJUSTING THE
THREAD TENSION” on page S-114.
■ Finishing the thread ends
a
At the end of the stitching, use a hand
sewing needle to bring the bobbin thread
up to the wrong side of the fabric.
If the desired results could not be achieved,
adjust the tension of the bobbin thread and
of the upper thread, and then try sewing the
stitching again.
Bobbin Work Free Motion
Sewing
If so desired, use a template or draw your design
on the stabilizer to allow for ease of stitching.
Remember, your stitches with your decorative
thread will be on the underneath right side of your
fabric and the stabilizer will be on the top wrong
side of your fabric.
*
For information about using free motion open toe
quilting foot “O”, refer to “Free Motion Quilting” on
page S-40.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Bobbin thread
Sewing S-113
4
How to Create Bobbin Work (Sewing)
• Do not sew reverse or reinforcement
stitches at the end of the stitching,
otherwise the threads may become tangled
or the needle may break. In addition, it will
be difficult to pull the bobbin thread up to
the wrong side of the fabric.
S
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION
After sewing trial stitches and checking the sewing results, adjust the thread tensions if necessary. After adjusting the
tensions, be sure to sew trial stitches again in order to check the sewing results.
■ Adjusting the upper thread tension
We recommend a setting between 6 and 8 for the upper
thread tension when sewing bobbin work.
Refer to “Setting the Thread Tension” on page S-12.
■ Adjusting the tension of the bobbin
thread
If the desired stitching cannot be achieved after
adjusting the upper thread tension, adjust the tension of
the bobbin thread. The tension of the bobbin thread can
be adjusted by turning the slotted-head (–) screw on the
bobbin case (gray) for bobbin work.
a Do not turn the phillips screw (+).
b Adjust with a small screwdriver.
Note
• Turning the screw on the bobbin case (gray)
may push up the spring plate, as shown
below.
If this occurs, gently press down the spring
plate with a screwdriver so it is lower than
the top surface of the bobbin case (gray),
and then insert the bobbin case into the
machine.
a Spring plate
To increase the tension of the bobbin thread, turn the
slotted-head (–) screw 30° to 45° clockwise.
To decrease the tension of the bobbin thread, turn the
slotted-head (–) screw 30° to 45° counterclockwise.
CAUTION
• DO NOT adjust the position of the phillips (+)
screw on the bobbin case (gray) as this may result in
damage to the bobbin case, rendering it useless.
• If the slotted-head screw (-) is difficult to turn, do
not use force. Turning the screw too much or
providing force in either (rotational) direction may
cause damage to the bobbin case. Should damage
occur, the bobbin case may not maintain proper
tension.
Note
• If the bobbin thread tension is tight, the
thread cannot be passed through the
tension spring when the bobbin is installed
in the bobbin case. (Refer to “When tension
is not applied to the bobbin thread” on
page S-110.)
S-114
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Several solutions for minor problems are described below. If the problem persists, contact your nearest authorized
Baby Lock retailer.
a
d
Cut the thread near the fabric above the
needle plate, and then remove the fabric.
CAUTION
a Thread
b
Remove the bobbin, and then hold it out
toward the left side of the machine.
• Do not pull on the thread with excessive force,
otherwise the machine may be damaged.
■ Correcting bobbin work tension
*
*
*
c
Apply slight tension on bobbin thread by
holding thread out to the left side of presser
foot. Press the “Thread Cutter” button
again.
Lower the presser foot.
If the top thread shows on the bobbin side of the
fabric, increase the upper tension (Refer to
“ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION” on
page S-114).
If the top thread still shows on the bobbin side of the
fabric, reduce the tension of the bobbin thread or
bypass the bobbin tension. (Refer to “ADJUSTING
THE THREAD TENSION” on page S-114.)
Some bobbin threads are too coarse to pass through
to wrong side of fabric. In this case, be sure to color
match top thread with bobbin threads.
Example: Decorative Stitch
a Correct tension
b The upper thread tension is too loose, or the
bobbin thread tension is too tight.
■ The bobbin thread catches on the
tension spring of the bobbin case
Sew with no tension applied to the bobbin thread.
(Refer to “When tension is not applied to the bobbin
thread” on page S-110.)
Sewing S-115
4
How to Create Bobbin Work (Sewing)
■ The thread was activated and the
bobbin thread is caught inside the
machine
S
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-116
Embroidering
This section provides instruction to embroider designs with this machine.
Page number starts with “E” in this section.
Before starting embroidery work, refer to “BEFORE EMBROIDERING” of “Basic operations”.
The screen display and machine illustration may vary slightly, depending on the countries or regions.
Chapter1 Embroidery ............................................................. E-2
Chapter2 Embroidery Edit .................................................... E-56
Chapter3 How to Create Bobbin Work (Embroidery)........... E-86
EEmbroidering
Chapter
1
Embroidery
SELECTING PATTERNS .............................................. 3
■ Copyright Information .............................................................. 3
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Baby Lock “Exclusives”/Floral
Alphabet/Bobbin Work Patterns .................................................4
Selecting Character Patterns .......................................................5
Selecting Frame Patterns.............................................................7
Selecting Patterns from Embroidery Cards..................................7
■ About Embroidery Card Reader (Sold Separately) and USB Card
Writer Module*.......................................................................... 7
■ About Embroidery Cards (Sold Separately) ............................... 7
Selecting Patterns from USB Media/Computer ...........................8
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERING SCREEN ................. 9
■ Key Functions........................................................................... 10
PREPARING THE FABRIC ........................................ 11
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (Backing) to the Fabric ...............11
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame ..........................13
■ Types of Embroidery Frames .................................................... 13
■ Inserting the Fabric .................................................................. 14
■ Using the Embroidery Sheet .................................................... 15
Changing the Thread Color Display ......................................... 34
Changing the “Embroidery Frame Display”.............................. 35
REVISING THE PATTERN ........................................ 36
Moving the Pattern................................................................... 36
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle ........................................ 36
Changing the Size of the Pattern .............................................. 37
Rotating the Pattern ................................................................. 38
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ........................................ 39
Enlarging the Editing Screen..................................................... 39
Changing the Density (Alphabet Character and Frame
Patterns Only) ......................................................................... 40
Changing the Colors of Alphabet Character Patterns .............. 40
Embroidering Linked Characters .............................................. 41
Uninterrupted Embroidering
(Monochrome - Using a Single Color) ...................................... 43
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ......................... 44
Embroidery Data Precautions................................................... 44
■ Embroidering Small Fabrics...................................................... 16
■ Embroidering Edges or Corners................................................ 16
■ Embroidering Ribbons or Tape ................................................. 16
■ Types of Embroidery Data that can be Used.............................44
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used ........................44
■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following
Specifications can be Used .......................................................45
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data.......45
■ Tajima (.dst) Embroidery Data ..................................................45
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME ................ 17
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ............ 46
■ Removing the Embroidery Frame ............................................. 17
Saving Embroidery Patterns to USB Media............................... 47
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Computer........................... 48
Retrieving Patterns from the Machine’s Memory .................... 49
Recalling from USB Media ....................................................... 50
Recalling from the Computer ................................................... 51
Embroidering Small Fabrics or Fabric Edges ............................16
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION ............... 19
Checking the Pattern Position ..................................................19
Previewing the Completed Pattern ..........................................20
■ Frame sizes displayed on screen............................................... 20
■ If the Memory is Full.................................................................46
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN..................... 21
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS................................ 52
Embroidering Attractive Finishes ..............................................21
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (1)....................... 52
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (2)....................... 53
Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns............................................. 54
■ Embroidery Needle Plate Cover .............................................. 22
Sewing Embroidery Patterns .....................................................22
Sewing Embroidery Patterns Which Use Appliqué ...................23
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS..... 26
If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread ............................................26
If the Thread Breaks During Sewing .........................................27
Restarting from the Beginning ..................................................28
Resuming Embroidery After Turning Off the Power..................28
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS................. 30
Adjusting Thread Tension .........................................................30
■ Correct Thread Tension ........................................................... 30
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight ....................................................... 30
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose ...................................................... 30
Adjusting the Bobbin Case (with No Color on the Screw) ........31
■ Correct Tension ....................................................................... 31
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Loose ..................................................... 31
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Tight ...................................................... 32
Using the Automatic Thread Cutting Function
(END COLOR TRIM).................................................................32
Using the Thread Trimming Function (JUMP STITCH TRIM) ....32
■ Selecting the Length of Jump Stitch Not to Trim ...................... 33
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed ...............................................33
SELECTING PATTERNS
SELECTING PATTERNS
E
■ Copyright Information
If another screen is displayed, press
, then Embroidery (
or
) to display the screen below.
There are 6 categories of patterns in this machine.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Baby Lock “Exclusives”
Embroidery pattern
Floral alphabet patterns
Frame patterns
Character patterns
Bobbin work patterns (see page E-92)
Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (see
page E-49)
h Patterns saved in USB media (see page E-50)
i Patterns saved on the computer (see page E-51)
j Press this key to position the embroidery unit for
storage
Memo
• A key that appears stacked, such as
and
, indicates that
there are sub-categories, which must be
selected before a pattern selection screen
appears.
Embroidering E-3
1
Embroidery
The patterns stored in the machine and embroidery cards are intended for private use only. Any public or
commercial use of copyrighted patterns is an infringement of copyright law and is strictly prohibited.
There are many character and decorative embroidery patterns stored in the machine’s memory (see the “Quick
Reference Guide” for a full summary of patterns in the machine’s memory). You can also use patterns from the
embroidery cards (sold separately).
Once the machine has finished the initialization and the carriage has moved to the start position, the pattern type
selection screen will display.
SELECTING PATTERNS
Selecting Embroidery
Patterns/Baby Lock
“Exclusives”/Floral
Alphabet/Bobbin Work Patterns
a
*
c
Press
to create a mirror image of the
pattern as needed.
*
If a mistake has been made when selecting the
pattern, press the key of the pattern you want to
embroider and the new selection appears.
Touch the key of the category of the pattern
you want to embroider.
Refer to “CREATING BOBBIN WORK” on page E-92
about the bobbin work patterns.
d
Press
.
→ The embroidery screen is displayed.
b
Press the key of the pattern you want to
embroider.
e
*
Proceed to “VIEWING THE
EMBROIDERING SCREEN” on page E-9 to
embroider the pattern.
To return to the previous screen to select another
pattern, press
*
Press
to view the next page.
*
Press
to view the previous page.
→ The selected pattern is displayed.
E-4
.
SELECTING PATTERNS
Selecting Character Patterns
*
the character and then press
Press
If you make a mistake, press
*
mistake.
If the pattern is too small to see clearly, you can use
the
to erase the
key to check it.
e
Press
and enter “e”.
f
Press
to enter a space.
Press to change the selection screens.
Memo
• If you continue adding characters after
changing the size, the new characters will
be entered in the new size.
• You cannot change the size of the entered
characters after combining character stitch
patterns.
d
Press
and then enter “W”.
Embroidering E-5
E
1
Embroidery
c
*
.
Press the key of the font you want to
b
embroider.
to change the
size. The size changes each time you press the key,
from large to medium to small.
Example: Entering “We Fly”.
a
If you want to change the size of a character, select
SELECTING PATTERNS
g
Press
again and enter “F”.
h
Press
and then enter “ly”.
i
Press
.
→ The embroidery screen is displayed.
j
*
Proceed to “VIEWING THE
EMBROIDERING SCREEN” on page E-9 to
embroider the pattern.
To return to the previous screen to select another
pattern, press
E-6
.
SELECTING PATTERNS
Selecting Frame Patterns
e
*
a
Press
b
Press the key of the frame shape you want
to embroider in the top part of the screen.
.
Proceed to “VIEWING THE
EMBROIDERING SCREEN” on page E-9 to
embroider the pattern.
To return to the previous screen to select another
pattern, press
.
b
a Frame shapes
b Frame patterns
→ Various frame patterns are displayed at the bottom
part of the screen.
*
Press the key of the frame pattern you want
to embroider.
If you make a mistake selecting the pattern, press the
key of the pattern you want to embroider.
→ The selected pattern is displayed on the screen.
d
Press
.
Selecting Patterns from
Embroidery Cards
■ About Embroidery Card Reader
(Sold Separately) and USB Card
Writer Module*
• Use only an embroidery card Reader designed
for this machine. Using an unauthorized
embroidery card Reader may cause your
machine to operate incorrectly.
*
If you have purchased the Palette Ver5 or later,
Palette Petite or Palette PTS, you can plug the
included USB card writer module into the machine
as an embroidery card reader, and recall patterns.
Note
• Embroidery patterns cannot be saved from
the machine to an embroidery card inserted
into a connected USB card writer module*.
■ About Embroidery Cards
(Sold Separately)
→ The embroidery screen is displayed.
1
Embroidery
a
c
E
• Use only embroidery cards manufactured for this
machine. Using unauthorized cards may cause
your machine to operate incorrectly.
• Embroidery cards sold in foreign countries
cannot be used with this machine.
• Store embroidery cards in the hard case.
Embroidering E-7
SELECTING PATTERNS
a
Plug the optional embroidery card
Reader/USB card writer module into the
USB port on the machine.
a USB port
b Embroidery card Reader/USB card writer module
b
*
Insert the card completely into the card
Reader/USB card writer module.
Insert the embroidery card so that the end with a
printed arrow is facing up.
c
Press the key of the USB port.
→ The patterns on the embroidery card are displayed
on the selection screen.
d
Follow the steps on page E-4 to select a
pattern.
Selecting Patterns from USB
Media/Computer
To recall patterns from the computer or USB
media, see pages E-50 to E-51.
Note
• Two embroidery USB card Readers/USB
card writer module cannot be used with this
machine at the same time. If two
embroidery USB card Readers/USB card
writer module are inserted, only the
embroidery USB card Reader/USB card
writer module inserted first is detected.
E-8
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERING SCREEN
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERING SCREEN
h
a
E
1
i
j
k
c
l
Embroidery
b
d
e
f
g
m
a Shows the presser foot code.
Attach embroidery foot “W+” for most embroidery projects. When the foot presser symbol is displayed on the
screen, you are able to sew.
b Shows the boundary for embroidering with the extra large frame (30 cm × 18 cm (approx. 12 inches × 7 inches)).
c Shows a preview of the selected pattern.
d Shows the size of the selected pattern.
e Shows the embroidery frames that can be used for the selected pattern. Be sure to use the proper frame (see page
E-13).
f Shows how far the sewing position is from the center (when you move the sewing position).
g Shows the degree of rotation of the pattern.
h Shows how many stitches are in the selected pattern and how many stitches have been sewn so far.
i Shows the time necessary to sew the pattern, and the time already spent sewing the pattern (not including time for
changing and automatically trimming the thread).
j Shows the number of colors in the selected pattern, and the number of the color currently being sewn.
k Shows the part of the embroidery that will be sewn with the first thread color.
l Shows the order for thread color changes and the embroidering time for each thread color.
m Press an arrow key to move the pattern in the direction shown by the arrow. (Press the Center key
to return the
pattern to the center of the embroidery area.)
* The displayed time is the approximate time that will be required. The actual embroidering time may be longer than the
displayed time, depending on the embroidery frame that is used. In addition, the amount of time required to change
thread colors is not included.
Note
• There is an explanation of additional key functions on the next page.
Embroidering E-9
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERING SCREEN
■ Key Functions
Using these keys, you can change the size of the pattern, rotate the pattern, etc.
Q
Note
• Some operations or functions are not
available for certain patterns. If the key
display is light gray, you cannot use that
function or operation with the selected
pattern.
n
z
y
x
w
o
p
q
r
s
No.
Display
v
u
t
Key Name
Explanation
Page
n
Rotate key
Press this key to rotate the pattern. You can rotate a pattern one degree, 10
degrees or 90 degrees at a time.
E-38
o
Size key
Press this key to change the size of the pattern.
E-37
p
Multi color key
Press this key to change the color of each letter when sewing alphabet
character patterns.
E-40
q
Return key
Press this key to return to the pattern type selection screen.
r
Cut/Tension key
Press this key to specify automatic thread cutting, thread trimming or the
thread tension. For embroidery, these functions are set automatically.
E-32 to
E-33
s
Forward/Back key
Press this key to move the needle forward or back in the pattern; useful if the
thread breaks while sewing or if you want to start again from the beginning.
E-27 to
E-29
t
Starting point key
Press this key to move the needle start position to align the needle with the
pattern position.
E-36
u
Trial key
Press this key to check the position of the pattern.The embroidery frame moves
to the desired position so you can check that there is enough space to sew the
pattern.
E-19
v
Memory key
Press this key to save a pattern in the machine’s memory, USB media or a
computer.
w
Uninterrupted
embroidery key
Press this key to embroider the selected pattern with a single color.
E-43
x
Density key
Press this key to change the density of alphabet character or frame patterns.
E-40
y
Horizontal mirror
image key
Press this key to create a horizontal mirror image of the pattern.
E-39
z
Function page key
Press this key to show all the keys in this screen.
E-40
Q
Image key
Press this key for a preview of the sewn image.
E-20
E-10
—
E-46 to
E-48
PREPARING THE FABRIC
PREPARING THE FABRIC
E
CAUTION
Note
• Press
. In the “Embroidery Foot
Height” display, use
and
in the
settings screen. Adjust the presser foot
height for thick or puffy fabrics.
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers
(Backing) to the Fabric
For best results in your embroidery projects,
always use stabilizer material for embroidery.
Follow the package instructions for the stabilizer
being used.
When using fabrics that cannot be ironed (such as
towel or fabrics that have loops which expand
when ironed) or in places where ironing is
difficult, position the stabilizer material under the
fabric without fusing it, then position the fabric
and stabilizer in the embroidery frame, or check
with your authorized retailer for the correct
stabilizer to use.
• To increase the space between the presser
foot and the needle plate, set the
embroidery foot height to a larger number,
1.5 mm setting is used for most
embroidery.
CAUTION
• Always use a stabilizer material for embroidery
when sewing stretch fabrics, lightweight
fabrics, fabrics with a coarse weave, or fabrics
which cause pattern shrinkage. Otherwise, the
needle may break and cause injury. Not using
a stabilizer material may result in a poor finish
to your project.
a
Use a piece of stabilizer which is larger
than the embroidery frame being used.
a Size of the embroidery frame
b Iron-on stabilizer (backing)
Embroidering E-11
1
Embroidery
• Use fabrics with a thickness of less than 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch). Using fabrics thicker than 3 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch) may cause the needle to break.
• When using layers with thicker batting etc., you can sew more attractive embroidery by adjusting the
embroidery presser foot height in the embroidery settings screen (see below).
• In the case of thick terry cloth towels we recommend that you place a piece of water soluble stabilizer on
the top surface of the towel. This will help to reduce the nap of the toweling and result in more attractive
embroidery.
PREPARING THE FABRIC
b
Iron the iron-on stabilizer material to the
wrong side of the fabric.
a Fusible side of stabilizer
b Fabric (wrong side)
Memo
• When embroidering on thin fabrics such as
organdy or lawn, or on napped fabrics such
as towel or corduroy, use water soluble
stabilizer (sold separately) for best results.
The water soluble stabilizer material will
dissolve completely in water, giving the
project a more attractive finish.
E-12
PREPARING THE FABRIC
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame
E
■ Types of Embroidery Frames
The types and numbers of supplied embroidery frames differ depending on the country or region.
Large
Embroidery field
300 mm × 180 mm
(approx. 12 inches × 7 inches)
Embroidery field
180 mm × 130 mm
(approx. 7 inches × 5 inches)
1
Embroidery
Extra Large
Use when embroidering connected or combined characters or
patterns, or when embroidering large patterns.
Use when embroidering patterns between 100 mm × 100 mm
(approx. 4 inches × 4 inches) and
180 mm × 130 mm (approx. 7 inches × 5 inches).
Other optional embroidery frames can be used. When choosing frames that do not appear on the screen, be sure
to check the design size of the embroidery field of the optional frame. Check with your authorized retailer for
frame compatibility.
Select a frame that matches the pattern size. Included frame options are displayed on the LCD.
a
b
a Highlighted: Can be used
b Shaded: Cannot be used
CAUTION
• If you use a frame that is too small, the presser foot may strike the frame during sewing and cause injury.
Embroidering E-13
PREPARING THE FABRIC
■ Inserting the Fabric
c
Slightly tighten the frame adjustment screw,
and then remove the slack in the fabric by
pulling on the edges and corners. Do not
loosen the screw.
d
Gently stretch the fabric taut, and tighten
the frame adjustment screw to keep the
fabric from loosening after stretching.
Note
• If the fabric is not securely held in the
embroidery frame, the embroidery design
will sew out poorly. Insert the fabric on a
level surface, and gently stretch the fabric
taut in the frame. Follow the steps below to
insert the fabric correctly.
a
Lift-up and loosen the frame adjustment
screw and remove the inner frame.
*
After stretching the fabric, make sure the fabric is
taut.
*
Make sure the inside and outside frames are even
before you start embroidering.
a Frame adjustment screw
b Inner frame
b
Lay the fabric right side up on top of the
outer frame.
Re-insert the inner frame making sure to align the
inner frame’s
with the outer frame’s
.
a Outer frame
b Inner frame
c Fabric
Memo
• Stretch the fabric from all four corners and
all four edges. While stretching the fabric,
tighten the frame adjustment screw.
a Inner frame’s
b Outer frame’s
c Frame adjustment screw
E-14
PREPARING THE FABRIC
e
Return the frame adjustment screw to its
initial position.
b
Place the embroidery sheet on the inner
frame. Align the guide lines on the
embroidery sheet with the mark you made
on the fabric.
E
1
Embroidery
Memo
• You can use the included screwdriver when
you loosen or tighten the frame adjustment
screw.
a Inner frame
b Guide line
c
Gently stretch the fabric so there are no
folds or wrinkles, and press the inner frame
into the outer frame.
■ Using the Embroidery Sheet
When you want to embroider the pattern in a
particular place, use the embroidery sheet with the
frame.
a
With a chalk pencil, mark the area of the
fabric you want to embroider.
a Inner frame
b Outer frame
d
Remove the embroidery sheet.
a Embroidery pattern
b Mark
Embroidering E-15
PREPARING THE FABRIC
Embroidering Small Fabrics or
Fabric Edges
■ Embroidering Ribbons or Tape
Secure with double-sided tape or a temporary spray
adhesive.
Use an embroidery stabilizer to provide extra
support. After embroidering, remove the stabilizer
carefully. Attach the stabilizer as shown in the
following examples. We recommend using a
stabilizer for embroidery.
■ Embroidering Small Fabrics
Use a temporary spray adhesive to adhere the small
piece of fabric to the larger piece in the frame.
If you do not wish to use a temporary spray
adhesive, attach the stabilizer with a basting stitch.
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
■ Embroidering Edges or Corners
Use a temporary spray adhesive to adhere the small
piece of fabric to the larger piece in the frame.
If you do not wish to use a temporary spray
adhesive, attach the stabilizer with a basting stitch.
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
E-16
a Ribbon or tape
b Stabilizer
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME
E
1
Note
• Wind and insert the bobbin before attaching the embroidery frame.
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
raise the presser foot.
b
Align the embroidery frame guide with the
right edge of the embroidery frame holder.
d
Lower the frame-securing lever to be level
with the frame to secure the embroidery
frame in the embroidery frame holder.
a Frame-securing lever
a Embroidery frame holder
b Embroidery frame guide
c
Slide the embroidery frame into the holder,
making sure to align the embroidery frame’s
with the holder’s
.
CAUTION
• If the frame-securing lever is not lowered, the
following message appears. You cannot start
sewing until you lower the frame-securing
lever.
a Arrow mark
■ Removing the Embroidery Frame
a
Raise the frame-securing lever.
Embroidering E-17
Embroidery
a
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME
b
E-18
Pull the embroidery frame toward you.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
The pattern is normally positioned in the center of the embroidery frame. If the pattern needs to be
repositioned for better placement on the garment, you can check the layout before starting embroidery.
b
Press
, press the key for the position
that you want to check.
The embroidery frame moves and shows the
pattern position. Watch the frame closely to make
sure the pattern will be sewn in the right place.
a
From
.
a
a Selected position
→ The needle will move to the selected position on the
pattern.
Memo
• To see the entire embroidering area, press
→ The following screen is displayed.
. The embroidery frame moves and
shows the embroidery area.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle is up when the
embroidery frame is moving. If the needle is
down, it could break and result in injury.
c
Press
.
Embroidering E-19
1
Embroidery
Checking the Pattern Position
E
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
Previewing the Completed
Pattern
■ Frame sizes displayed on screen
Icon
Name
Embroidering area
a
Press
Extra large embroidery frame
.
H 300 mm × W 180 mm
(H 12 inches × W 7 inches)
Large embroidery frame
H 180 mm × W 130 mm
(H 7 inches × W 5 inches)
Medium embroidery frame (optional)
→ An image of the pattern as it will be embroidered
appears.
b
H 100 mm × W 100 mm
(H 4 inches × W 4 inches)
Small embroidery frame (optional)
Press
to select the frame
H 20 mm × W 60 mm
(H 1 inch × W 2-1/2 inches)
used in the preview.
*
Frames displayed in light gray cannot be selected.
*
*
Press
to enlarge the image of the pattern.
The pattern can be sewn as it appears in the
following display.
Memo
• You can begin sewing from this screen by
pressing the “Start/Stop” button.
a
E-20
Press
to return to the original screen.
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN
E
Embroidering Attractive Finishes
Thread
Upper thread Use embroidery thread intended for use with this machine.
Other embroidery threads may not yield optimum results.
Bobbin thread Use embroidery bobbin thread intended for use with this machine.
Memo
• If you use threads other than those listed above, the embroidery may not sew out correctly.
Included bobbin case varies depending on the model of machine. See explanation below to understand
the different bobbin cases.
Bobbin case (recommended for
sewing and for embroidering with
included 60 weight bobbin thread)
Standard bobbin case originally installed in the machine has a green marking on the screw. We
recommend using the included embroidery bobbin thread with this bobbin case. Do not adjust the
tension screw on this bobbin case with the green marked screw.
a Standard bobbin case
(green marking on the screw)
Bobbin case (for prewound or other The bobbin case with no color on the screw is set with tighter tension for embroidery with different
weights of bobbin threads and a variety of embroidery techniques. This bobbin case is identified
embroidery bobbin threads)
with a dark colored mark on the inside of the bobbin cavity. The tension screw on this case can be
adjusted if necessary (see page E-31).
a Bobbin case (no color on the
screw)
See “Cleaning the Race” of “Appendix” for how to remove the bobbin case.
CAUTION
• When embroidering on large garments (especially jackets or other heavy fabrics), do not let the fabric
hang over the table. Otherwise, the embroidery unit cannot move freely and the embroidery frame may
strike the needle, causing the needle to bend or break and possibly cause injury.
Place the fabric so that it does not hang off the table or hold the fabric to keep it from dragging.
Note
• Before embroidering, check that there is enough thread in the bobbin. If you start to sew your
embroidery project without enough thread in the bobbin, you will need to rewind the bobbin in the
middle of the embroidery pattern.
• Do not leave objects in the range of motion of the embroidery frame. The frame may strike the object
and cause a poor finish to the embroidery pattern.
• When embroidering on large garments (especially jackets or other heavy fabrics), do not let the fabric
hang over the table. Otherwise, the embroidery unit cannot move freely, and the pattern may not turn
out as planned.
Embroidering E-21
Embroidery
There are many factors that go into beautiful embroidery. Using the appropriate stabilizer (see page E-11)
and hooping the fabric in the frame (see page E-13) are two important factors mentioned earlier. Another
important point is the appropriateness of the needle and thread being used. See the explanation of threads
below.
1
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN
■ Embroidery Needle Plate Cover
Under some conditions, based on the type of fabric,
stabilizer, or thread being used, there may be some
looping in the upper thread. In this case, attach the
included embroidery needle plate cover to the
needle plate. Attach the cover by inserting the two
projections on the underside of the cover into the
notches on the needle plate as shown below.
Sewing Embroidery Patterns
Example:
b
a
a Groove
b Projection
c Notch
To remove the embroidery needle plate cover, place
your fingernail in the groove and lift the plate out.
CAUTION
• Push the embroidery needle plate cover as far
as possible to attach it. If the embroidery
needle plate cover is not securely attached, it
may cause the needle to break.
a Embroidery color order
b Cursor
Memo
• The [+] cursor moves over the pattern,
showing which part of the pattern is being
sewn.
Note
• Do not use the embroidery needle plate
cover for any applications other than
embroidery.
E-22
a
Thread the machine with thread for the first
color, pass the thread through the hole in
embroidery foot, pull out some thread to
give it some slack, and then lightly hold the
end of the thread in your left hand.
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN
b
Lower the presser foot, then press the
“Start/Stop” button to start embroidering.
After 5-6 stitches, press the “Start/Stop”
button again to stop the machine.
Trim the excess thread at the end of the
seam. If the end of the seam is under the
presser foot, raise the presser foot, then
trim the excess thread.
d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
embroidering.
→ When the first color is completely sewn, the machine
will automatically trim the threads and stop. The
presser foot will then automatically be raised.
On the embroidery color order display, the next
color will move to the top.
Memo
• If there is thread left over from the beginning
of sewing, it may be sewn over as you
continue embroidering the pattern, making
it very difficult to deal with the thread after
the pattern is finished. Trim the threads at
the beginning of each thread change.
e
Remove the thread for the first color from
the machine. Thread the machine with the
next color.
Repeat the same steps for embroidering the
remaining colors.
E
1
Embroidery
c
f
→ When the last color is sewn, “Finished sewing” will
appear on the display. Press
will return to the original screen.
, and the display
Memo
• The Thread Trimming Function is originally
set to trim excess thread jumps (threads
linking parts of the pattern, etc.). Depending
on the type of thread and fabric that are
used, an end of upper thread may remain
on the surface of the fabric at the beginning
of the stitching. After embroidering is
finished, cut off this excess thread.
If the setting has been turned off, trim the
excess thread jumps using scissors after
the pattern is finished.
See page E-32 for information on the thread
trimming function.
Sewing Embroidery Patterns
Which Use Appliqué
There are some patterns which call for an appliqué
inside the pattern. Prepare the base fabric and the
appliqué fabric (appliqué piece).
When sewing an embroidery pattern with an
appliqué, the color sewing order display shows
“APPLIQUE MATERIAL”, “APPLIQUE POSITION”,
“APPLIQUE”, and then the sewing order of the
colors around the appliqué.
Memo
• Depending on the thread color display
setting, the display may show
, or
.
,
Embroidering E-23
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN
a
Attach an iron-on stabilizer to the wrong
side of the appliqué material.
d
Place the base material into the embroidery
frame.
a Appliqué material (cotton, felt, etc.)
b Iron-on stabilizer
Place the appliqué material into the
b
embroidery frame, and then press the
“Start/Stop” button to sew the outline of
the appliqué.
a Base material
e
*
Press the “Start/Stop” button to sew the
position of the appliqué.
Use the same thread color you plan to use when
attaching the appliqué in step g.
a Outline of appliqué
b Appliqué material
Memo
• The embroidery procedure is the same as
the basic procedure explained on
page E-22.
→ The machine will sew around the outline of the
appliqué pieces and will then stop.
c
*
a Position of appliqué
b Base material
→ The machine will sew around the position of the
appliqué and will then stop.
f
Apply a thin layer of adhesive or spray
adhesive to the back of the appliqué piece
and attach it to the appliqué position so that
it follows the seam of the outline.
Remove the appliqué material from the
embroidery frame, and then cut carefully
along the stitching. After cutting, remove all
of the stitching thread carefully.
Carefully cut out the pattern on the outline you just
sewed. Do not cut inside the stitching line, as the
appliqué fabric will not be caught by the appliqué
stitch.
Memo
• If the appliqué material is a lightweight
fabric, you may want to use a fusible web
on the back to stabilize the fabric and for
appliqué placement. Fuse appliqué in place
with an iron.
Do not remove fabric from the frame to iron
the appliqué material.
E-24
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN
g
Press the “Start/Stop” button.
E
1
Embroidery
Memo
• Some patterns may not show all three
appliqué steps. Sometimes the
“APPLIQUE” step will be shown as a color.
→ The appliqué will then be completed.
h
Change the upper thread and then carry out
the rest of the embroidering.
Memo
• Some glue may get onto the presser foot,
needle, and needle plate at this time. Finish
embroidering the appliqué pattern and then
clean away the glue.
• For best sewing results clip all threads
between color steps.
Embroidering E-25
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
Note
• Be careful not to bump the embroidery unit carriage or the presser foot when removing or attaching
the embroidery frame. Otherwise, the pattern will not embroider correctly.
If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread
When the bobbin begins to run out of thread
during embroidering, the machine will stop and
b
*
Unlock the frame-securing lever and
remove the embroidery frame.
Be careful not to apply strong force to the fabric at
this time. Otherwise, the fabric may loosen in the
frame.
the message below will appear. Press
and
follow the directions below to rethread the lower
threading. If very little sewing remains, you can
embroider 10 final stitches without rethreading the
machine by pressing
. The machine will stop
after sewing the 10 stitches.
c
Insert a wound bobbin into the machine
(see “Setting the Bobbin” of “Basic
operations”).
d
Press
Note
• If “Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor” in the
settings screen of the machine setting
mode is set to “OFF”, the message shown
above does not appear.
a
Press
.
→ After the thread is automatically cut, the carriage
will move.
E-26
.
→ The carriage will return to its original position.
e
Attach the embroidery frame.
f
To return to the spot in the pattern where
you stopped sewing, follow steps c
through f in the next section.
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
If the Thread Breaks During
Sewing
a
c
Press
,
,
, or
to move
the needle back the correct number of
stitches before the spot where the thread
broke.
*
If you cannot move back to the spot where the
thread broke, press
to select the color and
If the upper thread is broken, redo the
move to the beginning position of that color, then
upper threading. If the bobbin thread is
use
broken, press
and follow the
directions in steps a through e from the
previous section to reset the bobbin.
to slightly before where the thread broke.
Press
,
,
, or
to move ahead
.
e
Press
f
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower the presser foot, and press the
“Start/Stop” button to continue sewing.
to return to the original screen.
Embroidering E-27
E
1
Embroidery
b
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the
machine.
d
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
Restarting from the Beginning
a
Press
.
Resuming Embroidery After
Turning Off the Power
The current color and stitch number are saved
when embroidery is stopped. The next time the
machine is turned on, you have the option to
continue or delete the pattern.
Memo
• Even if the power goes out in the middle of
embroidery, the machine returns to the
point where embroidery was stopped when
the machine is turned on again.
a
b
Press
.
a Current stitch number when embroidery was
stopped
Note
• Do not remove the embroidery unit or the
memory will no longer remember your
design.
→ The embroidery frame moves, returning the needle
to the pattern’s beginning position.
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
c
lower the presser foot and start sewing.
E-28
a
Turn the main power to ON.
b
Follow the instructions shown on the screen
and remove the embroidery frame.
→ The following message will appear.
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
c
Attach the embroidery frame and press
.
E
1
Embroidery
→ The previous embroidery screen displayed before
the machine was turned off appears.
Memo
• If you want to start a new embroidery
pattern, press
so the pattern
selection screen appears.
d
Continue embroidering.
a
a Stitch number when embroidery is resumed
Embroidering E-29
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
Adjusting Thread Tension
a
Press
.
b
Press
to weaken the upper thread
When embroidering, the thread tension should be
set so that the upper thread can slightly be seen on
the wrong side of the fabric.
■ Correct Thread Tension
The pattern can be seen from the wrong side of the
fabric. If the thread tension is not set correctly, the
pattern will not finish well. The fabric may pucker or
the thread may break.
a Right side
b Wrong side
Follow the operations described below to adjust
thread tension according to the situation.
Note
• If the thread tension setting is made
extremely weak, the machine may stop
during sewing. This is not the sign of a
malfunction. Increase the thread tension
slightly, and begin sewing again.
tension. (The tension number will
decrease.)
Memo
• If you turn the main power to OFF or select
a different pattern, the thread tension will
reset to the automatic setting.
• When you retrieve a saved pattern, the
thread tension setting will be the same as
when the pattern was saved.
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight
c
Press
.
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose
The tension of the upper thread is too loose,
resulting in a loose upper thread, loose thread locks,
or loops appearing on the right side of the fabric.
The tension of the upper thread is too tight, resulting
in the bobbin thread being visible from the right side
of the fabric.
Note
• If the upper thread was incorrectly
threaded, the upper thread may be too
loose. In this case, refer to “Upper
Threading” of “Basic operations” and
rethread the upper thread.
Note
• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly
threaded, the upper thread may be too
tight. In this case, refer to “Setting the
Bobbin” of “Basic operations” and rethread
the bobbin thread.
a Right side
b Wrong side
a Right side
b Wrong side
E-30
a
Press
.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
b
Press
to tighten the upper thread
tension. (The tension number will increase.)
Press
.
a Do not turn a phillips screw (+).
b Adjust with a screwdriver (small).
Note
• With “Embroidery Tension” on the setting
screen, the tension of the upper thread can
be adjusted for embroidering. The selected
setting will be applied to all patterns.
When embroidering, if the overall tension of
the upper thread is too tight or too loose,
■ Correct Tension
Upper thread slightly appears on the wrong side of
fabric.
adjust it from the setting screen. Press
to tighten the upper thread tension and
press
to loosen the upper tension. If an
individual embroidery pattern needs
additional fine tuning, refer to “Adjusting
Thread Tension” on page E-30.
a Right side
b Wrong side
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Loose
Bobbin thread appears slightly on the right side of
fabric.
a Right side
b Wrong side
If this occurs, turn the slotted-head screw (-)
clockwise, being careful not to over-tighten the
screw, approximately 30-45 degrees to increase
bobbin tension.
Adjusting the Bobbin Case (with
No Color on the Screw)
The bobbin case (with no color on the screw) can
be adjusted when bobbin tension changes are
required to accommodate different bobbin
threads. See “Embroidering Attractive Finishes” on
page E-21.
Embroidering E-31
E
1
Embroidery
c
To adjust the bobbin tension for embroidery
function, using the bobbin case (with no color on
the screw), turn the slotted-head screw (-) with a
(small) screwdriver.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Tight
Upper thread on the right side of fabric seems to be
lifting/looping and bobbin thread is not seen on the
wrong side of fabric.
a
Press
.
b
Press
to turn off the automatic thread
a Right side
b Wrong side
If this occurs, turn the slotted-head screw (-)
counterclockwise, being careful not to over-loosen
the screw, approximately 30-45 degrees to decrease
bobbin tension.
CAUTION
• When adjusting the bobbin case, be sure to
remove the bobbin from the bobbin case.
• DO NOT adjust the position of the phillips (+)
screw on the bobbin case as this may result in
damage to the bobbin case, rendering it
unusable.
• If the slotted-head screw (-) is difficult to turn,
do not use force. Turning the screw too much
or providing force in either (rotational)
direction may cause damage to the bobbin
case. Should damage occur, the bobbin case
may not maintain proper tension.
Using the Automatic Thread
Cutting Function
(END COLOR TRIM)
The automatic thread cutting function
will cut
the thread at the end of sewing each color. This
function is initially turned on. To turn this function
off, press
key and then
. This function can
be turned on or off during embroidering.
*
cutting function.
→ The key will display as
*
When one color thread is sewn, the machine will
stop without cutting the thread.
Using the Thread Trimming
Function (JUMP STITCH TRIM)
The thread trimming function
will
automatically trim any excess thread jumps within
the color. This function is initially turned on. To
turn this function off, press
. This function can be turned on or off during
embroidering.
*
Your customized setting remains after turning the
machine off and on.
This setting returns to its default
when the machine is turned off.
a Jump stitch
E-32
key and then
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
Note
• When this function is turned on, use the
included ball point needle 75/11 for
embroidering patterns with short jump
stitches such as alphabet characters. Using
other needles may cause the thread to
break.
Press
.
When the thread trimming function
is turned
on, you can select the length of the jump stitch not
to trim the thread. This function can be turned on or
off during embroidering.
Select a setting from 5 mm to 50 mm in 5 mm
increments.
*
Your customized setting remains after turning the
machine off and on.
Press
or
to select the length of jump stitch.
For example: Press
to select 25 mm (1 inch)
and the machine will not trim a jump stitch of 25
mm or less before moving to the next stitching.
Note
b
Press
• If design has many trims it is recommended
to select a higher jump stitch trim setting in
order to reduce the amount of excess tails
on backside of fabric.
• The higher number of the jump stitch length
selected, the fewer number of times the
machine will trim. In this case, more jump
stitches remain on the surface of the fabric.
to turn off the thread trimming
function.
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed
→ The key will display as
*
The machine will not trim the thread before moving
to the next stitching.
a
Press
b
In the “Max Embroidery Speed” display, use
.
to change the maximum
embroidery speed.
*
You can choose from 3 different speed levels, 350
spm, 600 spm or 1050 spm.
Embroidering E-33
E
1
Embroidery
a
■ Selecting the Length of Jump Stitch
Not to Trim
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
c
Memo
• “spm” is the number of stitches sewn in one
minute.
• Decrease the sewing speed when
embroidering on thin, thick, or heavy
fabrics.
• The sewing speed can be changed after an
embroidery has been started.
• The maximum sewing speed setting does
not change until a new setting is selected.
The setting specified before the main power
is set to OFF remains selected the next time
that the machine is turned on.
• Decrease the sewing speed to 600 spm
when using a speciality thread like a
metallic thread.
• While selecting the bobbin work pattern, the
embroidery speed recommendation is set at
“100 spm”; however you can choose from
100 spm, 200 spm, or 350 spm.
c
Press
When the thread number #123 is
displayed, use
to select from six
embroidery thread brands pictured below.
MADEIRA /POLYESTER
THREAD#
.
MADEIRA RAYON THREAD#
Changing the Thread Color
Display
You can display the name of the thread colors or
embroidery thread number.
Memo
• Colors on the screen may vary slightly from
actual spool colors.
a
Press
b
In the “Thread Color Display”, use
.
to display the name of the thread colors or
the embroidery thread number.
SULKY THREAD#
ROBISON-ANTON/POLYESTER
THREAD#
EMBROIDERY / POLYESTER
THREAD#
COUNTRY/COTTON THREAD#*
*
d
E-34
Depending on the country or area, cotton-like
polyester thread is sold.
Press
.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
Changing the “Embroidery Frame
Display”
a
Press
b
In the “Embroidery Frame Display”, use
E
1
.
Embroidery
to change the embroidery frame display
mode.
*
There are 16 choices.
* Optional embroidery frames
a Extra large frame embroidering area
30 cm × 18 cm (12 inches × 7 inches)
b Center mark
c Large frame embroidering area
18 cm × 13 cm (7 inches × 5 inches)
d Embroidering area for optional border embroidery
frame
18 cm × 10 cm (7 inches × 4 inches)
e Embroidery area for optional quilt embroidery
frame
15 cm × 15 cm (6 inches × 6 inches)
f Medium frame embroidering area
10 cm × 10 cm (4 inches × 4 inches)
g Embroidery area for optional small embroidery
frame
2 cm × 6 cm (1 inch × 2-1/2 inches)
h Embroidery area for optional border embroidery
frame
30 cm × 10 cm (12 inches × 4 inches)
i Grid lines
c
Press
.
Embroidering E-35
REVISING THE PATTERN
REVISING THE PATTERN
CAUTION
• When you have revised the pattern, check the display of available embroidery frames and use an
appropriate frame. If you use an embroidery frame not displayed as available for use, the presser foot may
strike the frame and possibly cause injury.
Moving the Pattern
Use
to move the pattern in the direction
shown by the arrow.
Press
to center the pattern.
a
Aligning the Pattern and the
Needle
a Distance from the center
The pattern can also be moved by dragging it.
If a USB mouse is connected, move the mouse to
position the pointer on the desired pattern, and
then select and drag the pattern. The pattern can
also be dragged by selecting it directly in the
screen with your finger or the touch pen.
Memo
• Patterns cannot be moved in screens where
does not appear.
E-36
Example: Aligning the lower left side of a
pattern and the needle
REVISING THE PATTERN
a
Mark the embroidery start position on the
fabric, as shown.
d
Press
.
e
Use
to align the needle and the mark
on the fabric, and begin embroidering the
pattern.
E
1
Embroidery
b
Press
.
Changing the Size of the Pattern
c
Press
a
Press
b
Select the direction in which to change the
size.
.
.
a
b
a Start position
b This key is used for aligning linked characters (see
page E-41).
→ The needle position moves to the bottom left corner
of the pattern (the embroidery frame moves so that
the needle is positioned correctly).
*
Press
to enlarge the pattern proportionately.
*
Press
to shrink the pattern proportionately.
*
Press
to stretch the pattern horizontally.
*
Press
to compact the pattern horizontally.
*
Press
to stretch the pattern vertically.
*
Press
to compact the pattern vertically.
*
Press
to return the pattern to its original
appearance.
Embroidering E-37
REVISING THE PATTERN
Rotating the Pattern
a
a
Press
b
Select the angle of rotation for the pattern.
.
a Size of the pattern
*
Memo
• Some patterns or characters can be
enlarged more than others.
• Some patterns or characters can be
enlarged to a greater degree if they are
rotated 90 degrees.
• You can change the size of the pattern by
rotating the mouse wheel. Rotate the
mouse wheel away from you to shrink the
pattern. Rotate the mouse wheel toward
you to enlarge the pattern.
Press
to return to the original screen.
to rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the
left.
*
Press
to rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the
right.
*
Press
to rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the
left.
*
Press
to rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the
right.
*
c
Press
*
Press
to rotate the pattern 1 degree to the left.
Press
to rotate the pattern 1 degree to the
right.
*
E-38
Press
position.
to return the pattern to its original
REVISING THE PATTERN
Creating a Horizontal Mirror
Image
Press
so it appears as
to create a
horizontal mirror image of the selected pattern.
again to return the pattern to normal.
a
a Degree of rotation
0°
Memo
• You can rotate the pattern by rotating the
mouse wheel. Rotate the mouse wheel
away from you to rotate the pattern 10
degrees to the left. Rotate the mouse wheel
toward you to rotate the pattern 10 degrees
to the right.
c
Press
to return to the original screen.
Enlarging the Editing Screen
Enlarge the editing screen by pressing
Press
.
to close the enlarged screen.
Embroidering E-39
1
Embroidery
Press
E
REVISING THE PATTERN
Changing the Density
(Alphabet Character and Frame
Patterns Only)
The thread density for some alphabet character
and frame patterns can be changed.
A setting between 80% and 120% in 5%
increments can be specified.
a
*
Press
Press
screen.
.
to display all the function keys on the
a
b
c
→
c
Normal
Fine (stitches closer together)
Coarse (stitches farther apart)
The pattern density changes each time you press a
button.
Press
to return to the pattern
selection screen.
Changing the Colors of Alphabet
Character Patterns
Combined alphabet character patterns can be
sewn with each letter in a different color. If
“MULTI COLOR” is set, the machine stops after
each character is sewn so that the thread can be
changed to a different color.
a
*
*
b
Change the density.
*
Press
to make the pattern less dense.
*
Press
to make the pattern more dense.
E-40
Press
so that it appears as
.
Press
to display all the function keys on the
screen.
Press the key again to return to the original setting.
REVISING THE PATTERN
b
After a character is sewn, change the thread
color, and then sew the next character.
b
Press
.
E
1
Embroidery
Embroidering Linked Characters
c
Press
.
Follow the procedure described below to
embroider linked characters in a single row when
the entire pattern extends beyond the embroidery
frame.
Example: Linking “DEF” to the characters
“ABC”
a
Select the character patterns for “ABC”.
Note
• For details on selecting character patterns,
refer to “Selecting Character Patterns” on
page E-5.
→ The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The embroidery frame moves so that the
needle is positioned correctly.
Note
• To cancel the starting point setting and
return the starting point to the center of the
pattern, press
• Use
.
to select a different starting
point for embroidering.
Embroidering E-41
REVISING THE PATTERN
d
Press
e
Press
h
.
.
After the characters are embroidered, cut
the threads to a generous length, remove
the embroidery frame, and then attach the
embroidery frame again so that the
remaining characters (“DEF”) can be
embroidered.
a End of the embroidering
f
Press
to turn off the thread cutting
function and then press
g
Press the “Start/Stop” button.
.
i
As in step a, select the character patterns
for “DEF”.
j
Press
k
Press
.
→ The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The embroidery frame moves so that the
needle is positioned correctly.
l
E-42
.
Press
.
REVISING THE PATTERN
m
Use
to align the needle with the end
E
of embroidering for the previous pattern.
1
Embroidery
n
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering the remaining character
patterns.
→ The thread color displayed on the screen will be
grayed out.
Uninterrupted Embroidering
(Monochrome - Using a Single
Color)
A selected pattern can be stitched out in one color
instead of multicolor. The machine will hesitate
but not stop between color steps, and then
continue till the pattern is completed. Press
for the multicolor steps to become shaded and the
selected pattern will embroider in a single color,
instead of changing the thread while
embroidering. Press
again to return to the
pattern’s original settings.
*
Press
screen.
Memo
• Even if uninterrupted embroidering
has
been set, the automatic thread cutting
function and the thread trimming function
can be used (see page E-32).
to display all the function keys on the
Embroidering E-43
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Embroidery Data Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using embroidery data other than that created and saved in this
machine.
CAUTION
• When using embroidery data other than our original patterns, the thread or needle may break when
sewing with a stitch density that is too fine or when sewing three or more overlapping stitches. In that
case, use one of our original data design systems to edit the embroidery data.
■ Types of Embroidery Data that can be Used
• Only .pes, .phc, and .dst embroidery data files can be used with this machine. Using data other than that
saved using our data design systems or machines may cause the embroidery machine to malfunction.
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used
Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB media. Use media that meets the following specifications.
• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)
• USB Floppy disk drive
Stitch data can be recalled only.
• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives
You can also use the following types of media with the USB Memory Card Reader/USB card writer module.
• Secure Digital (SD) Card
• CompactFlash
• Memory Stick
• Smart Media
• Multi Media Card (MMC)
• XD-Picture Card
Note
• The processing speed may vary by quantity of data stored.
• Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website for more details.
• The access lamp will begin blinking after inserting USB devices/media, and it will take about 5 to 6
seconds to recognize the devices/media. (Time will differ depending on the USB device/media).
Memo
• To create file folders, use a computer.
• Letters and numerals can be used in the file names. In addition, if the file name contains no more than
eight characters, the entire file name will appear on the screen.
If the file name is more than eight characters long, only the first six characters followed by “~” and a
number appear as the file name.
E-44
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following Specifications can be
Used
• Compatible models:
IBM PC with a USB port as standard equipment
IBM PC-compatible computer equipped with a USB port as standard equipment
• Compatible operating systems:
Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7
E
1
• If the name of the embroidery data file/folder cannot be identified, for example, because the name contains
special characters, the file/folder is not displayed. If this occurs, change the name of the file/folder. We
recommend using the 26 letters of the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9,”-”, and
“_”.
• If embroidery data larger than 30 cm × 18 cm (approx.12 inches × 7 inches) is selected, a message is shown
asking if you wish to rotate the pattern 90 degrees.
Even after being rotated 90 degrees, embroidery data larger than 30 cm × 18 cm (approx.
12 inches × 7 inches) cannot be used.
(All designs must be within the 30 cm × 18 cm (approx. 12 inches × 7 inches) design field size.)
• .pes files saved with the number of stitches or the number of colors exceeding the specified limits cannot be
displayed. The combined design can not exceed a maximum number of 500,000 stitches or a maximum
number of 125 color changes (Above numbers are approximate, depending on the overall size of the design).
Use one of our design software programs to edit the embroidery pattern so that it meets these specifications.
• Embroidery data stored in a folder created in USB media can be retrieved.
• Do not create folders in “Removable Disk” on a computer. If embroidery data is stored in a folder in
“Removable Disk”, that embroidery data cannot be retrieved by the machine.
• Even if the embroidery unit is not attached, the machine will recognize embroidery data.
■ Tajima (.dst) Embroidery Data
• .dst data is displayed in the pattern list screen by file name (the actual image cannot be displayed). Only the
first eight characters of the file name can be displayed.
• Since Tajima (.dst) data does not contain specific thread color information, it is displayed with our default
thread color sequence. Check the preview and change the thread colors as desired.
Embroidering E-45
Embroidery
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the
Machine’s Memory
b
*
Press
.
Press
saving.
to return to the original screen without
You can save embroidery patterns that you have
customized and will use often; for example, your
name, patterns that have been rotated or had the
size changed, patterns that have had the sewing
position changed, etc. A total of about 2 MB of
patterns can be saved in the machine's memory.
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the pattern you are saving.
Memo
• It takes a few seconds to save a pattern to
the machine’s memory.
• See page E-49 for information on retrieving
a saved pattern.
a
Press
when the pattern you want to
save is in the embroidery screen.
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern
is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
■ If the Memory is Full
If the screen below displays, either the maximum
number of patterns have been saved or the pattern
you want to save takes a lot of memory, and the
machine cannot save it. If you delete a previously
saved pattern, you can save the current pattern.
a
*
Press
Press
saving.
.
to return to the original screen without
→ The machine displays the patterns currently saved.
E-46
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
b
Select the pattern you want to delete.
Saving Embroidery Patterns to
USB Media
When sending embroidery patterns from the
machine to USB media, plug the USB media into
the machine’s USB port.
c
Press
• USB media is commercially available, but
some USB media may not be usable with
this machine. Please visit our website for
more details.
• Depending on the type of USB media being
used, either directly plug the USB device
into the machine’s USB port or plug the
USB media Reader/Writer into the
machine’s USB port.
• The USB media can be inserted or removed
at any time except while saving or deleting a
pattern.
.
a
b
a Amount of memory used by the pattern to be
deleted
b Amount of memory needed to save the current
pattern
d
*
Press
a
Press
when the pattern you want to
save is in the embroidery screen.
.
If you decide not to delete the pattern, press
.
→ The “Saving” screen displays. When the pattern is
saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the pattern you are saving.
Memo
• If there is enough memory available after
deleting the pattern, the pattern you want to
save will be saved automatically. If there is
not enough memory available after deleting
the pattern, repeat the steps above to
delete another pattern from the machine’s
memory.
• It takes a few seconds to save a pattern.
• See page E-49 for more information about
retrieving saved patterns.
Embroidering E-47
1
Embroidery
Memo
E
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
b
Insert the USB media into the USB port on
the machine.
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the
Computer
Using the included USB cable, the machine can
be connected to your computer, and the
embroidery patterns can be temporarily retrieved
from and saved in the “Removable Disk” folder in
your computer. A total of about 3 MB of
embroidery patterns can be saved in the
“Removable Disk”, but the saved embroidery
patterns are deleted when the machine is turned
OFF.
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the pattern you are saving.
a USB port
b USB media
Note
• The processing speed may vary by quantity
of data.
• Two USB media cannot be used with this
machine at the same time. If two USB
media are inserted, only the USB media
inserted first is detected.
• Do not insert anything other than USB
media into the USB media port. Otherwise,
the USB media drive may be damaged.
c
*
Press
Press
saving.
a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine.
b
Turn on your computer and select
“Computer (My computer)”.
*
The USB cable can be plugged into the USB ports
on the computer and embroidery machine whether
or not they are turned on.
.
to return to the original screen without
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern
is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
Note
• Do not insert or remove USB media while
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
some or all of the pattern you are saving.
a USB port for computer
b USB cable connector
→ The “Removable Disk” icon will appear in
“Computer (My computer)” on the computer.
Note
• The connectors on the USB cable can only
be inserted into a port in one direction. If it
is difficult to insert the connector, do not
insert it with force. Check the orientation of
the connector.
• For details on the position of the USB port
on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the
instruction manual for the corresponding
equipment.
E-48
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
c
Press
when the pattern you want to
save is in the embroidery screen.
Retrieving Patterns from the
Machine’s Memory
a
Press
E
1
.
Embroidery
d
*
Press
Press
saving.
.
to return to the original screen without
→ The machine displays the patterns currently in the
memory.
b
*
Press the key of the pattern you want to
retrieve.
Press
to return to the original screen.
→ The pattern will be temporarily saved to
“Removable Disk” under “Computer (My
computer)”.
e
Select the pattern’s .phc file in “Removable
Disk” and copy the file to the computer.
c
Press
.
→ The embroidery screen is displayed.
Embroidering E-49
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Recalling from USB Media
a
b
You can recall a specific embroidery pattern from
either direct USB media or a folder in the USB
media. If the pattern is in a folder, check each
folder to find the embroidery pattern.
Note
• The processing speed may vary by quantity
of data.
c
Insert the USB media into the USB port on
a
the machine (see page E-47).
a USB port
b USB media
b
Press
a
b
c
*
Folder name
Embroidery patterns in USB media
Path
The path shows the current folder at the top of the
list.
Embroidery patterns and subfolders within a folder
are displayed.
*
Press
*
Use the computer to create folders. Folders cannot
be created with the machine.
d
.
*
e
*
to return to the previous folder.
Press the key of the pattern you want to
retrieve.
Press
Press
to return to the original screen.
.
Press
to delete the pattern. The pattern will be
deleted from the USB media.
→ Embroidery patterns and a folder in a top folder are
displayed.
c
Press
when there is a subfolder to
sort two or more stitch patterns to USB
media, the embroidery pattern in the
subfolder is displayed.
*
E-50
Press
recalling.
to return to the original screen without
→ The embroidery screen is displayed.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Recalling from the Computer
d
Press
.
E
Plug the USB cable connector into the
a
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine (see page E-48).
On the computer, open “Computer (My
computer)” then go to “Removable Disk”.
Embroidery
b
1
→ The patterns in the computer are displayed on the
selection screen.
e
*
c
Press the key of the pattern you want to
recall.
Press
to return to the original screen.
Move/copy the pattern data to “Removable
Disk”.
f
Press
.
→ Pattern data in “Removable Disk” is written to the
machine.
Note
• While data is being written, do not
disconnect the USB cable.
• Do not create folders within “Removable
Disk”. Since folders are not displayed, stitch
pattern data within folders cannot be
recalled.
→ The embroidery screen is displayed.
Embroidering E-51
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
Using a Frame Pattern to Make
an Appliqué (1)
c
Apply a thin layer of fabric glue or a
temporary spray adhesive to the rear of the
appliqué created in step a. Attach the
appliqué to the base fabric matching the
shapes.
d
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the
same shape as the appliqué. Embroider over
the appliqué and base fabric from step c to
create the appliqué.
You can use framed patterns of the same size and
shape to create an appliqué. Embroider one
pattern with a straight stitch and one pattern with a
satin stitch.
a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern.
Embroider the pattern onto the appliqué
material, then cut neatly around the outside
of the shape.
Note
b
Embroider the same pattern from step a
onto the base fabric.
• If you change the size or position of the
patterns when selecting them, make a note
of the size and location.
a Appliqué material
E-52
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
Using a Frame Pattern to Make
an Appliqué (2)
d
Remove the embroidery frame from the
embroidery unit, and cut around the
outside of the stitches.
1
Embroidery
This is a second method to make appliqué using
embroidery patterns. You do not have to change
the fabric in the embroidery frame using this
method. Embroider one pattern with a straight
stitch and one pattern with a satin stitch.
a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern, and
embroider the pattern onto the base fabric.
Note
• Do not remove the fabric from the
embroidery frame to cut it. Also, do not pull
or push on the fabric. Otherwise, the fabric
may loosen in the frame.
e
b
Place the appliqué fabric over the pattern
embroidered in step a.
*
Be sure that the appliqué fabric completely covers
the stitched line.
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the
same shape as the appliqué.
Note
c
Embroider the same pattern on the appliqué
fabric.
E
• Do not change the size or position of the
pattern.
• If you change the size or position of the
patterns when selecting them, make a note
of the size and location.
a Appliqué material
Embroidering E-53
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
f
Reattach the embroidery frame to the
embroidery unit, and embroider the satin
stitch pattern to create an appliqué.
a
*
Connect to the machine the media
containing the created split embroidery
pattern, and then select the split
embroidery pattern to be embroidered.
For details on recalling patterns, refer to “Selecting
Patterns from Embroidery Cards” on page E-7,
“Recalling from USB Media” on page E-50, or
“Recalling from the Computer” on page E-51.
Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns
Split embroidery patterns created with Palette
Ver.7 or later can be sewn. With split embroidery
patterns, embroidery designs larger than the
embroidery hoop are divided into multiple
sections, which combine to create a single pattern
after each section is sewn.
For details on creating split embroidery patterns
and for more detailed sewing instructions, refer to
the Instruction manual included with Palette Ver.7
or later.
The following procedure describes how to read
the split embroidery pattern shown below from
USB media and embroider it.
→ A screen appears so that a section of the split
embroidery pattern can be selected.
b
*
*
Select section
Select the sections in alphabetical order.
A maximum of 12 sections can be displayed in one
page. If there are 13 or more sections in the pattern,
press
page.
E-54
to be embroidered.
or
to display the previous or next
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
c
Press
.
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to embroider
the pattern section.
f
When embroidering is finished, the
following screen appears. Press
E
.
1
Embroidery
→ A screen appears so that a section of the split
embroidery pattern can be selected.
g
d
*
Repeat steps b through f to embroider
the remaining sections of the pattern.
If necessary, edit the pattern.
For details, refer to “REVISING THE PATTERN” on
page E-36.
Memo
• The pattern can be rotated 90° to either the
left or right when
is pressed.
Embroidering E-55
EEmbroidering
Chapter
2
Embroidery Edit
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS............................. 57
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT ............................. 58
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Baby Lock “Exclusives”/Floral
Alphabet Patterns/Frame/Bobbin Work Patterns ......................59
Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns......................................59
EDITING PATTERNS ................................................ 61
■ Key Functions........................................................................... 62
Moving the Pattern ..................................................................63
Rotating the Pattern..................................................................63
Changing the Size of the Pattern...............................................63
Deleting the Pattern .................................................................63
Displaying Patterns in the Screen Magnified by 200% .............63
Changing the Configuration of Character Patterns ...................64
Changing Character Spacing .....................................................64
Reducing Character Spacing .....................................................65
Separating Combined Character Patterns .................................65
Changing the Color of Each Alphabet Character in a Pattern ...66
Embroidering Linked Characters ...............................................67
Changing the Thread Color ......................................................67
Creating a Custom Thread Table...............................................68
■ Adding a Color to the Custom Thread Table from the List ....... 69
■ Saving the Custom Thread Table to USB media ....................... 70
■ Recalling the Custom Thread Table data from USB media ....... 71
Choosing a Color from the Custom Thread Table .....................72
Designing Repeated Patterns ....................................................73
■
■
■
■
Sewing Repeated Patterns ........................................................ 73
Repeating One Element of a Repeated Pattern......................... 74
Color Sorting Repeated Patterns .............................................. 75
Assigning Thread Marks ........................................................... 76
Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly .......................................77
Duplicating a Pattern................................................................79
After Editing..............................................................................79
COMBINING PATTERNS ......................................... 80
Editing Combined Patterns........................................................80
■ Selecting combined embroidery patterns ................................. 82
Sewing Combined Patterns .......................................................83
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS ............... 84
Uninterrupted Embroidering
(Monochrome - Using a Single Color).......................................84
Basting Embroidery...................................................................84
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ......................... 85
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS
With the “Embroidery Edit” functions, you can combine embroidery patterns and character patterns,
change the size of patterns, rotate patterns, and perform many other editing functions. This machine can
perform the 9 functions listed below.
■ Move Patterns
Within the 30 cm × 18 cm (approx. 12 inches × 7 inches) wide embroidery area, you can change the position of
patterns, and check the position on the LCD.
■ Rotate Patterns
You can rotate patterns one degree, ten degrees or ninety degrees at a time.
■ Enlarge or Reduce Patterns
You can make patterns larger or smaller.
• This function is not available for some patterns.
■ Create Mirror Images
You can create horizontal mirror images.
• This function is not available for some patterns.
■ Change Alphabet Character Spacing
You can increase or decrease the spacing between characters in combined patterns.
■ Change Alphabet Character Appearance/Layout
You can change the layout of the characters to a curved line, diagonal, etc. There are 6 choices total.
■ Change the Thread Colors of Patterns
You can change the thread colors of the pattern to your favorite colors.
■ Creating a Repeating Pattern
You can add copies of a pattern to create a pattern that repeats in a vertical or horizontal direction.
Embroidering E-57
2
Embroidery Edit
■ Combine Patterns
You can easily create combinations of embroidery patterns, frame patterns, character patterns, patterns from the
machine’s memory, patterns from separately sold embroidery cards, and many other patterns.
E
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT
Prepare the machine for embroidery according to the instructions on “BEFORE EMBROIDERING” of
“Basic operations”, and press
, then
/
to display the screen below.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Baby Lock “Exclusives”
Embroidery patterns
Floral alphabet patterns
Frame patterns
Character patterns
Bobbin work patterns (see page E-92)
Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (see page E-49)
Patterns saved in USB media (see page E-50)
Patterns saved on the computer (see page E-51)
Press this key to position the embroidery unit for storage.
Memo
• See included “Quick Reference Guide” for more information on each category’s selection screen.
Note
(For embroidery and sewing machine only)
• You can also sew Utility Stitches or Character/Decorative Stitches with the embroidery unit attached
by pressing
and
(a confirmation message for moving the carriage will appear). Attach the
appropriate presser foot before sewing.
E-58
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT
a
*
b
*
Select the category of the pattern.
Selecting Alphabet Character
Patterns
When you select character patterns from the
“Embroidery Edit” screen, you can edit the
appearance of the pattern at the same time.
a
Press
b
Select the font, then enter the characters.
(Example: A B C)
*
See page E-5 for more information about selecting
characters.
.
Refer to “CREATING BOBBIN WORK” on page E-92
about the bobbin work patterns.
Press the key of the pattern you want to
edit.
See page E-4 and E-7 for more information on
selecting patterns.
→ The pattern is displayed in the top part of the screen.
c
Press
.
→ The pattern selected for editing is outlined in red on
the “Embroidery Edit” display.
d
E
2
Embroidery Edit
Selecting Embroidery
Patterns/Baby Lock
“Exclusives”/Floral Alphabet
Patterns/Frame/Bobbin Work
Patterns
Proceed to “EDITING PATTERNS” on
page E-61 to edit the pattern.
Embroidering E-59
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT
c
Press
f
to change the layout of the
.
pattern.
*
After you finish your selections, press
If the characters are too small to see, press
view a display of all entered characters.
to
→ The “Embroidery Edit” screen will appear.
g
d
Select the layout. (Example:
When selecting an arc, use
)
and
to
change the degree of the arc.
*
Press
to make the arc flatter.
*
Press
to make the arc rounder.
Memo
• When selecting
change to
,
and
and
. You can
increase or decrease the incline.
e
E-60
Press
to return to the original screen.
Proceed to “EDITING PATTERNS” on
page E-61 to edit the pattern.
EDITING PATTERNS
EDITING PATTERNS
E
2
d
a
b
c
a
b
c
d
e
a
e
b
c
e
Shows the size of the entire combined pattern.
Shows the size of the pattern currently selected.
Shows the distance from the center of the frame.
Shows the color sequence and times of each step of the pattern currently selected.
Shows the degree of rotation for the pattern.
Memo
• If a key display is light gray, you cannot use that function with the selected pattern.
Embroidering E-61
Embroidery Edit
d
EDITING PATTERNS
■ Key Functions
f
p
a
b
c
d
e
n
m
l
k
j
g
h
o
i
No.
Display
Key Name
Explanation
Page
a
Magnify key
Press this key to magnify the pattern by 200% in the screen.
E-63
b
Thread palette key
Press this key to change the colors of the displayed pattern.
E-67
c
Rotate key
Press this key to rotate the pattern. You can rotate a pattern one degree, ten
degrees or ninety degrees at a time.
E-38
d
Size key
Press this key to change the size of the pattern. Patterns can be enlarged or
reduced.
E-37
e
Array key
Press this key to change the configuration of a character pattern.
E-64
f
Multi color key
Press this key to change the color of individual characters in a pattern.
E-66
g
Character spacing
key
Press this key to change the spacing of character patterns.
E-64
h
Add key
Press this key to add another pattern to the editing pattern.
E-79
i
Delete key
Press this key to delete the selected pattern (the pattern outlined by the red
box).
E-63
j
“Embroidery” key
Press this key to call up the “Embroidery” screen.
E-79
k
Pattern select key
When a combined pattern is selected, use these keys to select a part of the
pattern to edit.
E-66
l
Duplicate key
Press this key to duplicate a pattern.
E-79
m
Density key
Press this key to change the density of frame patterns or character patterns.
E-40
n
Horizontal mirror
image key
Press this key to make a horizontal mirror image of the selected pattern.
E-39
o
Border key
Press this key to make and edit a repeating pattern.
E-73
p
Arrow keys
Press these keys to move the pattern in the direction indicated by the arrow on
E-36
(
the key. (Press
E-62
Center key)
to return the pattern to its original position.)
EDITING PATTERNS
Moving the Pattern
For details on moving the pattern, refer to “Moving
the Pattern” on page E-36.
Rotating the Pattern
Displaying Patterns in the Screen
Magnified by 200%
a
Press
2
.
Embroidery Edit
For details on rotating the pattern, refer to
“Rotating the Pattern” on page E-38.
Changing the Size of the Pattern
For details on changing the size of the pattern,
refer to “Changing the Size of the Pattern” on
page E-37.
Deleting the Pattern
Press
E
to delete the pattern from the screen.
→ The pattern is magnified by 200%.
b
Check the displayed pattern.
→ Use
in any direction.
c
to scroll through the display
To display the pattern back to the normal
size (100%), press
.
Embroidering E-63
EDITING PATTERNS
Changing the Configuration of
Character Patterns
a
Press
.
Press the key of the layout you want to
b
embroider.
*
See page E-60 for more information about layout
types.
Changing Character Spacing
a
Press
.
b
Use
to change the spacing.
*
Press
to increase the character spacing.
*
Press
to decrease the character spacing.
*
Press
to return the pattern to its original
appearance.
→ The display will show the selected layout.
c
Press
.
c
E-64
Press
to return to the original screen.
EDITING PATTERNS
Reducing Character Spacing
The spacing between characters can be reduced to
50% of the narrowest character in the group.
Note
Combined character patterns can be separated to
adjust the character spacing or to separately edit
the patterns after all characters have been entered.
a
Press
.
b
Press
.
→ The key appears as
E
2
Embroidery Edit
• It is not recommended to edit data and
transfer to other or older version machines.
Same features do not apply in other
machines, so problems may occur.
• Character spacing can be reduced only
when characters are arranged normally on a
straight line.
Separating Combined Character
Patterns
.
Embroidering E-65
EDITING PATTERNS
c
Use
to select where the pattern is
to be separated, and then press
to
separate it. For this example, the pattern
will be separated between “T” and “a”.
Changing the Color of Each
Alphabet Character in a Pattern
a
Press
so you can assign a thread color
to each character.
Note
• A separated character pattern cannot be
combined again.
d
Use
to select a pattern, and
then use
to adjust the character
b
*
Change the thread to sew each character in
a different color.
Press
to change the colors in the sewing order.
spacing.
a
a Color for each character
e
E-66
Press
.
EDITING PATTERNS
Embroidering Linked Characters
c
Press
to choose a new
color from the color palette.
You can embroider linked characters exampled
below, in a single row when the pattern extends
beyond the embroidery frame.
*
*
Example: Linking “DEF” to the characters
“ABC”
*
Touch
to activate your color palette.
Changing the Thread Color
You can change the thread color by moving the
color to be changed to the top of the sewing order
and selecting a new color from the thread colors in
the machine.
a
In the pattern editing screen, press
.
a
a Color palette
→ The selected color appears at the top of the sewing
order.
d
Press
.
→ The thread color palette screen displays.
b
Press
or
to put the color you want
to change at the top of the sewing order.
a
a 64 Embroidery threads table
→ The display shows the changed colors.
Memo
• To select a color from the Custom Thread
Table, “Choosing a Color from the Custom
Thread Table” on page E-72.
Embroidering E-67
2
Embroidery Edit
For details on embroidering linked characters,
refer to “Embroidering Linked Characters” on
page E-41.
To return to the original color, press
. If
multiple colors have been changed, this command
will return all colors to their original colors.
You can select colors from the color palette by
directly touching the color selection with the touch
pen.
E
EDITING PATTERNS
Creating a Custom Thread Table
b
Use
to choose where to
add a color on the custom thread table.
You can create a custom thread table containing
the thread colors that you most often use. You can
select thread colors from the machine’s extensive
list of thread colors from nine different thread
brands. You can select any color and move the
color to your custom thread table.
*
*
You can choose colors from the custom thread table
by directly touching the screen with the touch pen.
You can scroll through 100 colors at a time using
and
on the custom thread table.
Note
• Some machines may already have an
additional 300 Robison-Anton thread colors
contained in the custom thread table. 300
Robison-Anton thread colors table data can
be downloaded from our website
“ www.babylock.com ”.
a
In the pattern editing screen, press
then press
a
b
and
.
a Custom thread table
b Press
to recall the custom thread table
data (See page E-71)
c
Use
to select one of the thread
brands in the machine.
E-68
EDITING PATTERNS
d
f
Use
to enter a color’s 4-digit number.
*
If you make a mistake, press
*
To delete a specified color from the palette, select
the color to be deleted, and then press
to erase the
entered number, and then enter the correct number.
Repeat the previous steps until all desired
thread colors are specified.
*
.
To delete all the specified color from the palette,
press
.
g
Press
to return to the original screen.
a
a Thread brand
e
Press
.
■ Adding a Color to the Custom
Thread Table from the List
b
a
Repeat the previous steps a through c on
page E-68.
a
b
Press
to display the thread list.
a Thread brand
b Entered thread color number
→ The selected thread color is set in the custom thread
table.
Note
• If
is not pressed, the thread color
number will not be changed.
Embroidering E-69
2
Embroidery Edit
Note
• You can save the created custom thread
table data. Refer to “Saving the Custom
Thread Table to USB media” on page E-70
for the detailed procedure.
E
EDITING PATTERNS
c
Use
to select a thread color.
a
Press
b
Set your desired colors in the custom thread
table according to the procedure in
“Creating a Custom Thread Table” on
page E-68.
c
Insert the USB media into the USB port on
the machine.
and then press
.
a
b
a Thread list
b Thread brand
d
Press
e
Repeat the previous steps until all desired
thread colors are specified.
*
.
To delete a specified color from the palette, select
the color to be deleted, and then press
*
To delete all the specified color from the palette,
press
f
.
Press
.
to return to the original screen.
■ Saving the Custom Thread Table to
USB media
You can save a custom thread table data file to USB
media.
Note
• Custom thread table data can only be saved
to USB media. You cannot save the data in
the machine’s memory or in the computer.
• Custom thread table data is saved as “.pcp”
data file.
E-70
a USB port
b USB media
Note
• Two USB media cannot be used with this
machine at the same time. If two USB
media are inserted, only the USB media
inserted first is detected.
EDITING PATTERNS
d
Press
.
b
Press
and then press
.
E
2
Embroidery Edit
c
Press
.
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the data is
saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
Note
• Do not insert or remove USB media while
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
some or all of the data you are saving.
■ Recalling the Custom Thread Table
data from USB media
You can recall a custom thread table data from USB
media.
Note
• Do not store two or more “.pcp” data file in
USB media. You can only recall one custom
thread table data at a time.
a
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the data is
loaded to the machine, the display returns to the
original screen automatically.
Note
• Do not insert or remove USB media while
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
some or all of the data you are saving.
Insert the USB media containing the custom
thread table data into the USB port.
d
The recalled custom thread table is
displayed on the screen.
a USB port
b USB media
Embroidering E-71
EDITING PATTERNS
Choosing a Color from the
Custom Thread Table
c
Press
.
You can select a color from the up to 300 thread
colors you have set in the custom thread table.
a
Press
.
a
a Custom thread change key
→ The custom thread table will appear.
d
Press
to choose a new
color from the custom thread table.
*
and
to scroll through the custom
thread table.
→ The thread color palette screen displays.
Press
or
to put the color you want
b
to change at the top of the sewing order.
Use
*
Press
to return to the original color.
*
You can choose colors from the custom thread table
by directly touching the screen with the touch pen.
a
a Custom thread table
→ The display shows the changed colors.
e
E-72
Press
.
EDITING PATTERNS
Designing Repeated Patterns
E
■ Sewing Repeated Patterns
2
a
Select a pattern, and then press
b
Press
Embroidery Edit
Using the border function, you can create stitches
using repeated patterns. You can also adjust the
spacing of the patterns within a repeated pattern
stitch.
.
b
.
d
a
b
c
d
e
→
d
e
Vertical direction
Horizontal direction
Repeating and deleting vertical keys
Repeating and deleting horizontal keys
Spacing keys
The pattern direction indicator will change
depending on the direction selected.
Use
to repeat the pattern on top and
to repeat the pattern at the bottom.
c
Select the direction in which the pattern
will be repeated.
*
To delete the top pattern, press
*
To delete the bottom pattern, press
.
.
a
c
e
Embroidering E-73
EDITING PATTERNS
e
Adjust the spacing of the repeated pattern.
*
To widen spacing, press
.
*
To tighten spacing, press
.
■ Repeating One Element of a
Repeated Pattern
By using the Cut function, you can select one
element of a repeated pattern and repeat only that
single element. This function allows you to design
complex repeated patterns.
a
Choose the direction in which the repeated
pattern will be cut.
*
Press
to cut horizontally.
*
Press
to cut vertically.
a
a Press
to change a repeated pattern back to
one single pattern.
Memo
• You can only adjust the spacing of patterns
included in the red frame.
f
Complete repeated patterns by repeating
steps c through e.
g
Press
to finish repeating.
→ The pattern direction indicator will change
depending on the direction selected.
b
Use
and
to select the cut line.
Memo
• When there are two or more patterns, all
patterns will be grouped together as one
pattern in the red frame.
• When changing the direction in which the
pattern will be repeated, all of the patterns
in the red frame will automatically be
grouped as one repeating unit. Press
to change a repeated pattern back to one
single pattern. See the following section on
how to repeat one element of a repeated
pattern.
E-74
→ The cut line will move.
EDITING PATTERNS
c
Press
g
.
Press
to finish repeating.
E
2
Embroidery Edit
→ The repeated pattern will be divided into separate
elements.
d
Press
e
Use
and
repeat.
.
to select the element to
Note
• Once you have cut a repeated pattern into
separate elements, you cannot return to the
original repeated pattern.
• Each element can be edited separately in
the edit screen. See “Selecting combined
embroidery patterns” on page E-82.
■ Color Sorting Repeated Patterns
Press
to automatically change the sewing
order of colors in combined border embroidery
patterns so that the same color can be continuously
sewn. This allows you to continue sewing without
repeatedly changing the upper thread or changing
the sewing order manually.
Memo
• In combined stitch patterns that contain two
or more border patterns or other patterns
combined with border patterns, the sewing
order of only the border patterns is
changed.
• When a group of two or more patterns using
border patterns is repeated, the sewing
order is changed so that the same color can
be sewn continuously in each pattern.
f
Repeat the selected element.
Embroidering E-75
EDITING PATTERNS
a
Press
.
b
Press
.
c
Press
to select the thread mark to be
sewn.
■ Assigning Thread Marks
By sewing thread marks, you can easily align
patterns when embroidering a series. When sewing
is finished on a pattern, a thread mark in the shape
of an arrow will be sewn using the final thread.
When sewing a series of patterns, use the point of
this arrow for positioning the following designs to be
sewn.
Memo
• When repeatedly sewing individual patterns,
thread marks can be sewn around the
perimeter of the pattern only.
E-76
Memo
• When there are two or more elements, use
and
or
and
to select a
pattern that you want to assign a thread
mark(s) to.
EDITING PATTERNS
d
Press
.
a
*
Create the repeated pattern with the thread
mark at the center of the end of the pattern.
Refer to “Assigning Thread Marks” on page E-76.
E
2
Embroidery Edit
Embroidering the Pattern
Repeatedly
After creating the repeated pattern, rehoop the
embroidery frame and keep sewing for the next
pattern.
Memo
• The optional border frame allows you to
easily rehoop the fabric without removing
the embroidery frame from the machine.
b
Press
c
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
, then
.
→ When embroidering is finished, the thread mark is
sewn with the last thread color.
* The thread mark sewn indicates the positioning
point for the next embroidery.
d
Remove the embroidery frame.
Embroidering E-77
EDITING PATTERNS
e
Rehoop the fabric in the embroidery frame.
g
Touch
to set the starting point to the
center top of the pattern.
h
Touch
i
Press the positioning keys to move the
embroidery frame until the starting point is
aligned with the thread mark on the fabric.
Note
• Adjust the position of the fabric so that the
embroidering area for the next pattern is
within the embroidering area of the
embroidery sheet.
a Pattern embroidered first
b Position of pattern to be embroidered next
c Embroidering area of embroidery sheet
f
Attach the embroidery frame to the
machine, and then touch
.
.
a
a Positioning keys
*
E-78
Press
to check the embroidering position.
j
Remove the thread mark.
k
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
EDITING PATTERNS
Duplicating a Pattern
a
Press
.
After Editing
a
E
Press
2
.
Embroidery Edit
→ The duplicate is positioned over the original pattern.
*
To combine the pattern with other patterns, select
*
(see page E-80).
See page E-21 for more information about sewing
patterns.
Memo
• If you want to return to the edit screen after
a
pressing
, press
.
a Duplicated pattern
Note
• If multiple patterns are displayed in the
screen, only the pattern selected using
and
is duplicated.
• Move and edit each duplicated pattern
individually.
Embroidering E-79
COMBINING PATTERNS
COMBINING PATTERNS
Editing Combined Patterns
b
Select
c
Press
.
Example: Combining alphabet characters
with an embroidery pattern and
editing
a
Press
pattern.
E-80
to select an embroidery
.
COMBINING PATTERNS
d
Press
f
.
*
Select
and enter “Flower”.
After selecting
, press
to change the
character case, then enter the remaining characters.
E
2
Embroidery Edit
e
Press
to enter the alphabet
characters.
*
Press
to return to the previous screen.
→ The characters you enter will be displayed in the
center of the display.
g
Press
.
h
Use
to move the characters.
*
i
With a USB mouse, your finger or the touch pen,
drag the characters to move them.
Press
to change the layout of the
characters. Press
*
.
See page E-64 for more information about changing
the layout.
Embroidering E-81
COMBINING PATTERNS
j
*
k
Press
to change the color of the
characters.
Memo
See page E-67 for more information about changing
the color.
When all editing is finished, press
.
■ Selecting combined embroidery
patterns
If multiple patterns have been combined, use
to select the pattern to be edited. If a
USB mouse is connected, the pattern can be
selected by clicking it. Move the mouse to position
the pointer over the desired pattern, and then click
the left mouse button. In addition, patterns can be
selected by directly touching the screen with your
finger or touch pen.
E-82
• Use
to select patterns that are
overlapping and cannot be selected by
clicking them or by touching the screen.
COMBINING PATTERNS
Sewing Combined Patterns
b
Embroider
.
E
Combined patterns will be embroidered in the
order they were entered. In this example, the
embroidery order will be as follows:
2
Embroidery Edit
→
Note
• Follow the directions in “Sewing Embroidery
Patterns” on page E-22.
a
Embroider
by following the
color order on the right side of the display.
→ After the flowers are embroidered, the [+] cursor
will move to the “Flower” part of the pattern.
Embroidering E-83
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
Uninterrupted Embroidering
(Monochrome - Using a Single
Color)
a
Press
b
In the “Embroidery Basting Distance”
.
display, use
and
to specify the
distance from the pattern to the basting
stitching.
A selected pattern can be stitched out in one color
instead of multicolor. The machine will hesitate
but not stop between color steps, and then
continue till the pattern is completed. Press
for the multicolor steps to become shaded and the
selected pattern will embroider in a single color,
instead of changing the thread while
embroidering. Press
again to return to the
pattern’s original settings.
Memo
• The higher the setting, the farther the
basting is from the pattern.
• The setting remains selected even if the
machine is turned off.
c
Press
screen.
d
Press
.
e
Press
to select the basting setting.
to return to the previous
Basting Embroidery
Before embroidering, basting stitches can be sewn
along the outline of the pattern. This is useful for
embroidering fabric that cannot have stabilizer
material affixed with an iron or adhesive. By
stitching stabilizer material to the fabric, shrinkage
of the stitching or misaligned pattern can be
minimized.
Note
• It is recommended to finish combining and
editing the pattern before selecting the
basting setting. If the pattern is edited after
selecting the basting setting, the basting
and pattern may become misaligned, and
the basting under the pattern may be
difficult to remove after embroidering is
complete.
E-84
Note
• When
is pressed, the pattern is moved
to the center. After selecting the basting
setting, move the pattern to the desired
position.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
g
Memo
• To cancel the setting, press
When embroidering is finished, remove the
basting stitching.
E
.
2
→ Basting is added to the beginning of the sewing
order.
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
Embroidery Edit
f
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
In the same way as embroidery patterns in Chapter 1, you can save and retrieve edited embroidery
patterns to and from the machine’s memory, a personal computer, or USB media. Refer to the relevant
sections in Chapter 1 on saving and retrieving embroidery patterns and follow the same procedures in
order to save and retrieve edited embroidery patterns.
See page E-44 for more information about the memory function.
Embroidering E-85
EEmbroidering
Chapter
3
How to Create Bobbin Work
(Embroidery)
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK.......................................... 87
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK........................... 87
Required Materials....................................................................87
■
■
■
■
■
■
Bobbin case and bobbin cover ................................................. 87
Lower thread............................................................................ 87
Upper thread ........................................................................... 88
Needle ..................................................................................... 88
Embroidery foot ....................................................................... 88
Fabric ....................................................................................... 88
Upper Threading.......................................................................88
Preparing the Bobbin Thread ....................................................88
■ When tension is applied to the bobbin thread.......................... 90
■ When tension is not applied to the bobbin thread ................... 91
CREATING BOBBIN WORK .................................... 92
Selecting the Pattern.................................................................92
Start Embroidering....................................................................93
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION...................... 96
■ Adjusting the upper thread tension .......................................... 96
■ Adjusting the tension of the bobbin thread .............................. 96
TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................. 97
■ The thread was accidentally cut automatically and the bobbin
thread is caught inside the machine ......................................... 97
■ Correcting bobbin work tension .............................................. 97
■ The bobbin thread catches on the tension spring
of the bobbin case.................................................................... 97
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK
Refer to the “Quick Reference Guide” about the bobbin work patterns.
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
Required Materials
■ Bobbin case and bobbin cover
■ Lower thread
We recommend the following types of threads for
bobbin work.
No.5 or finer hand embroidery
thread or decorative thread
Bobbin case (gray)
There is a notch at the location indicated by the
letter “A”.
Bobbin cover
There are two small v-shaped tabs on the back of
the bobbin cover as indicated by the letter “B”.
The tabs help hold the bobbin in place so it does
not lift up while thick thread is being pulled
through.
Flexible woven ribbon
(Approx. 2mm (5/64 inch) is
recommended.)
* When wide ribbon or heavy weight threads are being used, we
recommend test embroidering with the thread through and also
bypassing the bobbin case tension to see which gives the best
stitching results.
If wide ribbon such as 3.5mm (approx. 1/8 inch) is to be used,
we recommend that bobbin case tension not be applied. Refer
to page E-91 for more detailed instructions.
Note
• Do not use thread heavier than No.5 hand
embroidery thread.
• Some threads may not be appropriate for
bobbin work. Be sure to sew trial stitches
before sewing on your project.
Embroidering E-87
E
3
How to Create Bobbin Work (Embroidery)
Beautiful embroidery work, with a three-dimensional appearance, can be created by winding the bobbin
with medium to heavy weight thread or ribbon, which is too thick to be threaded through the machine’s
needle. The decorative thread or ribbon will stitch out on the underneath side of fabric while
embroidering with the fabric wrong side facing up. Bobbin work embroidery is created using the bobbin
work patterns included with this machine.
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
■ Upper thread
Embroidery thread (polyester thread) or
monofilament (transparent nylon) thread.
If you do not wish for the upper thread to be visible,
we recommend using transparent nylon
monofilament thread or polyester light weight
thread (50wt. or above) that is the same color as the
lower thread.
■ Needle
Use a needle appropriate for the upper thread and
fabric being used. Refer to “Embroidery Step by
Step” of “Basic operations”.
■ Embroidery foot
Embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer
■ Fabric
Be sure to embroider trial patterns on a piece of
scrap fabric, which includes the same threads and
fabric as what is being used in your project.
Preparing the Bobbin Thread
In order to create bobbin work, the bobbin case
must be replaced with the one for bobbin work.
Before creating bobbin work, clean the bobbin case
and the race.
a
Raise the needle and embroidery foot, and
then turn off the machine.
b
Remove the embroidery unit.
c
Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover,
and then slide it toward you to remove it.
a Needle plate cover
d
Remove the bobbin case.
Note
• The results may be affected by the type of
fabric used. Before embroidering your
project, be sure to embroider trial patterns
on a piece of scrap fabric that is the same
as the fabric used in the project.
Upper Threading
a
Install a needle appropriate for the upper
thread and fabric to be used.
a Bobbin case
e
Use the cleaning brush included with the
machine or a vacuum cleaner to remove
any lint and dust from the race and its
surrounding area.
For details on installing the needle, refer to
“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” of “Basic operations”.
b
Attach the embroidery foot.
c
Thread the machine with the upper thread.
For details on threading the machine, refer to
“Upper Threading” of “Basic operations”.
E-88
a Cleaning brush
b Race
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
f
g
Wipe the bobbin case (gray) with a soft lint
free cloth to clean it.
h
Install the needle plate cover.
For details on installing the needle plate cover,
refer to “Cleaning the Race” of “Appendix”.
Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark
on the bobbin case aligns with the ● mark
on the machine.
3
a Needle plate cover
a
*
b
i
Install the embroidery unit.
j
Insert the thread tail from the spool of
thread through the hole in the bobbin from
the inside to the outside. Hold the thread
tail while winding the thread around the
bobbin by hand. After winding the bobbin
so it is filled as shown below (about 80%),
cut the thread.
k
Install a bobbin wound with an adequate
amount of thread for pattern.
Align the S and ● marks.
a S mark on the bobbin case
b ● mark on the machine
c Bobbin case
Note
Note
• The bobbin case (gray) cannot be used in
any way other than bobbin work. After
creating bobbin work, refer back to the
steps in “Preparing the Bobbin Thread” on
page E-88 for removing and cleaning the
bobbin case (gray), and then reinstall the
standard bobbin case.
CAUTION
• For an estimated length of bobbin thread
required for each pattern, refer to the
“Quick Reference Guide” included with the
machine. Be sure to use a bobbin wound
with enough thread. If the bobbin runs out
of thread while sewing, the embroidery
cannot be completed.
• Depending on the thread thickness, it may
not be possible to wind the bobbin with the
necessary length of thread. In this case, try
winding the bobbin again, or use a lighter
weight thread.
• Be sure to use the bobbin case (gray) when
creating bobbin work. Using any other bobbin
case may result in the thread becoming
tangled or damage to the machine.
• Make sure that the bobbin case is correctly
installed. If the bobbin case is incorrectly
installed, the thread may become tangled or
the machine may be damaged.
Embroidering E-89
How to Create Bobbin Work (Embroidery)
a
b
E
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
Memo
CAUTION
• If inserting thread tail through bobbin hole is
difficult, bobbin can be wound by holding
the tail and wrapping thread around inside
base. Then carefully trim thread tail so it
does not extend from the side of the
bobbin.
• Use a bobbin thread that has been correctly
wound. Otherwise, the needle may break or
the thread tension will be incorrect.
m
• The included bobbin was designed specifically
for this sewing machine. If bobbins from other
models are used, the machine will not operate
correctly. Use only the included bobbin or
bobbins of the same type (part code:
X52800-150).
*
a
b
c
Install the bobbin wound with thread.
Whether or not tension should be applied to the
bobbin thread depends on the type of thread being
used.
■ When tension is applied to the
bobbin thread
Insert bobbin into bobbin case so the thread
unwinds from the left side.
Then correctly pass the thread through the tension
spring as shown below.
Actual size
This model
Other models
11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)
Note
• Slowly and evenly wind the thread around
the bobbin.
• For best results, wind the bobbin so the
thread is snug and not twisted.
Using scissors carefully trim the thread tail
l
as close to the bobbin as possible.
a Beginning of wound thread
CAUTION
• If thread extends beyond the top of the bobbin
too much, the thread may become tangled or
the needle may break.
E-90
a Tension spring
CAUTION
• When winding the bobbin, make sure the
thread is not frayed. Embroidering with frayed
thread may result in the thread catching on
the tension spring of the bobbin case, the
thread completely becoming tangled or
damage to the machine.
• Do not guide the bobbin thread completely
through the groove in the needle plate cover,
otherwise the lower threading cannot be done
correctly. Thread only as far as shown below.
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
■ When tension is not applied to the
bobbin thread
p
Gently pull the upper thread to bring the
bobbin thread up through the needle plate.
E
If the bobbin thread in the trial stitching is too tight
and adjusting the bobbin case tension does not help,
do not pass the thread through the tension spring.
3
→ A loop of the bobbin thread comes out through the
hole in the needle plate.
n
Pull out about 8 cm (approx. 3 inches) of
bobbin thread.
o
Lightly hold the end of the upper thread
while turning the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) until the mark on the
handwheel aligns with the center top of
machine.
q
Insert tweezers through bobbin thread loop
and pull bobbin thread above the needle
plate.
r
Align the upper thread and bobbin thread,
and then pull out about 10 cm (approx.
4 inches) of the threads and pass them
under the embroidery foot toward the rear
of the machine.
s
Install the bobbin cover with tabs.
a Bobbin cover
→ This completes the upper and lower threading.
CAUTION
• When creating bobbin work, use the bobbin
cover with tabs, otherwise the thread may
become tangled or the needle may break.
Embroidering E-91
How to Create Bobbin Work (Embroidery)
Hold the bobbin with your left hand so the thread
unwinds from the right side and hold the end of the
thread with your right hand.
CREATING BOBBIN WORK
CREATING BOBBIN WORK
→ When a bobbin work embroidery pattern is selected
the embroidery sewing speed can only be adjusted
from 100 spm to a maximum of 350 spm.
Selecting the Pattern
Note
Note
• Prepare the machine for bobbin work as
described in “PREPARING FOR BOBBIN
WORK” on page E-87.
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Press
To select a bobbin work embroidery
pattern, press
or
(Embroidery).
• Embroidery patterns for bobbin work “B”
cannot be used in the “Embroidery Edit”
d
Press
or
).
• Bobbin work embroidery sewing speed
defaults to 100 spm when a bobbin work
embroidery pattern is selected. The
Settings screen will only allow speed to be
adjusted from 100 spm to a maximum
sewing speed of 350 spm.
, then select one of the bobbin
work embroidery patterns.
Embroidery patterns for bobbin work appear with
the letter “B” in the lower-left corner of the key.
a
a “B” mark
→ Regardless of the setting that had been selected, the
automatic thread cutting function “END COLOR
TRIM” is turned off.
E-92
• When creating bobbin work, be sure to select an
embroidery pattern for bobbin work. If any other
type of pattern is selected, the machine may be
damaged.
Note
Note
screen (
CAUTION
.
→ The carriage will move to the initialization position.
c
• The beginning and end of stitching are
specified for bobbin work patterns. They
cannot be used for normal embroidering.
• Recommended default setting for bobbin
work embroidery is 100 spm.
Memo
• When an embroidery pattern for bobbin
work is selected, the automatic thread
cutting function “END COLOR TRIM” is
turned off. Afterward, if a pattern other than
one for bobbin work is selected, the
automatic thread cutting function “END
COLOR TRIM” is returned to the setting that
was selected before the embroidery pattern
for bobbin work was chosen.
CREATING BOBBIN WORK
e
Press
.
→ The embroidery screen is displayed.
f
Press
, and then adjust the tension of
the upper thread.
For details on adjusting the tension of the upper
thread, refer to “Adjusting Thread Tension” on
page E-30.
• We recommend a setting between 6 and 8
for the upper thread tension.
Start Embroidering
a
Note
• Since bobbin work is embroidered from the
wrong side of the fabric, the pattern shown
in the screen appears as a mirror image of
the final sewn embroidery. If necessary, flip
the image to preview it. In addition, when
embroidering with the thread colors shown
in the embroidery screen, select a bobbin
thread that matches what is shown in the
screen.
a Image shown in screen
Hoop the fabric so the right side of the
fabric is facing down with the stabilizer
lying on the top. Use an embroidery frame
that fits the size of the pattern and then
attach the frame to the machine. These
patterns are embroidered from the wrong
side of the fabric so technically you are
working in “reverse” of normal
embroidering.
b Sewn embroidery
(Right side of fabric)
a Wrong side of fabric
Memo
• With bobbin work embroidery patterns, the
size and thread density cannot be changed.
In addition, the automatic thread cutting
function “END COLOR TRIM” cannot be
turned on.
CAUTION
• Always use a stabilizer material for embroidery.
Otherwise, the needle may break and cause injuries.
Not using a stabilizer material may result in a poor
finish to your project.
b
Press
c
Press
.
.
→ The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked.
Embroidering E-93
3
How to Create Bobbin Work (Embroidery)
Memo
E
CREATING BOBBIN WORK
d
Using the presser foot lever, raise the
embroidery foot.
e
To bring the bobbin thread above the
fabric, rotate the handwheel
counterclockwise while holding the upper
thread.
f
While holding both the upper thread and
the bobbin thread, sew a section of the
pattern.
k
Stop the machine, and then tie the upper
thread and the bobbin thread together to
secure the threads.
l
Start embroidery again to finish the pattern.
m
Raise the needle and embroidery foot,
remove the embroidery frame, and then cut
the upper thread and the bobbin thread.
As shown below, pull the upper thread to
pull the bobbin thread up through the
fabric.
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
Memo
• If the bobbin thread cannot be pulled up,
use an awl to create small hole to help pull
bobbin thread to surface.
g
Press
buttons.
h
Lower the embroidery foot.
i
It is necessary to move to the beginning of
stitching so press
, and then press
.
to unlock all keys and
→ The embroidery frame moves to the beginning of
stitching.
E-94
j
When cutting the threads, be sure to leave an
adequate length of thread so they can be
properly secured.
CREATING BOBBIN WORK
n
Using a hand sewing needle such as a
ribbon embroidering needle, pull the
bobbin thread to the top (wrong side) of the
fabric, and then tie the upper thread and
the bobbin thread together.
E
3
How to Create Bobbin Work (Embroidery)
Memo
• If there is a gap between the start point and
end point of the pattern, leave an adequate
length of thread, cut the threads, and
remove the fabric from the machine. Use a
ribbon embroidering needle to hand sew
stitches to connect the starting and ending
points.
o
Remove the fabric from the embroidery
frame, and check the finished embroidery.
a Right side of fabric
p
b Wrong side of fabric
If the desired results could not be achieved,
adjust the tension of the bobbin thread and
the upper thread, and then try
embroidering the pattern again.
For more details, refer to “ADJUSTING THE THREAD
TENSION” on page E-96.
Memo
• Check bobbin after each bobbin work
pattern is embroidered to make sure there
is adequate bobbin thread for the next
pattern.
• While selecting the bobbin work pattern, the
embroidery speed value is set to “100
spm”. Refer to “Adjusting the Embroidery
Speed” on page E-33 to change the
embroidery speed.
Embroidering E-95
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION
After embroidering trial patterns and checking the results, adjust the thread tensions if necessary. After adjusting the
tensions, be sure to embroider trial patterns again in order to check the results.
■ Adjusting the upper thread tension
We recommend a setting between 6 and 8 for the upper
thread tension when creating bobbin work.
Refer to “Adjusting Thread Tension” on page E-30.
■ Adjusting the tension of the bobbin
thread
If the desired stitching cannot be achieved after
adjusting the upper thread tension, adjust the tension of
the bobbin thread. The tension of the bobbin thread can
be adjusted by turning the slotted-head (–) screw on the
bobbin case (gray) for bobbin work.
a Do not turn the phillips screw (+).
b Adjust with a small screwdriver.
Note
• Turning the screw on the bobbin case (gray)
may push up the spring plate, as shown
below.
If this occurs, gently press down the spring
plate with a screwdriver so it is lower than
the top surface of the bobbin case (gray),
and then insert the bobbin case into the
machine.
a Spring plate
To increase the tension of the bobbin thread, turn the
slotted-head (–) screw 30° to 45° clockwise.
To decrease the tension of the bobbin thread, turn the
slotted-head (–) screw 30° to 45° counterclockwise.
CAUTION
• DO NOT adjust the position of the phillips (+)
screw on the bobbin case (gray) as this may result in
damage to the bobbin case, rendering it useless.
• If the slotted-head screw (-) is difficult to turn, do
not use force. Turning the screw too much or
providing force in either (rotational) direction may
cause damage to the bobbin case. Should damage
occur, the bobbin case may not maintain proper
tension.
Note
• If the bobbin thread tension is tight, the
thread cannot be passed through the
tension spring when the bobbin is installed
in the bobbin case. (Refer to “When tension
is not applied to the bobbin thread” on
page E-91.)
E-96
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Several solutions for minor problems are described below. If the problem persists, contact your nearest authorized
Baby Lock retailer.
■ Correcting bobbin work tension
*
a
Remove the embroidery frame.
*
b
Cut the thread near the fabric above the
needle plate, and then remove the fabric.
*
c
Remove the bobbin, and then hold it out
toward the left side of the machine.
d
Lower the embroidery foot.
e
Apply slight tension on bobbin thread by
holding thread out to the left side of
embroidery foot. Press the “Thread Cutter”
button again.
If the top thread shows on the bobbin side of the
fabric, increase the upper tension (Refer to
“ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION” on
page E-96).
If the top thread still shows on the bobbin side of the
fabric, reduce the tension of the bobbin thread or
bypass the bobbin tension. (Refer to “ADJUSTING
THE THREAD TENSION” on page E-96.)
Some bobbin threads are too coarse to pass through
to wrong side of fabric. In this case, be sure to color
match top thread with bobbin threads.
Example: Embroidery patterns for bobbin work
a Correct tension
b The upper thread tension is too loose, or the
bobbin thread tension is too tight.
■ The bobbin thread catches on the
tension spring of the bobbin case
Embroider with no tension applied to the bobbin
thread. (Refer to “When tension is not applied to the
bobbin thread” on page E-91.)
CAUTION
• Do not pull on the thread with excessive force,
otherwise the machine may be damaged.
Embroidering E-97
3
How to Create Bobbin Work (Embroidery)
■ The thread was accidentally cut
automatically and the bobbin thread
is caught inside the machine
E
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-98
Appendix
This section provides important information for operating this machine. Please read this section to find
troubleshooting tips and pointers as well as how to keep your machine in the best working order.
Page number starts with “A” in this section.
The screen display and machine illustration may vary slightly, depending on the country or region.
Chapter1 Maintenance and Troubleshooting ......................... A-2
A Appendix
Chapter
1
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CARE AND MAINTENANCE ...................................... 3
Restrictions on oiling ..................................................................3
Precautions on storing the machine ............................................3
Cleaning the LCD Screen ...........................................................3
Cleaning the Machine Casing .....................................................3
Cleaning the Race .......................................................................3
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin Case Area..............................5
About the Maintenance Message ................................................5
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN ......................................... 6
Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen Display ...........................6
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning....................................................6
TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................... 7
Frequent troubleshooting topics .................................................7
Upper thread is too tight ............................................................7
■ Symptom .................................................................................... 7
■ Cause ......................................................................................... 7
■ Remedy ...................................................................................... 7
Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric ......................................8
■ Symptom .................................................................................... 8
■ Cause ......................................................................................... 8
■ Remedy ...................................................................................... 8
Incorrect thread tension ...........................................................10
■ Symptoms ................................................................................ 10
■ Cause/remedy .......................................................................... 10
Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be removed ..........11
■ Removing the fabric from the machine .................................... 11
■ Checking machine operations .................................................. 13
List of Symptoms.......................................................................14
ERROR MESSAGES................................................... 18
SPECIFICATIONS..................................................... 21
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE........ 22
Upgrade Procedure Using USB Media ......................................22
Upgrade Procedure Using Computer ........................................23
INDEX...................................................................... 24
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
A
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the machine before cleaning it. Otherwise, electric shock or injury may result.
In order to prevent damaging this machine, it must
not be oiled by the user. This machine was
manufactured with the necessary amount of oil
applied to ensure correct operation, making
periodic oiling unnecessary.
If problems occur, such as difficulty turning the
handwheel or an unusual noise, immediately stop
using the machine, and contact your nearest
authorized retailer.
Precautions on storing the
machine
Do not store the machine in any of the locations
described below, otherwise damage to the
machine may result, for example, rust caused by
condensation.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Exposed to extremely high temperatures
Exposed to extremely low temperatures
Exposed to extreme temperature changes
Exposed to high humidity or steam
Near a flame, heater or air conditioner
Outdoors or exposed to direct sunlight
Exposed to extremely dusty or oily environments
Note
Cleaning the Machine Casing
If the surface of the machine is dirty, lightly soak a
cloth in a neutral detergent, squeeze it out firmly,
and wipe the surface. Then wipe again with a dry
cloth.
Cleaning the Race
If dust or bits of dirt collect in the race or bobbin
case, the machine will not run well, and the
bobbin thread detection function may not operate.
Keep the machine clean for best results.
a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
b
Turn the main power to OFF.
c
Remove the needle, presser foot, and
presser foot holder (see page B-55 through
B-57).
d
Remove the flat bed attachment or the
embroidery unit if either is attached.
e
Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover,
and then slide it toward you.
• In order to extend the life of this machine,
periodically turn it on and use it. Storing this
machine for an extended period of time
without using it may reduce its efficiency.
Cleaning the LCD Screen
If the screen is dirty, gently wipe it with a soft, dry
cloth. Do not use organic solvents or detergents.
Note
• Do not wipe the LCD screen with a damp
cloth.
a Needle plate cover
→ The needle plate cover is removed.
f
Grasp the bobbin case, and then pull it out.
Memo
• Occasionally, condensation may form on
the LCD screen or it may become fogged
up; however, this is not a malfunction. After
a while, the cloudiness will disappear.
a Bobbin case
Appendix A-3
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Restrictions on oiling
1
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
g
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner
to remove any lint and dust from the race
and bobbin thread sensor and the
surrounding area.
*
Make sure that the indicated points are aligned
before installing the bobbin case.
CAUTION
• Never use a bobbin case that is scratched;
otherwise, the upper thread may become
tangled, the needle may break, or sewing
performance may suffer. For a new bobbin
case (part code: XE5342-101 (green marking
on the screw), XC8167-551 (no color on the
screw), XE8298-001 (gray, for bobbin work)),
contact your nearest authorized retailer.
• Make sure that you fit the bobbin case
properly, otherwise the needle may break.
a Cleaning brush
b Race
c Bobbin thread sensor
i
Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover
into the needle plate, and then slide the
cover back on.
Note
• Do not apply oil to the bobbin case.
• If lint or dust collects on the bobbin thread
sensor, the sensor may not operate
correctly.
h
Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark
on the bobbin case aligns with the ● mark
on the machine.
Note
a
• If the needle plate has been removed it is
especially important to reinstall the needle
plate and tighten the screws prior to
installing the bobbin case.
b
a
*
Align the S and ● marks.
a S mark on the bobbin case
b ● mark on the machine
c Bobbin case
A-4
b
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin
Case Area
d
Use the screwdriver included with the
machine to screw and attach the needle
plate.
1
Follow steps a through e in “Cleaning the
Race” to remove the needle plate cover.
b
Use the screwdriver included with the
machine to unscrew and remove the needle
plate.
e
Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover
into the needle plate, and then slide the
cover back on.
About the Maintenance Message
c
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner
to remove any lint and dust from the cutter
in the bobbin case area.
Once this message appears, it is recommended to
take your machine to your nearest authorized
retailer for a regular maintenance check. Although
this message will disappear and the machine will
continue to function once you press
, the
message will display several more times until the
appropriate maintenance is performed.
Please take the time to arrange the maintenance
your machine requires once this message appears.
Such steps will help to ensure you receive
continued, uninterrupted hours of machine
operation for the future.
a Cutter
CAUTION
• Do not touch the cutter, otherwise injuries
may result.
Appendix A-5
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
The cutter below the needle plate should be
cleaned. If dust or lint accumulate on the cutter, it
will be difficult to cut the thread when the “Thread
Cutter” button is pressed or the automatic thread
cutting function is used. Clean the cutter when the
thread is not easily cut.
a
A
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
Adjusting the Brightness of the
Screen Display
Under certain lighting conditions, the brightness of
the LCD screen may need to be adjusted.
a
Press
b
Press
.
→ The settings screen appears.
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning
If the screen does not respond correctly when you
touch a key (the machine does not perform the
operation or performs a different operation), follow
the steps below to make the proper adjustments.
a
Holding your finger on the screen, turn the
main power switch to OFF and back to ON.
.
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display page 6 of the General settings
screen.
d
Press
or
to adjust the brightness of
the screen display.
→ The touch panel adjustment screen is displayed.
b
Using the included touch pen, lightly touch
the center of each +, in order from 1 to 5.
Note
• Only use the included touch pen to touch
the screen. Do not use a mechanical pencil,
pin, or other sharp object. Do not press too
hard on the screen. Otherwise, damage
may result.
+4
+1
+5
+2
*
The screen appears dim as the number on the
settings screen decreases. The screen appears
brighter as the number increases.
c
+3
Turn the main power to OFF, then turn it
back to ON.
Note
• If you finish the screen adjustment and the
screen still does not respond, or if you
cannot do the adjustment, contact your
authorized retailer.
A-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the machine stops operating correctly, check the following possible problems before requesting service.
You can solve most problems by yourself. Visit us at “ www.babylock.com ”.
If the problem persists, contact your nearest authorized retailer.
Detailed causes and remedies for common troubleshooting topics are described below. Be sure to refer to
this before contacting your retailer.
■ Upper thread is too tight
page A-7
■ Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric
page A-8
■ Incorrect thread tension
page A-10
■ Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be
removed
page A-11
Upper thread is too tight
■ Symptom
*
*
*
*
*
a
b
c
d
e
The upper thread appears as a single continuous
line.
The lower thread is visible from the upper side of the
fabric. (Refer to the illustration below.)
The upper thread has tightened up, and comes out
when pulled.
The upper thread has tightened up, and wrinkles
appear in the fabric.
The upper thread tension is tight, and the results do
not change even after the thread tension is adjusted.
Lower side of fabric
Lower thread visible from upper side of fabric
Upper thread
Upper side of fabric
Lower thread
■ Cause
■ Remedy
Correctly install the lower thread.
a
Turn off the sewing machine.
b
Remove the bobbin from the bobbin case.
c
Place the bobbin in the bobbin case so that
the thread unwinds in the correct direction.
*
Hold the bobbin with your right hand with the
thread unwinding to the left, and hold the end of the
thread with your left hand. Then, with your right
hand, place the bobbin in the bobbin case.
If the bobbin is inserted with the thread unwinding
in the wrong direction, sewing will be done with
an incorrect thread tension.
Incorrect lower threading
If the lower thread is incorrectly threaded, instead of
the appropriate tension being applied to the lower
thread, it is pulled through the fabric when the
upper thread is pulled up. For this reason, the thread
is visible from the upper side of the fabric.
Appendix A-7
1
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Frequent troubleshooting topics
A
TROUBLESHOOTING
d
*
While holding the bobbin in place with
your finger, pass the thread through the slit
in the needle plate.
Hold down the bobbin with your right hand, and
then pull the end of the thread around the tab with
your left hand.
Tangled thread on wrong side of
fabric
■ Symptom
*
The thread becomes tangled on the lower side of the
fabric.
*
After starting sewing, a rattling noise is made and
sewing cannot continue.
Looking under the fabric, there is tangled thread in
the bobbin case.
a Tab
b Hold down the bobbin with your right hand.
Pull the thread to pass it through the slit in the
needle plate, then cut it with the cutter.
*
■ Cause
Incorrect upper threading
If the upper thread is incorrectly threaded, the upper
thread passed through the fabric cannot be firmly
pulled up and the upper thread becomes tangled in
the bobbin case, causing a rattling noise.
■ Remedy
c Slit
d Cutter
Sewing with the correct thread tension is possible
after the bobbin has been correctly installed in the
bobbin case.
Remove the tangled thread, and then correct the
upper threading.
a
*
Refer to “Cleaning the Race” in “CARE AND
MAINTENANCE” on page A-3.
b
Remove the upper thread from the
machine.
c
Refer to the following steps to correct the
upper threading.
*
A-8
Remove the tangled thread. If it cannot be
removed, cut the thread with scissors.
If the bobbin was removed from the bobbin case,
refer to “LOWER THREADING” on page B-40 and
“Remedy” in the section “Upper thread is too tight”
on page A-7 to correctly install the bobbin.
TROUBLESHOOTING
d
Raise the presser foot using the presser foot
lever.
g
While holding the thread in your right
hand, pass the thread through the thread
guide in the direction indicated.
A
1
If the presser foot is not raised, the sewing machine
cannot be threaded correctly.
Raise the needle by turning the handwheel
e
toward you (counterclockwise) so that the
mark on the wheel points up, or press
“Needle Position” button once or twice to
raise the needle.
h
or
Guide the thread down, up, then down
through the groove, as shown in the
illustration.
Memo
• Look in the upper groove area to check if
the thread catches on the take-up lever
visible inside the upper groove area.
a Mark
f
While holding the thread with both hands,
pull the thread up from under the thread
guide plate.
a Look in the upper groove area
i
Pass the thread through the needle bar
thread guide (marked “6”) by holding the
thread with both hands and guiding it as
shown in the illustration.
a Thread guide plate
a Needle bar thread guide
j
Thread the needle according to steps j
and o in “Upper Threading” on page B-48.
Appendix A-9
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
*
TROUBLESHOOTING
Incorrect thread tension
■ Symptoms
•
•
•
•
•
Symptom 1: The lower thread is visible from the upper side of the fabric.
Symptom 2: The upper thread appears as a straight line on the upper side of the fabric.
Symptom 3: The upper thread is visible from the lower side of the fabric.
Symptom 4: The lower thread appears as a straight line on the lower side of the fabric.
Symptom 5: The stitching on the lower side of the fabric is loose or has slack.
□ Symptom 1
□ Symptom 3
a Lower side of fabric
b Lower thread visible on
upper side of fabric
c Upper thread
d Upper side of fabric
e Lower thread
f Upper thread visible from
lower side of fabric
■ Cause/remedy
□ Cause 1
The machine is not correctly threaded.
<With symptoms 1 and 2 described above>
The lower threading is incorrect.
Adjust the upper thread tension and then refer to “Upper Thread is Too Tight” on page S-12.
<With symptoms 3 through 5 described above>
The upper threading is incorrect.
Adjust the upper thread tension and then refer to “Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric” on page A-8 to correct
the upper threading.
□ Cause 2
A needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not being used.
The sewing machine needle that should be used depends on the type of fabric sewn and the thread thickness.
If a needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not being used, the thread tension will not be adjusted
correctly, causing wrinkles in the fabric or skipped stitches.
*
Refer to “Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations” on page B-60 to check that a needle and thread are appropriate for the
fabric being used.
□ Cause 3
An appropriate upper tension is not selected.
Adjust the upper thread tension to select an appropriate thread tension.
The appropriate thread tension differs according to the type of fabric and thread being used.
*
Adjust the thread tension while test sewing on a piece of scrap fabric that is the same as that used in your project.
Note
• If the upper threading and lower threading are incorrect, the thread tension cannot be adjusted
correctly, even by adjusting the upper thread tension. Check the upper threading and lower threading
first, and then adjust the thread tension.
*
*
A-10
When the lower thread is visible on the upper side
of the fabric. Set the upper thread tension to a lower
number. (Loosen the thread tension.)
When the upper thread is visible on the lower side
of the fabric. Set the upper thread tension to a higher
number. (Tighten the thread tension.)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fabric is caught in the machine
and cannot be removed
■ Removing the fabric from the
machine
a
Immediately stop the sewing machine.
b
Turn off the sewing machine.
c
Remove the needle.
If the needle is lowered into the fabric, turn the
handwheel away from you (clockwise) to raise the
needle out of the fabric, and then remove the needle.
* Refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page B-57.
d
*
e
Remove the presser foot and presser foot
holder.
Refer to “CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT” on
page B-55.
Lift up the fabric and cut the threads below
it.
Remove the bobbin case.
If threads remain in the bobbin case, remove them.
1
a Bobbin case
i
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner
to remove any dust or loose threads from
the race and its surrounding area.
a Cleaning brush
b Race
If the fabric could be removed
If the fabric could not be
removed
j
Continue with
step p.
Continue with
step j.
Use the enclosed disc-shaped screwdriver
to loosen the two screws on the needle
plate.
If the fabric can be removed, remove it. Continue with
the following steps to clean the race.
f
Remove the needle plate cover.
Note
• Be careful not to drop the removed screws
in the machine.
a Needle plate cover
g
A
Cut out the tangled threads, and then
remove the bobbin.
Appendix A-11
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
If the fabric is caught in the sewing machine and
cannot be removed, the thread may have become
tangled under the needle plate. Follow the
procedure described below to remove the fabric
from the machine. If the operation could not be
completed according to the procedure, instead of
attempting to complete it forcefully, contact your
nearest authorized retailer.
h
TROUBLESHOOTING
k
Slightly lift up the needle plate, cut any
tangled threads, and then remove the
needle plate.
p
Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark
on the bobbin case aligns with the ● mark
on the machine.
Remove the fabric and threads from the needle plate.
a
b
If the fabric cannot be removed, even after completing
these steps, contact your nearest authorized retailer.
l
Remove any threads in the race and around
the feed dogs.
m
Turn the handwheel to raise the feed dogs.
n
Align the two screw holes in the needle
plate with the two holes at the needle plate
mounting base, and then fit the needle plate
onto the machine.
o
Lightly finger-tighten the screw on the right
side of the needle plate. Then, use the
disc-shaped screwdriver to firmly tighten
the screw on the left side. Finally, firmly
tighten the screw on the right side.
a
b
*
Align the S and ● marks.
a
b
c
*
S mark on the bobbin case
● mark on the machine
Bobbin case
Make sure that the indicated points are aligned
before installing the bobbin case.
CAUTION
Turn the handwheel to check that the feed dogs move
smoothly and do not contact the edges of the slots in
the needle plate.
a Correct position of feed dogs
b Incorrect position of feed dogs
Note
• Be careful not to drop the removed screws
in the machine.
A-12
• Never use a bobbin case that is scratched;
otherwise, the upper thread may become
tangled, the needle may break, or sewing
performance may suffer. For a new bobbin
case (part code: XE5342-101 (green marking
on the screw), XC8167-551 (no color on the
screw), XE8298-001 (gray, for bobbin work)),
contact your nearest authorized retailer.
• Make sure that you fit the bobbin case
properly, otherwise the needle may break.
TROUBLESHOOTING
q
Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover
into the needle plate, and then slide the
cover back on.
c
Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise), and look from all sides
to check that the needle falls at the center
of the hole in the needle plate.
Note
• If the needle plate has been removed it is
especially important to reinstall the needle
plate and tighten the screws prior to
installing the bobbin case.
r
Check the condition of the needle, and then
install it.
If the needle is in a poor condition, for example, if it is
bent, be sure to install a new needle.
* Refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page B-57.
CAUTION
a Hole in the needle plate
b Handwheel
d
Note
e
• Since the needle may have been damaged
when the fabric was caught in the machine,
we recommend replacing it with a new one.
f
*
*
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Select
Turn off the machine, and then install the
bobbin and presser foot.
Refer to “Setting the Bobbin” and “CHANGING THE
PRESSER FOOT” on page B-55.
Correctly thread the machine.
For details on the machine, refer to “Upper
Threading” on page B-48.
Note
■ Checking machine operations
If the needle plate has been removed, check
machine operations to confirm that installation has
been completed correctly.
Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) and check that the
needle bar and feed dogs operate correctly.
If the needle or feed dogs contact the needle plate, the
machine may be malfunctioning; therefore, contact
your nearest authorized retailer.
g
Memo
. At this time,
increase the stitch length and width to their
maximum settings.
• Never use bent needles. Bent needles can
easily break, possibly resulting in injuries.
• After completing this procedure, continue
with the following procedure in “Checking
machine operations” to check that the
machine is operating correctly.
Select zigzag stitch
• The thread may have become tangled as a
result of incorrect upper threading. Make
sure that the machine is correctly threaded.
h
Perform trial sewing with normal fabric.
Note
.
Note
• Incorrect sewing may be the result of
incorrect upper threading or sewing thin
fabrics. If there are poor results from the
trial sewing, check the upper threading or
the type of fabric being used.
• Do not yet install the presser foot and
thread.
Appendix A-13
1
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
If the needle contacts the needle plate, remove the
needle plate, and then install it again, starting with
step m in “Removing the fabric from the machine” on
page A-12.
A
TROUBLESHOOTING
List of Symptoms
Problem
Cause
Solution
Page
The thread is tangled
on the wrong side of
the fabric.
Upper threading is incorrect.
Check the steps for threading the machine
and rethread the machine.
B-48
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” chart.
B-60
The upper thread is
too tight.
The bobbin thread is incorrectly installed.
Correctly install the bobbin thread.
B-45
Cannot thread the
needle
Needle is not in the correct position.
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
B-14
Needle is installed incorrectly.
Reinstall the needle correctly.
B-57
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull.
Replace the needle.
B-57
Cannot lower the
presser foot with the
presser foot lever
Presser foot was raised using the “Presser Foot Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
Lifter” button.
lower the presser foot.
B-14
Thread tension is
incorrect
Upper threading is incorrect.
Check the steps for threading the machine
and rethread the machine.
B-48
Bobbin is set incorrectly.
Reset the bobbin. (If needle plate was
removed, reinstall needle plate and tighten
screws prior to installing bobbin case.)
B-45
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combination” chart.
B-60
Upper thread breaks
Presser foot holder is not attached correctly.
Reattach the presser foot holder correctly.
Thread tension is set incorrectly.
Adjust the thread tension.
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound.
Use a correctly wound bobbin.
B-40
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull.
Replace the needle.
B-57
Machine is not threaded correctly (used the
Rethread the machine correctly.
wrong spool cap, spool cap is loose, the thread
did not catch the needle bar threader, etc.)
B-48
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull.
Replace the needle.
B-57
There are scratches on the bobbin case.
Replace the bobbin case, or consult your
authorized retailer.
A-3
Upper thread tension is too strong.
Adjust the thread tension.
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” chart.
Thread is twisted.
Use scissors, etc., to cut the twisted thread
and remove it from the race, etc.
S-12, E-30
B-60
—
There are scratches near the hole of the needle Replace the needle plate, or consult your
plate.
authorized retailer.
S-26
There are scratches near the hole in the presser Replace the presser foot, or consult your
foot.
authorized retailer.
B-55
Needle is installed incorrectly.
Reinstall the needle correctly.
B-57
Thread is knotted or tangled.
Rethread upper and lower thread.
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
is not used.
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
Bobbin thread breaks Bobbin is set incorrectly.
Reset the bobbin thread correctly.
There are scratches on the bobbin or it doesn’t Replace the bobbin.
rotate properly.
Thread is twisted.
Use scissors, etc. to cut the twisted thread
and remove it from the race, etc.
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
is not used.
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
Bobbin thread does
The thread is not passed through the bobbin
not wind neatly on the winding thread guide correctly.
bobbin.
Bobbin spins slowly.
B-45, B-48
B-45
B-45
B-45
—
B-45
Correctly pass the thread through the bobbin
winding thread guide.
B-41
Press [+] in the bobbin winding window to
increase the bobbin winding speed.
B-43
The thread that was pulled out was not wound Wind the thread that was pulled off around
onto the bobbin correctly.
the bobbin 5 or 6 times clockwise.
A-14
B-55
S-12, E-30
B-42
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Skipped stitches
Solution
Page
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull.
Replace the needle.
B-57
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combination” chart.
B-60
Machine is threaded incorrectly.
Check the steps for threading the machine
and rethread it correctly.
B-48
Dust or lint has collected under the needle
plate.
Remove the dust or lint with the brush.
A-3
Needle is installed incorrectly.
Reinstall the needle correctly.
B-57
Needle is defective.
Replace the needle.
B-57
Thin or stretch fabrics are being sewn.
Sew with one sheet of thin paper under the
fabric.
S-9
Needle is installed incorrectly.
Reinstall the needle correctly.
B-57
Needle clamp screw is not tightened.
Tighten the needle clamp screw.
B-58
Needle is turned or bent.
Replace the needle.
B-57
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the needle and fabric combination.
Wrong presser foot was used.
Use the recommended presser foot.
Upper thread tension is too strong.
Adjust the thread tension setting.
Fabric is pulled during sewing.
Do not pull the fabric during sewing.
Spool cap is set incorrectly.
Check the method for attaching the spool
cap, then reattach the spool cap.
B-48
There are scratches around the holes in the
needle plate.
Replace the needle plate, or consult your
authorized retailer.
A-3
There are scratches around the hole(s) in the
presser foot.
Replace the presser foot, or consult your
authorized retailer.
B-55
There are scratches on the bobbin case.
Replace the bobbin case, or consult your
authorized retailer.
A-3
B-59, E-21
S-68
S-12, E-30
—
Needle is defective.
Replace the needle.
B-57
Upper threading is incorrect.
Check the steps for threading the machine
and rethread the machine.
B-48
Bobbin is set incorrectly.
Reset the bobbin thread correctly.
B-45
Presser foot is attached incorrectly.
Attach the presser foot correctly.
B-55
Screw of the presser foot holder is loose.
Securely tighten the screw of the presser
foot.
B-55
Fabric is too thick.
Use fabric that the needle can pierce when
the handwheel is turned.
S-7
Fabric is fed forcefully when sewing thick fabric Allow the fabric to be fed without being
or thick seams.
forcefully pushed.
Fabric does not feed
through the machine
Stitch length is too short.
Adjust the stitch length.
Stabilizer is not attached to fabric being
embroidered.
Attach stabilizer.
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound.
Use a correctly wound bobbin.
S-10
S-81, E-11
B-40
Feed dogs are set in the down position.
S-40
Press
, and then turn the handwheel to
raise the feed dogs.
Fabric puckers
Stitches are too close together.
Lengthen the stitch length setting.
Wrong presser foot was used.
Use the correct presser foot.
S-68
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull.
Replace the needle.
B-57
Thread is entangled.
Cut the entangled thread and remove it from
the race.
A-11
There is a mistake in the upper or bobbin
threading.
Check the steps for threading the machine
and rethread it correctly.
B-45, B-48
Thread tension is set incorrectly.
Adjust the thread tension.
S-12, E-30
Stitches are too long when sewing thin fabrics. Shorten the stitch length.
S-10
S-10
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull.
Replace the needle.
B-57
Spool cap is set incorrectly.
Check the method for attaching the spool
cap, then reattach the spool cap.
B-48
Wrong presser foot.
Use the correct presser foot.
S-68
Appendix A-15
A
1
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Needle breaks
Cause
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
High-pitched sound
while sewing
Cause
Solution
Dust or lint is caught in the feed dogs.
Remove the dust or lint.
A-3
Pieces of thread are caught in the race.
Clean the race.
A-3
Upper threading is incorrect.
Check the steps for threading the machine
and rethread the machine.
B-48
There are scratches on the bobbin case.
Replace the bobbin case, or consult your
authorized retailer.
A-3
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
is not used.
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
Character pattern
does not turn out
Machine does not
operate
B-45
Wrong presser foot was used.
Attach the correct presser foot.
S-68
Pattern adjustment settings were set
incorrectly.
Revise the pattern adjustment settings.
S-82
Did not use a stabilizer material on thin fabrics
or stretch fabrics.
Attach a stabilizer material.
S-81
S-12, E-30
Thread tension is set incorrectly.
Adjust the thread tension.
Fabric was pulled, pushed or fed at an angle
while it was being sewn.
Sew while guiding the fabric with your hands
so that the fabric is fed in a straight line.
There is no pattern selected.
Select a pattern.
S-3
S-21, S-77, E-3,
E-58
“Start/Stop” button was not pushed.
Press the “Start/Stop” button.
B-14
Main power switch is not turned on.
Turn the main power to ON.
B-21
Presser foot is not lowered.
Lower the presser foot.
B-14
“Start/Stop” button was pushed with the foot
controller attached.
Remove the foot controller, or use the foot
controller to operate the machine.
S-4
The “Start/Stop” button was pressed while the Use the foot controller instead of the
machine is set for the sewing speed controller “Start/Stop” button to operate the machine,
to control the zigzag stitch width.
or set the “Width Control” to “OFF” in the
settings screen.
All keys and buttons have been locked by
.
Nothing happens,
even if the LCD
display is pressed
Page
The screen has been locked.
Press
to unlock all keys and
B-28, S-4
B-55, B-57
buttons.
Press either of the following keys to unlock
—
the screen.
The fabric feeds in the The feed mechanism is damaged.
opposite direction.
Contact your nearest authorized retailer.
—
The LCD screen is
fogged up.
Condensation has formed on the LCD screen.
After a while, the cloudiness will disappear.
—
Embroidery pattern
does not sew out
correctly
Thread is twisted.
Use scissors, etc., to cut the twisted thread
and remove it from the race, etc.
A-11
Fabric was not inserted into the frame correctly If the fabric is not stretched tight in the frame,
(fabric was loose, etc.).
the pattern may turn out poorly or there may
be shrinkage of the pattern. Set the fabric
into the frame correctly.
E-14
Stabilizing material was not attached.
Always use stabilizing material, especially
with stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics,
fabrics with a coarse weave, or fabrics that
often cause pattern shrinkage. See your
authorized retailer for the proper stabilizer.
E-11
There was an object placed near the machine,
and the carriage or embroidery frame hit the
object during sewing.
If the frame bumps something during sewing,
the pattern will turn out poorly. Do not place
anything in the area where the frame may
bump it during sewing.
E-21
Fabric outside the frame edges interferes with Reinsert the fabric in the embroidery frame so
the sewing arm, so the embroidery unit cannot that the excess fabric is away from the
move.
sewing arm, and rotate the pattern 180
degrees.
E-14
Fabric is too heavy, so the embroidery unit
cannot move freely.
A-16
Place a large thick book or similar object
under the arm head to lightly lift the heavy
side and keep it level.
—
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Embroidery pattern
does not sew out
correctly
Cause
Solution
Fabric is hanging off the table.
Page
If the fabric is hanging off the table during
embroidery, the embroidery unit will not
move freely. Place the fabric so that it does
not hang off the table or hold the fabric to
keep it from dragging.
A
Stop the machine and place the fabric so that
it does not get caught or snagged.
—
Embroidery frame was removed during sewing
(for example, to reset the bobbin). The presser
foot was bumped or moved while removing or
attaching the embroidery frame, or the
embroidery unit was moved.
If the presser foot is bumped or the
embroidery unit is moved during sewing, the
pattern will not turn out. Be careful when
removing or reattaching the embroidery
frame during sewing.
E-26
The thread tension is incorrectly set.
E-11
Adjust the thread tension.
E-30 to E-32
The tension of the upper thread is incorrectly
Use the embroidery needle plate cover.
set for the combination of the fabric, thread and
pattern being used.
E-22
The combination of the bobbin case and
bobbin thread is incorrect.
E-21
Embroidery unit does There is no pattern selected.
not operate
Main power switch is not turned on.
Embroidery unit is not attached correctly.
Change the bobbin case or bobbin thread so
that the correct combination is used.
Select a pattern.
E-3, E-58
Turn the main power to ON.
B-21
Reattach the embroidery unit correctly.
B-65
Embroidery frame was attached before the unit Perform the initialization process correctly.
was initialized.
B-65
With thick elastic fabric, the position will be
misaligned only at raised parts in the fabric.
Manually adjust the position according to the
thickness of the fabric.
B-64
With fabric having a very uneven surface, the
position is not correctly aligned.
The pointer indication should be used only as
a reference.
B-63
Specifying with
The sensor pen has not been calibrated.
sensor pen cannot be
done accurately
The pen is being held differently than when it
was calibrated.
Before using the sensor pen for the first time,
be sure to calibrate it.
B-76
When using the sensor pen, be sure to hold it
at the same angle as when it was calibrated.
The specification location may be misaligned
if the pen is held at a slightly different angle.
In this case, make fine adjustments after
making the selection.
B-76
Pointer of embroidery
foot “W+” with LED
pointer does not
indicate the position
correctly
CAUTION
• This machine is equipped with a thread detection device. If the “Start/Stop” button is pushed before the
upper threading is done, the machine will not operate properly. Also, depending on the pattern selected,
the machine may feed the fabric even if the needle is raised. This is due to the needle bar release
mechanism. At these times, the machine will make a sound different from what is made during normal
sewing. This is not the sign of a malfunction.
• If the power is disconnected during sewing:
Turn the main power to OFF and unplug the machine.
If you restart the machine, follow the instructions for operating the machine correctly.
Appendix A-17
1
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Fabric is snagged or caught on something.
Stabilizer is incorrectly attached, for example, it Attach the stabilizer correctly.
is smaller than the embroidery frame.
Loops appear on the
surface of the fabric
when embroidering
E-21
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR MESSAGES
If the machine is not properly set and the “Start/Stop” button or the “Reverse Stitch” button is pressed, or
if the operation procedure is incorrect, the machine does not start. An alarm sounds and an error message
is displayed on the LCD. If an error message displays, follow the instructions in the message.
Below is an explanation of error messages. Refer to these when necessary (if you press
operation correctly while the error message is displayed, the message disappears).
or do the
CAUTION
• Be sure to rethread the machine. If you press the “Start/Stop” button without rethreading the machine,
the thread tension may be wrong or the needle may break and cause injury.
Marks
Error Messages
Cause/Solution
A malfunction occurred.Turn the machine off, then on again.
This message is displayed if some malfunction occurs.
An invalid area was touched by the sensor pen. Touch again
within the active sensor area. (130mm x 200mm / 5"X 8")
This message appears when you touch the invalid area of
sensor pen. Touch the active area. (see page B-78)
An invalid sewing area was touched by the sensor pen. Touch This message appears when you touch the invalid area of
again within the valid sewing area.
sewing with the sensor pen. Touch the active area. (see page
B-78)
Attach the embroidery frame.
This message appears if the embroidery frame is not attached
when you press
in the embroidery screen. (see page
B-85)
Can not change the configuration of the characters
This message is displayed when there are too many characters
and the curved character configuration is impossible.
Check and rethread the upper thread.
This message is displayed when the upper thread is broken or
not threaded correctly, and the “Start/Stop” button or the
“Reverse Stitch” button is pressed.
Data volume is too large for this pattern.
This message is displayed when the patterns you are editing
take up too much memory, or if you are editing too many
patterns for the memory.
Failed to save file.
This message appears when you try to save more than 100
settings screen image files in the USB media. In this case,
delete a file from the USB media or use different USB media.
(see page B-35)
In twin needle mode, the automatic needle threading button
cannot be used.
This message is displayed when the automatic needle
threading button is pushed while twin needle sewing is set.
Lower the buttonhole lever.
This message is displayed when the buttonhole lever is up, a
buttonhole stitch is selected, and the “Start/Stop” button or
“Reverse Stitch” button is pushed.
Lower the presser foot lever.
This message is displayed when the “Presser Foot Lifter”
button is pushed while the presser foot lever is raised/the
needle is lowered.
Move the sensor pen away from the currently marked position. This message appears when you press down the sensor pen
tip before pressing
and keep pressing for the certain
period. Move the sensor pen away from the current position.
A-18
Not enough available memory to save the pattern. Delete
another pattern?
This message is displayed when the memory is full and the
stitch or pattern cannot be saved.
OK to automatically lower the presser foot?
This message is displayed when
presser foot is raised).
OK to delete the ending point setting?
This message appears when you try to recall the pattern
stored in the machine while specifying the sewing end point
using the sensor function. (see page B-83)
is pressed (the
ERROR MESSAGES
Marks
Error Messages
OK to delete the selected pattern?
Cause/Solution
This message is displayed when, after selecting a pattern,
or
is pressed and the pattern is about to be
deleted.
OK to delete the setting?
This message appears when
or
is pressed to
delete the settings for a utility stitch. To delete the selected
OK to recall and resume previous memory?
.
This message appears if the machine is turned off while
sewing, then turned on again.
Press
to return the machine to the condition (pattern
position and number of stitches) when it was turned off. Follow
the procedure described in “If the Thread Breaks During
Sewing” on page E-27 to align the needle position and sew the
remainder of the pattern.
OK to reset the pattern’s border setting, position and/or angle? This message appears when you try to use the automatic
positioning function using the sensor pen with the border
pattern. (see page B-85)
OK to revert to the original position and/or angle?
This message appears when you try to use the automatic
positioning function using the sensor pen with the pattern,
rotated or replaced. (see page B-85)
Preventive maintenance is recommended.
This message is displayed when the machine needs to be
maintained. (see page A-3)
Raise the buttonhole lever.
This message is displayed when the buttonhole lever is down,
a stitch other than a buttonhole is selected, and the “Start/
Stop” button or the “Reverse Stitch” button is pushed.
Remove Dual Feed module from the machine.
This message appears when you try to start embroidering with
the dual feed foot attached to the machine. Remove the dual
feed foot before entering the embroidery mode. (see page
B-69)
Remove Embroidery foot with LED pointer from the machine.
This message appears when you try to start sewing
utility/decorative stitch or character pattern with the
embroidery foot with the LED pointer attached to the machine.
Remove the embroidery foot with the LED pointer before
entering the sewing mode. (see page B-62)
Retrieving the pattern. Wait a moment.
This message is displayed when the machine is retrieving a
previously saved pattern while in “Embroidery Edit” mode.
Sensor module error.
This message appears when something is wrong with the
sensor unit of the machine. Consult your authorized retailer.
Set the clock.
This message appears when the time/date is not set. Set
time/date. (see page B-22)
The bobbin thread is almost empty.
This message is displayed when the bobbin thread is running
out.
The bobbin winder safety device has activated. Is the thread
tangled?
This message is displayed when the bobbin is being wound,
and the motor locks because the thread is tangled, etc.
The carriage of the embroidery unit will move. Keep your
hands etc. away from the carriage.
This message appears before embroidery unit moves.
The ending point cannot be selected for this stitch.
This message appears when the function to specify the sewing
end point cannot be used with the current stitch. Select other
stitch. (see page B-83)
The needle position cannot be changed for this stitch.
This message appears when the function to specify the needle
drop position cannot be used with the current stitch. Select
other stitch. (see page B-83)
The needle will move. Keep your hands etc. away from the
needle area.
This message appears when you touch the point closer than 2
cm from the needle drop point with the sensor pen in the
sensor function. (see page B-75)
The pattern extends out of the pattern area, repeat positioning This message appears when the specified pattern position
of center and angle using sensor pen.
extends out of the pattern area. Specify more centered
position of the embroidery frame. (see page B-85)
Appendix A-19
1
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
settings, press
A
ERROR MESSAGES
Marks
Error Messages
The pockets are full Delete a pattern.
Cause/Solution
This message is displayed when the memory is full and a
pattern must be deleted.
The safety device has been activated.Is the thread tangled? Is This message is displayed when the motor locks due to
the needle bent?
tangled thread or for other reasons related to thread delivery.
The shutoff support mode has been activated. Turn off the
machine.
This message appears when the machine is in the shutoff
support mode. Turn off the machine once to start the machine
again. (see page B-32)
The “Start/Stop” button does not operate with the foot
controller attached. Remove the foot controller.
This message is displayed when the “Start/Stop” button is
pushed to sew Utility stitches or Character/Decorative stitches
while the foot controller is connected.
(This message does not appear when embroidering).
The upper thread may not be threaded correctly. Thread the
upper thread from the beginning.
This message is displayed when it seems that the upper
thread has not been threaded correctly.
The USB media was changed. Do not change the USB media This message is displayed when you attempt to select a
while it is being read.
pattern after the USB media in which the pattern is saved has
been changed.
There is no needle plate cover. Attach a needle plate cover.
This message is displayed when the needle plate cover is not
attached.
This file cannot be used.
This message appears if the file format is incompatible with
this machine. Check the list of compatible file formats. (see
page S-95)
This file exceeds the data capacity and cannot be used. Use a This message is displayed when the file size exceeds the data
suitable size file.
capacity of the machine.
Confirm the file size and format. (see page S-96)
This function cannot be used while in the sensor mode.
This message appears when the selected function is not
available with the sensor function. (see page B-73)
This key cannot be used at this time.
This message is displayed when you press
in
the screen other than the Utility Stitch, or press
in the screen other than the Utility Stitch or
Character/Decorative Stitch.
This key does not operate when the needle is down. Raise the This message is displayed when a key on the LCD display is
needle and press the key again.
touched while the needle is in the down position.
A-20
This pattern cannot be sewn with this mode.
This message is displayed when the selected stitch is not
available for the specific function.
This stitch is not “Dual Feed Mode” compatible.
This message appears when the dual feed foot cannot be used
with the current stitch. Select other stitch. (see page B-68)
This USB media cannot be used.
This message is displayed when you try to use incompatible
media.
This USB media is incompatible.
This message is displayed when you try to use incompatible
USB media. For a list of compatible USB media, visit
“ www.babylock.com ”.
Transmitting by USB
This message is displayed while the USB media is
transmitting.
Turn off the power and replace the needle plate.
This message is displayed when you try to sew with a stitch
other than a middle needle position stitch while the single-hole
needle plate is installed.
This message is displayed when the needle plate is removed
with the machine on or when the machine is turned on and
“Embroidery” or “Embroidery Edit” mode is selected (see page
B-24).
USB media error
This message is displayed when an error occurs with the USB
media.
USB media is not loaded. Load USB media.
This message is displayed when you try to recall or save a
pattern while no USB media is loaded.
Use the presser foot lifter button to lower the presser foot.
This message is displayed when a button, such as the
“Start/Stop” button, is pushed while the presser foot is raised.
SPECIFICATIONS
Marks
Error Messages
Cause/Solution
When the speed controller is set to control the zigzag stitch
width, the “Start/Stop” button does not operate.
This message is displayed when the speed control lever is set
to control the zigzag stitch width, and the “Start/Stop” button
is pushed. Use the foot controller to operate the machine.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sewing Machine and Accessories
(Box 1 of 2)
Embroidery Unit
(Box 2 of 2)
Dimensions of machine
Approx. 57.1 cm (W) × 33.5 cm (H) × 28.4 cm (D) (approx.
22-1/2 inches (W) × 13-1/16 inches (H) × 11-3/16 inches (D))
Dimensions of box
Approx. 68.5 cm (W) × 55.0 cm (H) × 37.7 cm (D) (approx.
26-15/16 inches (W) × 21-5/8 inches (H) × 14-13/16 inches
(D))
Weight of machine
Approx. 15.4 kg (approx. 33.9 lb)
Weight of box (for shipping)
Approx. 22.0 kg (approx. 48.5 lb)
Sewing speed
70 to 1050 stitches per minute
Needles
Home sewing machine needles (HA × 130)
Dimensions of embroidery unit
Approx. 54.5 cm (W) × 13.0 cm (H) × 46.4 cm (D) (approx.
21-7/16 inches (W) × 5-1/8 inch (H) × 18-1/4 inches (D))
Dimensions of machine with
embroidery unit attached
Approx. 81.5 cm (W) × 33.5 cm (H) × 46.4 cm (D) (approx.
32-1/16 inches (W) × 13-1/16 inch (H) × 18-1/4 inches (D))
Dimensions of box
Approx. 68.5 cm (W) × 55.0 cm (H) × 18.8 cm (D) (approx.
26-15/16 inches (W) × 21-11/16 inch (H) × 7-7/16 inches (D))
Weight of embroidery unit
Approx. 3.9 kg (approx. 8.5 lb)
Weight of box (for shipping)
Approx. 6.0 kg (approx. 13.2 lb)
Total Shipping Weight (Combination of 2 boxes complete)
*
Specification
Approx. 31.0 kg (approx. 68.3 lb)
Please be aware that some specifications may change without notice.
Appendix A-21
1
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Item
A
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE
You can use USB media or a computer to upgrade software for your sewing machine.
When an upgrade program is available on “ www.babylock.com ”, please download the files following
the instructions on the website and steps below.
Note
• When using USB media to upgrade the software, check that no data other than the upgrade file is
saved on the USB media being used before starting to upgrade.
Upgrade Procedure Using USB
Media
a
While pressing the “Automatic Threading”
button, turn the main power to ON.
→ The following screen will appear on the LCD.
b
Press
c
Insert the USB media into the USB port for
media/mouse on the machine. The media
device should only contain the upgrade file.
Note
• The access lamp will begin blinking after
inserting USB media, and it will take about 5
to 6 seconds to recognize the media. (Time
will differ depending on the USB media).
d
Press
.
.
→ The upgrade file is loaded.
Note
• If an error occurs, a red text error message
will appear. When the installation is
performed successfully, following message
will appear.
a USB port for media/mouse
b USB media
A-22
e
Remove the USB media, and turn the
machine off and on again.
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE
Upgrade Procedure Using
Computer
a
A
1
While pressing the “Automatic Threading”
button, turn the main power to ON.
b
Press
.
e
When the message disappears, press
.
c
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine.
→ “Removable Disk” will appear in “Computer (My
computer)”.
d
Copy the upgrade file to “Removable Disk”.
→ The upgrade file is loaded.
Note
• If an error occurs, a red text error message
will appear. When the installation is
performed successfully, following message
will appear.
→ The following message will appear.
f
Unplug the USB cable, and turn the
machine off and on again.
Appendix A-23
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
→ The following screen will appear on the LCD.
INDEX
INDEX
A
Accessories
included accessories ............................................................ B-15
options ................................................................................. B-18
Accessory compartment ........................................................... B-15
Adapter .................................................................................... B-55
Adjusting the LED pointer ........................................................ B-64
Air vent .................................................................................... B-12
Aligning the position ................................................................. E-36
Alphabet characters
character/decorative stitches ................................................. S-78
embroidery ............................................................................. E-5
embroidery edit ..................................................................... E-59
Appliqué ................................................................................... S-48
embroidery patterns .............................................................. E-23
quilting ................................................................................. S-38
using a zigzag stitch .............................................................. S-31
using an embroidery frame pattern ........................................ E-52
Array key ....................................................................... E-60, E-64
Arrow keys ..................................................................... E-36, E-81
Automatic fabric sensor system ................................................. S-17
Automatic reinforcement stitch key ............................................. S-6
Automatic thread cutting key .................................................... S-13
Automatic Threading button ......................................... B-14, B-48
B
Back to beginning key ............................................................... S-88
Ball point needle 75/11 .................................................. B-60, E-33
Bar tacks ................................................................................... S-60
Basting ...................................................................................... S-28
Blind hem stitches ..................................................................... S-45
Bobbin
pulling up the bobbin thread ................................................ B-47
runs out of thread .................................................................. E-26
setting .................................................................................. B-45
winding ................................................................................ B-40
Bobbin case
bobbin case .......................................................................... E-21
cleaning ................................................................................. A-3
Bobbin cover ................................................................ B-13, B-46
Bobbin holder (switch) ............................................................. B-42
Bobbin winder ......................................................................... B-12
Bobbin work ................................................................ S-104, E-86
Border key ..................................................................... E-73, E-76
Button sewing ........................................................................... S-61
4 hole buttons ....................................................................... S-62
shank .................................................................................... S-62
Buttonhole lever ................................................. B-13, S-56, S-59
Buttonholes
odd-shaped/buttons that do not fit the button holder plate .... S-58
one-step ................................................................................ S-55
C
Calibrating the sensor pen ........................................................ B-76
Character spacing key ............................................................... E-64
Character/Decorative Stitches
adjustments ........................................................................... S-82
combining ............................................................................. S-90
editing ................................................................................... S-84
key functions ......................................................................... S-84
retrieving .................................................................. S-99, S-100
saving ............................................................. S-96, S-97, S-98
selecting ................................................................................ S-77
sewing .................................................................................. S-81
Cleaning
LCD screen ............................................................................ A-3
A-24
machine casing ...................................................................... A-3
race ........................................................................................ A-3
Combining Patterns
character/decorative stitches ................................................. S-90
embroidery edit .................................................................... E-80
Cord guide bobbin cover .......................................................... S-32
Crazy quilt ............................................................................... S-32
Custom Thread Table ..................................................... E-68, E-72
Cut/Tension key ....................................................................... E-30
D
Darning ....................................................................................
Dart seam .................................................................................
Density key ..............................................................................
Dual feed foot ..........................................................................
S-58
S-28
E-40
B-68
E
Eco mode ................................................................................. B-32
Editing
character/decorative stitches ................................................. S-84
embroidery ........................................................................... E-36
embroidery edit .................................................................... E-61
Elastic zigzag stitches ............................................................... S-33
Elongation key .......................................................................... S-87
Embroidery
adjusting the speed ............................................................... E-33
automatic thread cutting function (END COLOR TRIM) ........ E-32
edges or corners ................................................................... E-16
key functions ........................................................................ E-10
restarting from the beginning ................................................ E-28
resuming embroidery after turning off the power .................. E-28
ribbons or tape ..................................................................... E-16
selecting patterns .................................................................... E-3
small fabrics ......................................................................... E-16
thread color display .............................................................. E-34
thread trimming function (JUMP STITCH TRIM) .................... E-32
Embroidery card ......................................................................... E-7
Embroidery card reader .............................................................. E-7
Embroidery edit
changing the thread color ..................................................... E-67
combined patterns ...................................................... E-80, E-83
custom thread table .................................................... E-68, E-72
explanation of functions ....................................................... E-57
key functions ........................................................................ E-62
repeated patterns .................................................................. E-73
Embroidery foot ........................................................................ B-62
Embroidery foot with LED pointer ............................................ B-62
Embroidery frame display ......................................................... E-35
Embroidery frames
attaching .............................................................................. E-17
inserting fabric ...................................................................... E-14
removing .............................................................................. E-17
types ..................................................................................... E-13
using the embroidery sheet ................................................... E-15
Embroidery key ........................................................................ E-79
Embroidery needle plate cover ................................................. E-22
Embroidery patterns
aligning the position ............................................................. E-36
checking the position ........................................................... E-19
combining ............................................................................ E-80
duplicating ........................................................................... E-79
editing .................................................................................. E-61
linked characters .................................................................. E-41
patterns which use appliqué ................................................. E-23
retrieving .................................................................... E-49, E-50
revising ................................................................................. E-36
saving .............................................................. E-46, E-47, E-48
INDEX
selecting ...................................................................... E-3, E-58
sewing .................................................................................. E-21
using a frame pattern to make an appliqué ................ E-52, E-53
Embroidery sheet ...................................................................... E-15
Embroidery unit ............................................................. B-14, B-65
carriage ................................................................................ B-14
Error messages .......................................................................... A-18
Eyelet ....................................................................................... S-62
F
Fabrics
fabric/thread/needle combinations ........................................ B-60
sewing heavyweight fabrics .................................................... S-7
sewing lightweight fabrics ....................................................... S-9
sewing stretch fabrics ................................................... S-9, S-57
Fagoting ................................................................................... S-52
Feed dogs ...................................................................... B-13, S-40
Flat bed attachment ....................................................... B-12, B-65
Flat fell Seam ............................................................................ S-29
Foot controller ................................................................. B-12, S-4
Forward/Back key .......................................................... E-27, E-28
Free motion sewing mode ........................................................ S-40
changing the needle position ................................................ S-25
checking the needle location ................................................. B-7
fabric/thread/needle combinations ....................................... B-60
mode ................................................................................... B-24
twin needle .......................................................................... B-52
Needle bar thread guides .............................................. B-13, B-52
Needle clamp screw ................................................................ B-13
Needle mode selection key ...................................................... B-52
Needle plate ............................................................................ B-13
Needle position ............................................................. S-18, S-25
Needle Position button ............................................................ B-14
O
Operation buttons ......................................................... B-12, B-14
Overcasting ................................................................... S-31, S-33
P
I
Patchwork ................................................................................. S-32
Piecing ...................................................................................... S-36
Pintuck ..................................................................................... S-30
Pivoting .................................................................................... S-15
Power cord .............................................................................. B-22
Power cord receptacle ............................................................. B-12
Presser foot
adapter ................................................................................. B-55
attaching .............................................................................. B-55
pressure ................................................................................ S-17
removing .............................................................................. B-55
types ..................................................................................... S-68
Presser foot code ......................................................................... E-9
Presser foot holder ........................................................ B-13, B-55
Presser foot holder screw ......................................................... B-13
Presser foot lever .............................................................. B-12, S-8
Presser Foot Lifter button .......................................................... B-14
Presser foot/Needle exchange key ........... B-52, B-55, B-57, B-62
Pre-tension disk ................................................. B-12, B-42, B-44
Image key ............................................................ S-22, S-89, E-20
Q
G
Gathering ................................................................................. S-29
Guideline marker ..................................................................... S-14
H
Handle .....................................................................................
Handwheel ...............................................................................
Heirloom ..................................................................................
Hemstitching ............................................................................
Home page screen ....................................................................
B-12
B-12
S-53
S-53
B-24
Quilting .................................................................................... S-35
free motion ........................................................................... S-40
with satin stitches .................................................................. S-39
K
Key functions
character/decorative stitches .................................................
embroidery ...........................................................................
embroidery edit ....................................................................
utility stitches ........................................................................
Knee lifter ...................................................................... B-12,
S-84
E-10
E-62
B-26
S-15
L
L/R SHIFT ................................................................................. S-11
LCD screen .................................................................... B-12, B-24
cleaning .................................................................................. A-3
locking ................................................................................. S-18
Lower threading
pulling up the bobbin thread ................................................ B-47
setting the bobbin ................................................................. B-45
winding the bobbin .............................................................. B-40
R
Race .......................................................................................... A-3
Reinforcement Stitch button ............................................. B-14, S-5
Repeated patterns ..................................................................... E-73
Retrieving
character/decorative stitch patterns ....................................... S-99
computer ................................................................. S-101, E-51
embroidery patterns .............................................................. E-49
machine’s memory ..................................................... S-99, E-49
stitch settings ......................................................................... S-23
USB media ............................................................... S-100, E-50
utility stitches ........................................................................ S-23
Reverse Stitch button ....................................................... B-14, S-5
Reverse/Reinforcement stitches ................................................... S-5
Rotate key ...................................................................... E-38, E-63
M
Machine operation mode key ..................................................... A-7
Main power switch ............................................. B-12, B-21, B-73
Mini spool insert ....................................................................... B-41
Mirror image key ................................................. S-21, S-87, E-39
Multi color key .............................................................. E-40, E-66
Multi-directional sewing ........................................................... S-63
N
Needle
changing the needle ............................................................. B-57
S
Satin stitches .................................................................. S-39,
Saving
character/decorative stitches .................................................
computer ................................................................... S-98,
embroidery patterns ..............................................................
machine’s memory ..................................................... S-96,
stitch settings .........................................................................
USB media ................................................................. S-97,
utility stitches ........................................................................
Scallop stitches .........................................................................
S-88
S-96
E-48
E-46
E-46
S-22
E-47
S-22
S-50
Appendix A-25
A
1
INDEX
Screen brightness ....................................................................... A-6
Sensor functions ....................................................................... B-72
embroidering position .......................................................... B-85
guideline marker .................................................................. B-78
L/R SHIFT ............................................................................. B-81
needle drop position ............................................................ B-80
sewing end point .................................................................. B-83
Sensor pen ............................................................................... B-73
Sensor pen holder .................................................................... B-74
Settings
automatic reinforcement stitching ........................................... S-5
automatic thread cutting ............................................ S-13, E-32
display language .................................................................. B-33
embroidery settings .............................................................. B-31
general settings .................................................................... B-29
machine setting mode key ............................... B-28, E-33, E-68
sewing settings ..................................................................... B-28
stitch length .......................................................................... S-10
stitch width ........................................................................... S-10
thread tension ............................................................ S-12, E-30
thread trimming .................................................................... E-32
Sewing machine help key ........................................................ B-36
Sewing speed controller (speed control slide) ........ B-12, B-14, S-3
Sewing type selection key ........................................................ B-38
Shelltuck stitches ...................................................................... S-49
Shutoff support mode ............................................................... B-32
Single/Repeat sewing key .......................................................... S-87
Size key ......................................................................... E-37, E-63
Size selection key ..................................................................... S-86
Smocking stitches ..................................................................... S-51
Speaker .................................................................................... B-29
Specifications ........................................................................... A-21
Spool cap ................................................................................. B-12
Spool net ................................................................................. B-54
Spool pin ................................................................................. B-12
Stabilizer ................................................................................... E-11
Start/Stop button ...................................................................... B-14
Starting point key ...................................................................... E-37
Step stitch patterns .................................................................... S-93
Stitch setting chart ..................................................................... S-68
Straight stitch foot ..................................................................... S-26
Straight stitch needle plate ........................................................ S-26
Straight stitches ......................................................................... S-24
Supplemental spool pin ..................................... B-12, B-40, B-52
T
Tape attaching .......................................................................... S-33
Tape or elastic attaching ........................................................... S-52
Thread
fabric/thread/needle combinations ....................................... B-60
thread tension ............................................................ S-12, E-30
Thread color display ................................................................. E-34
Thread cutter ................................................................... B-12, S-4
Thread Cutter button ................................................................ B-14
Thread density key .................................................................... S-88
Thread guide ........................................... B-12, B-41, B-44, B-53
Thread guide plate ............................................. B-12, B-44, B-48
Thread marks ............................................................................ E-76
Thread palette key .............................................. E-66, E-67, E-72
Top cover ................................................................................ B-12
Top stitching ............................................................................. S-50
Touch pen ...................................................................... E-67, A-6
Trial key .................................................................................... E-19
Troubleshooting ......................................................................... A-7
Twin needle ............................................................................. B-52
U
Uninterrupted embroidering (Monochrome) ............................. E-43
Upgrading ................................................................................ A-22
Upper threading
twin needle mode ................................................................ B-52
using the “Automatic Threading” button .............................. B-48
A-26
using the spool net ...............................................................
USB cable ..................................... B-67, S-98, E-48, E-51,
USB media
recalling ................................................................... S-100,
saving ......................................................................... S-97,
usable ......................................................................... S-95,
USB mouse ................................................................... B-32,
USB port connector
for computer .................................................... B-12, S-98,
for media .................................................................... S-97,
Utility stitches
key functions ........................................................................
pattern explanation key ........................................................
retrieving ..............................................................................
saving ...................................................................................
selecting ...............................................................................
sewing type selection key .....................................................
stitch setting chart .................................................................
B-54
A-23
E-50
E-47
E-44
B-68
E-48
E-47
B-26
B-39
S-23
S-22
S-21
B-38
S-68
W
Walking foot ............................................................................ B-55
Z
Zigzag stitches .......................................................................... S-31
Zipper insertion
centered ............................................................................... S-64
side ...................................................................................... S-65
English
882-C41
Printed in Taiwan
XF3648-001
Download PDF
Similar pages